DVP-ES2/EX2/SS2/SA2/SX2/SE&TP

Industrial Automation Headquarters

Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan City,
Taoyuan County 33068, Taiwan
TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-371-6301

Asia
Delta Electronics (Jiangsu) Ltd.
Wujiang Plant 3
1688 Jiangxing East Road,
Wujiang Economic Development Zone
Wujiang City, Jiang Su Province, P.R.C. 215200
TEL: 86-512-6340-3008 / FAX: 86-769-6340-7290

Delta Greentech (China) Co., Ltd.

238 Min-Xia Road, Pudong District,
ShangHai, P.R.C. 201209
TEL: 86-21-58635678 / FAX: 86-21-58630003

Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.

Tokyo Office
2-1-14 Minato-ku Shibadaimon,
Tokyo 105-0012, Japan
TEL: 81-3-5733-1111 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1211

Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.

1511, Byucksan Digital Valley 6-cha, Gasan-dong,
Geumcheon-gu, Seoul, Korea, 153-704

DVP-ES2/EX2/SS2/
TEL: 82-2-515-5303 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302

Delta Electronics Int’l (S) Pte Ltd.

SA2/SX2/SE&TP
4 Kaki Bukit Ave 1, #05-05, Singapore 417939
TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228

Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd.

Operation Manual - Programming

Plot No 43 Sector 35, HSIIDC
Gurgaon, PIN 122001, Haryana, India
TEL : 91-124-4874900 / FAX : 91-124-4874945 Operation Manual - Programming
Americas
Delta Products Corporation (USA)
Raleigh Office
P.O. Box 12173,5101 Davis Drive,
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A.
TEL: 1-919-767-3800 / FAX: 1-919-767-8080

Delta Greentech (Brasil) S.A.

Sao Paulo Office
Rua Itapeva, 26 - 3° andar Edificio Itapeva One-Bela Vista
01332-000-São Paulo-SP-Brazil
TEL: 55 11 3568-3855 / FAX: 55 11 3568-3865

Europe
Deltronics (The Netherlands) B.V.
Eindhoven Office
De Witbogt 20, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands
TEL : +31-40-2592850 / FAX : +31-40-2592851
VOIP : 170

DVP-0139720-10

*We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice.
2018-10-30
www.deltaww.com
 DVP-ES2/EX2/SS2/SA2/SX2/SE&TP

Operation Manual

Programming
Revision History

Issue Description of Changes Date

First
The first edition is issued. 2010/02/26
version
Second
The second edition is issued. 2 0 11 / 0 3 / 0 3
version
1. C h a p t e r 2 . 8 M R e l a y: A d d M 1 0 3 7 , M 111 9 ,
M 11 8 2 , M 1 3 0 8 , M 1 3 4 6 , a n d M 1 3 5 6 , a n d u p d a t e
the description of the functions of
M 1 0 5 5 ~ M 1 0 5 7 a n d M 11 8 3 .
2. C h a p t e r 2 . 1 3 Sp e c i a l D a t a R e g i s t e r : A d d D 1 0 3 7 ,
D1312, D1354, and D1900~D1931, and modify
the attributes of the latched functions of D1062,
D 111 4 , D 111 5 , a n d D 111 8 .
3. C h a p t e r 2 . 1 6 A p p l i c a t i o n s o f Sp e c i a l M R e l a ys
and D Registers: Update the description of the
f u n c t i o n s o f RT C s ; a d d M 1 0 3 7 , D 1 0 3 7 （ E n a b l e
Third
S P D f u n c t i o n ） , M 111 9 （ E n a b l e 2 - s p e e d o u t p u t 2 0 11 / 0 9 / 2 9
version
f u n c t i o n o f D D RV I i n s t r u c t i o n ） , M 1 3 0 8 , D 1 3 1 2
（ Output specified pulses or seek Z phase
s i g n a l w h e n z e r o p o i n t i s a c h i e v e d ）, a n d M 1 3 4 6
（ O u t p u t c l e a r s i g n a l s wh e n Z R N i s c o m p l e t e d ）;
Eas y PLC Link is changed to PLC Link, and the
description is added.
4. Chapter 3.1 Basic Instructions (without API
numbers) and Chapter 3.2 Explanations to Basic
Instructions: Add NP and PN instructions, and
add Chapter 3.7 Numerical List of Instructions
(in alphabetic order)
Issue Description of Changes Date
5. Chapter 3.6 Numerical List of Instructions and
C h a p t e r 3 . 8 D e ta i l e d I n s t r u c t i o n E x p l a n a t i o n :
I n c r e a s e e x p l a n a t i o n s o f D S PA i n s t r u c t i o n , a n d
a d d f l o a t i n g - p o i n t c o n ta c t t yp e c o m pa r i s o n
instructions FLD=, FLD>, FLD<, FLD<>, FLD<=,
F L D > = , FA N D = , FA N D > , FA N D < , FA N D < > ,
FA N D < = , FA N D > = , F O R = , F O R > , F O R < , F O R < > ,
F O R < = , F O R > = ; a d d t h e s u p p l e m e n ta r y
description of PLSR instruction and the
d e s c r i p t i o n o f K 11 ~ K 1 9 i n D T M i n s t r u c t i o n
mode; update the description of API166
instruction.
1. SE is added in the title of the manual.
2. Chapter 2.16: The default value in D1062 is K10.
3 . A P I 1 5 i n C h a p t e r 3 : T h e c o n t e n ts a b o u t S < D a r e
deleted in program example 3.
Fourth 4. API 148 and API 149 are added in Chapter 3.
2012/07/01
version 5. The inform ation related to DVP-SE is added.
6. The inform ation related to DVP32ES-C is added.
7. The descriptions of the models are added in the
c o n t e n ts .
8. Appendix A is added.
1 . A P I 11 3 i s a d d e d .
Fifth
2. API150 is updated. 2012/09/01
version
3. Chapter 7 is updated.
1 . M 11 4 8 , M 1 5 8 0 , M 1 5 8 1 , M 1 5 8 4 , M 1 5 8 5 , M 11 8 2 ,
a n d M 11 8 3 a r e a d d e d t o C h a p t e r 2 .
2. Chapter 3 is updated. API53, API 156, API 159,
API69, API88, API143, API150, API155, API258,
and API296-313 are added.
Sixth
3. The description of API 178 is updated. 2013/02/20
version
4. The description of the input/output mapping
areas for DVP-ES2-C as a slave station is added
to section 7.1.2.
5. C232, C249, and C250 are deleted from the
d e s c r i p t i o n o f t h e S E m em o r y M a p .
 Issue Description of Changes Date
6. Appendix B is added.
7. Appendix C is added.
1 . T h e t i m e r i n t e r r u p ts I 8 0 5 ~ I 8 9 9 a r e a d d e d t o
C h a p t e r 2 . T h e s p e c i a l a u x i l i a r y r e l a ys
M1357~M1359, M1590, M1598, and M1599 are
a d d e d t o t h e ta b l e o f s p e c i a l a u x i l i a r y r e l a ys . T h e
descriptions of D1027 and D9998 in the table of
special data registers are updated.
D 1 0 5 6 ~ D 1 0 5 9 , D 11 5 0 ~ D 11 5 3 , D 1 2 4 6 ~ D 1 2 4 7 ,
a n d D 9 9 9 9 a r e a d d e d t o t h e ta b l e o f s p e c i a l d a ta
registers. The definitions of the pins in COM1 are
added to the description of M1035. The new
s p e c i a l a u x i l i a r y r e l a y s i n t h e ta b l e o f s p e c i a l
data registers and the new special data registers
i n t h e t a b l e o f s p e c i a l d a ta r e g i s t e r s a r e
Seventh described in section 2.16.
2014/07/04
version 2 . A P I 11 4 , A P I 11 5 , A P I 1 4 5 , a n d A P I 2 9 5 a r e a d d e d
to Chapter 3. The descriptions of API17, API22,
API23, API59, API78, API80, API81, API83,
A P I 1 0 1 ~ A P I 1 0 6 , A P I 11 2 - A P I 11 3 , A P I 1 5 0 ,
API166, API179, and API197 are updated.
3. The information about M1040 is added to Chapter
5.
4. The description of the error code C450 is added
to Chapter 6.
5. In Appendix C, the information about TP04P
series text panels is changed to the information
about T P series text panels.
6. Appendix D is added. It introduces the current
consumption of slim PLCs/extension modules.
1 . I n s e c t i o n B . 1 , t h e n u m b e r o f RT U m o d u l e s o n t o
which a DVP-SE series PLC can be mapped is
Eighth updated.
2014/08/29
version 2. In section B.2.2, the descriptions of
CR#20~CR#86 are updated.
3. In section B.2.3, the descriptions of
Issue Description of Changes Date
CR#17~CR#24 are updated, the description of
CR#27 is added, and the descriptions of
CR#87~CR103 are updated.
4. In section B.2.4, the descriptions of CR#0 and
CR#20~CR#26 are updated.
5. Section B.6 is added.
1. Chapter 2: add Ethernet descriptions in section
2 . 1 , u p d a t e M 111 9 , M 1 3 3 4 , M 1 3 3 8 ,
M1700~M1731 in section 2.8, updated
software/hardware high speed counter
descriptions in section 2.12, add D1021
descriptions in section 2.13, add interrupt
descriptions in section 2.15, add D1021, M1334,
M 1 3 3 5 a n d u p d a t e M 111 9 a n d P L C l i n k
descriptions in section 2.16.
2. Chapter 3: update instruction list. Update
A P I 11 3 , A P I 1 5 , A P I 1 7 , A P I 5 1 , A P I 5 9 , A P I 6 8 ,
API76, API80, API123, API150, API158, API159,
Ninth API206, and add new instruction descriptions
2017/04/26
version API337.
3. Chapter 4: update Modbus address for SE series
in section 4.4.
4. Chapter 6: delete error codes C430, C441, and
C442. Add new error codes C430, C437 and C438
in section 6.2.
5. Appendix A: add descriptions of the USB
installation in W indows 10.
6. Appendix B: add descriptions of ES2-E series.
7. Appendix C: update descriptions of program
c a pa c i t y f o r T P s e r i e s .
8. Appendix D: add descriptions for
28SS2/28SA2/26SE.
1 . S e c t i o n 2 . 1 : u p d a t e f i l e r e g i s t e r c o n t e n ts
Te n t h 2 . S e c t i o n 2 . 2 - 2 . 4 : u p d a t e e x t e r n a l i n p u ts X a n d Y
2018/10/30
version 3 . S e c t i o n 2 . 8 : a d d M 1 0 1 9 , M 11 4 5 , M 11 9 6 - M 11 9 8 ,
M 1 6 1 4 - M 1 6 7 5 a n d u p d a t e M 111 9 , M 11 8 3 , M 1 3 3 4 ,
Issue Description of Changes Date
M1335, 1700-1731
4. Section 2.12: update supporting modules for
hardware high speed counters
5. Section 2.13: update D1021 and add
D 11 7 5 - D 11 7 7 , D 1 2 2 7 - D 1 2 3 1 , D 1 4 0 0 - D 1 4 0 3 a n d
D6000-D6063
6. Section 2.15: update timer interrupt in API05
7 . S e c t i o n 2 . 1 6 : a d d M 1 0 1 9 a s we l l a s 11 4 5 a n d
u p d a t e D 1 0 2 0 , D 1 0 2 1 , M 111 9 , P L C L i n k , M 1 3 3 4 ,
M1335
8. Section 3.5: update index register E and F
9. Section 3.6: add API315, API316,
API328-API336, API338-API340 and API342
10. Section 3.8: update API50, API53-API59, API68,
A P I 8 0 , A P I 8 5 , A P I 8 6 , A P I 11 3 , A P I 1 4 5 , A P I 1 4 8 ,
API149, API158, API159, API198 and API337 and
add API315, API316, API328-API336,
API338-API340, API342
1 1 . S e c t i o n 7 . 1 . 1 : u p d a t e m a x im um n u m b e r o f P D O
s u p p o r t e d a n d u p d a t e s ta n d a r d D e l ta c a b l e
model names
12. Appendix A.1: update installation instruction for
W in d o ws 7
13. Appendix B.1: update Ethernet function
14. Appendix B.5: update object list
1 5 . A p p e n d i x C : u p d a t e D 111 4 a n d D 111 5
16. Appendix C.4.3: TP04P-08TP1R does not support
h i g h - s p e e d i n p u ts
17. Appendix E: add a new appendix for slim-type
special modules
18. Appendix F: add a new appendix for slim-type
PLC specifications
 DVP-ES2/EX2/SS2/SA2/SX2/SE&TP
Operation Manual
Programming
Contents
1 PLC Concepts
1.1 PLC Scan Method .................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Current Flow ............................................................................................. 1-3
1.3 NO Contact, NC Contact .......................................................................... 1-3
1.4 PLC Registers and Relays ....................................................................... 1-3
1.5 Ladder Logic Symbols .............................................................................. 1-3
1.5.1 Creating a PLC Ladder Program ....................................................... 1-5
1.5.2 LD / LDI (Load NO contact / Load NC contact) ................................. 1-6
1.5.3 LDP / LDF (Load Rising edge trigger/ Load Falling edge trigger) ...... 1-6
1.5.4 AND / ANI (Connect NO contact in series / Connect NC contact in
series) ............................................................................................... 1-6
1.5.5 ANDP / ANDF (Connect Rising edge in series/ Connect Falling edge in
series) ............................................................................................... 1-6
1.5.6 OR / ORI (Connect NO contact in parallel / Connect NC contact in
parallel) ............................................................................................. 1-6
1.5.7 ORP / ORF (Connect Rising edge in parallel/ Connect Falling edge in
parallel) ............................................................................................. 1-6
1.5.8 ANB (Connect block in series) .......................................................... 1-6
1.5.9 ORB (Connect block in parallel) ........................................................ 1-7
1.5.10 MPS / MRD / MPP (Branch instructions) ........................................... 1-7
1.5.11 STL (Step Ladder Programming)....................................................... 1-7
1.5.12 RET (Return) ..................................................................................... 1-8
1.6 Conversion between Ladder Diagram and Instruction List Mode ............. 1-9
1.7 Fuzzy Syntax ...........................................................................................1-10
1.8 Correcting Ladder Diagram .....................................................................1-11
1.9 Basic Program Design Examples ............................................................1-13

2 Programming Concepts
2.1 ES2/EX2 Memory Map ............................................................................. 2-2
2.2 SS2 Memory Map ..................................................................................... 2-4
2.3 SA2/SX2 Memory Map ............................................................................. 2-6
2.4 SE Memory Map ....................................................................................... 2-8
2.5 Status and Allocation of Latched Memory ...............................................2-10
2.6 PLC Bits, Nibbles, Bytes, Words, etc.......................................................2-11
2.7 Binary, Octal, Decimal, BCD, Hex ...........................................................2-11
2.8 M Relay ...................................................................................................2-12
2.9 S Relay ....................................................................................................2-24
2.10 T (Timer)..................................................................................................2-24
2.11 C (Counter)..............................................................................................2-25

i
2.12 High-speed Counters .............................................................................. 2-27
2.13 Special Data Register ............................................................................. 2-31
2.14 E, F Index Registers................................................................................ 2-42
2.15 Nest Level Pointer[N], Pointer[P], Interrupt Pointer [I] ............................. 2-43
2.16 Applications of Special M Relays and D Registers.................................. 2-45

3 Instruction Set
3.1 Basic Instructions (without API numbers).................................................. 3-2
3.2 Explanations to Basic Instructions............................................................. 3-2
3.3 Pointers ................................................................................................... 3-13
3.4 Interrupt Pointers..................................................................................... 3-13
3.5 Application Programming Instructions ..................................................... 3-15
3.6 Numerical List of Instructions (classified according to the function) ........ 3-24
3.7 Numerical List of Instructions (in alphabetic order) ................................. 3-32
3.8 Detailed Instruction Explanation .............................................................. 3-41

4 Communications
4.1 Communication Ports ................................................................................ 4-2
4.2 Communication Protocol ASCII mode ....................................................... 4-3
4.2.1 ADR (Communication Address) ......................................................... 4-3
4.2.2 CMD (Command code) and DATA ..................................................... 4-4
4.2.3 LRC CHK (checksum) ........................................................................ 4-5
4.3 Communication Protocol RTU mode ......................................................... 4-7
4.3.1 Address (Communication Address).................................................... 4-7
4.3.2 CMD (Command code) and DATA ..................................................... 4-7
4.3.3 CRC CHK (check sum) ...................................................................... 4-8
4.4 PLC Device Address ............................................................................... 4-10
4.5 Command Code ...................................................................................... 4-12
4.5.1 Command Code: 01, Read Status of Contact (Input point X is not
included) .......................................................................................... 4-12
4.5.2 Command Code: 02, Read Status of Contact (Input point X is included)
......................................................................................................... 4-13
4.5.3 Command Code: 03, Read Content of Register (T, C, D) ................ 4-14
4.5.4 Command Code: 05, Force ON/OFF single contact ........................ 4-15
4.5.5 Command Code: 06, Set content of single register.......................... 4-16
4.5.6 Command Code: 15, Force ON/OFF multiple contacts .................... 4-16
4.5.7 Command Code: 16, Set content of multiple registers ..................... 4-17

5 Sequential Func tion Chart

5.1 Step Ladder Instruction [STL], [RET] ........................................................ 5-2
5.2 Sequential Function Chart (SFC) .............................................................. 5-2
5.3 The Operation of STL Program ................................................................. 5-4
5.4 Points to Note for Designing a Step Ladder Program ............................. 5-10
5.5 Types of Sequences ............................................................................... 5-12
5.6 IST Instruction ......................................................................................... 5-23

ii
6 Troubleshooting
6.1 Common Problems and Solutions ............................................................ 6-2
6.2 Error code Table (Hex) ............................................................................. 6-4
6.3 Error Detection Devices............................................................................ 6-6

7 CANopen Functi on and Operation

7.1 The Introduction of CANopen ................................................................... 7-2
7.1.1 The Description of the CANopen Functions ...................................... 7-2
7.1.2 The Input/Output Mapping Areas ...................................................... 7-3
7.2 The Installation and the Network Topology .............................................. 7-3
7.2.1 The Dimensions ................................................................................ 7-3
7.2.2 The Profile ......................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.3 The CAN Interface and the Network Topology .................................. 7-4
7.3 The CANopen Protocol............................................................................. 7-9
7.3.1 The Introduction of the CANopen Protocol ........................................ 7-9
7.3.2 The CANopen Communication Object .............................................7-10
7.3.3 The Predefined Connection Set .......................................................7-15
7.4 Sending SDO, NMT and Reading Emergency Message through the Ladder
Diagram ...................................................................................................7-15
7.4.1 Data Structure of SDO Request Message ........................................7-16
7.4.2 Data Structure of NMT Message ......................................................7-18
7.4.3 Data Structure of EMERGENCY Request Message .........................7-19
7.4.4 Example on Sending SDO through the Ladder Diagram ..................7-20
7.5 Indicators and Troubleshooting ...............................................................7-22
7.5.1 Description of Indicators ...................................................................7-22
7.5.2 CANopen Network Node State Display ............................................7-23
7.6 Application Example ................................................................................7-25
7.7 Object Dictionary .....................................................................................7-33

Appendix A
A.1 Installing the USB Driver in Windows 7 .................................................... A-2
A.2 Installing the USB in Windows 8 ............................................................... A-4
A.3 Installing the USB Driver in Windows 10 .................................................. A-7

Appendix B
B.1 Specifications for an Ethernet PLC/Module .............................................. B-2
B.2 Ethernet Control Registers ....................................................................... B-2
B.2.1 Station Addresses of Ethernet Modules............................................. B-2
B.2.2 DVP-SE Series PLC (Ethernet PLC) ................................................. B-3
B.2.3 DVPEN01-SL (Left-side Ethernet Communication Module) .............. B-4
B.2.4 DVP-FEN01 (DVP-EH3 Series Ethernet Communication Card) ....... B-6
B.3 Searching for an Ethernet PLC................................................................. B-7
B.3.1 Communication setting ...................................................................... B-7
B.3.2 Broadcast Search .............................................................................. B-8
B.3.3 Searching for a Model Specified ...................................................... B-10

iii
 B.3.4 Searching by an IP Address ............................................................. B-11
B.4 Data Exchange....................................................................................... B-12
B.5 EtherNet/IP List ...................................................................................... B-13
B.5.1 EtherNet/IP Information Supported by DVP-SE series PLCs .......... B-13
B.5.2 EtherNet/IP Objects Supported by DVP-SE series PLCs................ B-14
B.6 RTU Mapping ......................................................................................... B-19
B.6.1 Setting the RTU Mapping ................................................................ B-20
B.6.2 Application of the RTU Mapping ..................................................... B-21

Appendix C
C.1 TP Memory Map....................................................................................... C-2
C.2 Special Data Register .............................................................................. C-3
C.3 Special Auxiliary Relay ........................................................................... C-12
C.4 Instructions applicable to TP .................................................................. C-21
C.4.1 Basic Instructions ............................................................................ C-21
C.4.2 Numerical List of Instructions .......................................................... C-22
C.4.3 Additional Remarks on High-speed Instructions ............................. C-26

Appendix D
D.1 Current Consumption of a Slim PLC/an Extension Module ...................... D-2
D.1.1 Current supply and current consumption of a PLC (+24VDC) .......... D-2
D.1.2 Current supply and current consumption of a digital input/output
module (+24VDC) ............................................................................. D-2
D.1.3 Current consumption of a special input/output module (+24VDC) .... D-3
D.1.4 Current consumption of a left-side high-speed special module (+24VDC)
.......................................................................................................... D-3
D.1.5 Calculating the maximum current consumed by a system ................ D-3

Appendix E
E.1 DVP Series Slim Type Special Modules .................................................. E-2
E.2 Connections of a Slim Type Special Module (Work alone) ...................... E-2
E.3 Using WPL Editor ..................................................................................... E-2

Appendix F
F.1 General Specifications .............................................................................. F-2

iv
T h e D V P s e r i e s P L C s a r e l i s t e d b e l o w.

Series Model name

DVP16ES200R, DVP16ES200T, DVP24ES200R, DVP24ES200T,
DVP32ES200R, DVP32ES200T, DVP32ES211T, DVP40ES200R,
DVP-ES2
DVP40ES200T, DVP60ES200R, DVP60ES200T,
DVP40ES200RM, DVP58ES200R, DVP58ES200T
DVP-ES2-C DVP32ES200RC, DVP32ES200TC
DVP20ES200RE, DVP20ES200TE, DVP32ES200RE,
DVP-ES2-E DVP32ES200TE, DVP40ES200RE, DVP40ES200TE,
DVP60ES200RE, DVP60ES200TE
DVP-EX2 DVP20EX200R, DVP20EX200T, DVP30EX200R, DVP30EX200T

DVP-SS2 DVP14SS211R, DVP14SS211T, DVP28SS211R, DVP28SS211T

DVP-SA2 DVP12SA211R, DVP12SA211T, DVP28SA211R, DVP28SA211T

DVP-SX2 DVP20SX211R, DVP20SX211S, DVP20SX211T

DVP-SE DVP12SE11R, DVP12SE11T, DVP26SE11R, DVP26SE11T

TP04P-16TP1R, TP04P-32TP1R, TP04P-22XA1R,
TP04P-21EX1R, TP04P-16TP1T, TP04P-32TP1T,
TP04P-22XA1T, TP04P-21EX1T, TP70P-16TP1R,
TP
TP70P-32TP1R, TP70P-22XA1R, TP70P-21EX1R,
TP70P-16TP1T, TP70P-32TP1T, TP70P-22XA1T,
TP70P-21EX1T, TP04P-08TP1R

v
PLC Concepts
This chapter introduces basic and advanced concepts of ladder logic, which is the mostly
adopted programming language of PLC. Users familiar with the PLC concepts can move to
the next chapter for further programming concepts. However, for users not familiar with the
operating principles of PLC, please refer to this chapter to get a full understanding of PLC
concepts.

Chapter Contents

1.1 PLC Scan Method ............................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2 Current Flow........................................................................................................................ 1-3
1.3 NO Contact, NC Contact .................................................................................................... 1-3
1.4 PLC Registers and Relays ................................................................................................. 1-3
1.5 Ladder Logic Symbols ....................................................................................................... 1-4
1.5.1 Creating a PLC Ladder Program ........................................................................... 1-5
1.5.2 LD / LDI (Load NO contact / Load NC contact) ..................................................... 1-6
1.5.3 LDP / LDF (Load Rising edge trigger/ Load Falling edge trigger) ......................... 1-6
1.5.4 AND / ANI (Connect NO contact in series / Connect NC contact in series) .......... 1-6
1.5.5 ANDP / ANDF (Connect Rising edge in series/ Connect Falling edge in series) .. 1-6
1.5.6 OR / ORI (Connect NO contact in parallel / Connect NC contact in parallel) ....... 1-6
1.5.7 ORP / ORF (Connect Rising edge in parallel/ Connect Falling edge in parallel) .. 1-6
1.5.8 ANB (Connect block in series) .............................................................................. 1-6
1.5.9 ORB (Connect block in parallel) ............................................................................ 1-7
1.5.10 MPS / MRD / MPP (Branch instructions)............................................................... 1-7
1.5.11 STL (Step Ladder Programming) .......................................................................... 1-7
1.5.12 RET (Return) ......................................................................................................... 1-8
1.6 Conversion between Ladder Diagram and Instruction List Mode ................................. 1-9
1.7 Fuzzy Syntax ..................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.8 Correcting Ladder Diagram ............................................................................................. 1-11
1.9 Basic Program Design Examples ................................................................................... 1-13

1-1
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

1.1 PLC Scan Method

PLC utilizes a standard scan method when evaluating user program.

Scanning process:
Read the physical input status and store the data in internal
Scan input status
memory.
Evaluate the user program with data stored in internal memory.
Evaluate user program Program scanning starts from up to down and left to right until
reaching the end of the program.
Refresh the outputs Write the evaluated data to the physical outputs

Input signal Input X Input signal:

PLC reads the ON/OFF status of each input and
stores the status into memory before evaluating
Input terminal the user program.
Once the external input status is stored into
Store to memory internal memory, any change at the external
Input signal memory inputs will not be updated until next scan cycle
starts.
Read X0 status from memory Program:
Program
PLC executes instructions in user program from
X0 Write Y0 state into
top to down and left to right then stores the
Device Memory

Y0 evaluated data into internal memory. Some of this

Read Y0 state from memory memory is latched.
Y0 Output:
M0 When END command is reached the program
Write M0 state into evaluation is complete. The output memory is
transferred to the external physical outputs.
Output
Output Output latched memory

Output terminal

Output Y

Scan time
The duration of the full scan cycle (read, evaluate, write) is called “scan time.” With more I/O or
longer program, scan time becomes longer.
PLC measures its own scan time and stores the value (0.1ms) in register
Read
D1010, minimum scan time in register D1011, and maximum scan time in
scan time
register D1012.
Measure Scan time can also be measured by toggling an output every scan and then
scan time measuring the pulse width on the output being toggled.
Scan time can be calculated by adding the known time required for each
Calculate
instruction in the user program. For scan time information of individual
scan time
instruction please refer to Ch3 in this manual.

Scan time exception

PLC can process certain items faster than the scan time. Some of these items interrupts and halt
the scan time to process the interrupt subroutine program. A direct I/O refresh instruction REF
allows the PLC to access I/O immediately during user program evaluation instead of waiting until
the next scan cycle.

1-2
 1 . P L C C o n c e p ts

1.2 Current Flow

Ladder logic follows a left to right principle. In the example below, the current flows through paths
started from either X0 or X3.
X0 X1 X2 Y0
Y0
X3 X4

Reverse Current
When a current flows from right to left, which makes a reverse current logic, an error will be
detected when compiling the program. The example below shows the reverse current flow.
X0 X1 X2 Y0
Y0
X3 a X4 X5
b

X6

1.3 NO Contact, NC Contact

NO contact

Normally Open Contact, A contact

NC Contact

Normally Closed Contact, B contact

1.4 PLC Registers and Relays
Introduction to the basic internal devices in a PLC
Bit memory represents the physical input points and receives external input
X signals.
(Input Relay)  Device indication: Indicated as X and numbered in octal, e.g. X0~X7,
X10~X17…X377
Bit memory represents the physical output points and saves the status to be
Y refreshed to physical output devices.
(Output Relay)  Device indication: Indicated as Y and numbered in octal, e.g. Y0~Y7,
Y10~Y17. ..Y377
Bit memory indicates PLC status.
M
 Device indication: Indicated as M and numbered in decimal, e.g. M0, M1,
(Internal Relay)
M2…M4095
Bit memory indicates PLC status in Step Function Control (SFC) mode. If no
STL instruction is applied in program, step point S can be used as an internal
S
relay M as well as an annunciator.
(Step Relay)
 Device indication: Indicated as S and numbered in decimal, e.g. S0, S1,
S2…S1023
Bit, word or double word memory used for timing and has coil, contact and
T register in it. When its coil is ON and the set time is reached, the associated
(Relay) contact will be energized. Every timer has its resolution (unit:
(Word) 1ms/10ms/100ms).
(Dword)  Device indication: Indicated as T and numbered in decimal, e.g. T0, T1,
T2…T255

1-3
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Bit, word or double word memory used for counting and has coil, contact and
C register in it. The counter count once (1 pulse) when the coil goes from OFF to
(Counter) ON. When the predefined counter value is reached, the associated contact will
(Relay) be energized. There are 16-bit and 32-bit high-speed counters available for
(Word) users.
(Dword)  Device indication: Indicated as C and numbered in decimal, e.g. C0, C1,
C2…C255
Word memory stores values and parameters for data operations. Every
D register is able to store a word (16-bit binary value). A double word will occupy
(Data register) 2 consecutive data registers.
(Word)  Device indication: Indicated as D and numbered in decimal, e.g. D0, D1,
D2…D4999
Word memory used as a modifier to indicate a specified device (word and
E, F
double word) by defining an offset. Index registers not used as a modifier can
(Index register)
be used as general purpose register.
(Word)
 Device indication: indicated as E0 ~ E7 and F0 ~ F7.
1.5 Ladder Logic Symbols
The following table displays list of WPLSoft symbols their description, command, and memory
registers that are able to use the symbol.
Ladder Diagram
Explanation Instruction Available Devices
Structure
NO (Normally Open)
LD X, Y, M, S, T, C
contact / A contact
NC (Normally Closed)
LDI X, Y, M, S, T, C
contact / B contact
NO contact in series AND X, Y, M, S, T, C

NC contact in series ANI X, Y, M, S, T, C

NO contact in parallel OR X, Y, M, S, T, C

NC contact in parallel ORI X, Y, M, S, T, C

Rising-edge trigger
LDP X, Y, M, S, T, C
switch
Falling-edge trigger
LDF X, Y, M, S, T, C
switch
Rising-edge trigger in
ANDP X, Y, M, S, T, C
series
Falling-edge trigger in
ANDF X, Y, M, S, T, C
series
Rising-edge trigger in
ORP X, Y, M, S, T, C
parallel

Falling-edge trigger in
ORF X, Y, M, S, T, C
parallel

Block in series ANB None

Block in parallel ORB None

1-4
 1 . P L C C o n c e p ts

Ladder Diagram
Explanation Instruction Available Devices
Structure
MPS
Multiple output branches MRD None
MPP

Output coil OUT Y, M, S

S Step ladder STL S

Basic instructions and API

Basic / Application
- instructions. Please refer to
instruction
chapter 3 Instruction Set
Inverse logic INV None
1.5.1 Creating a PLC Ladder Program
The editing of the program should start from the left side bus line to the right side bus line, and from
up to down. However, the right side bus line is omitted when editing in WPLSoft. A single row can
have maximum 11 contacts on it. If more than 11 contacts are connected, a continuous symbol “0”
will be generated automatically and the 12th contact will be placed at the start of next row. The
same input points can be used repeatedly. See the figure below:
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 C0 C1
0
X11 X12 X13
0 Y1

When evaluating the user program, PLC scan starts from left to right and proceeds to next row
down until the PLC reaches END instruction. Output coils and basic / application instructions
belong to the output process and are placed at the right of ladder diagram. The sample program
below explains the execution order of a ladder diagram. The numbers in the black circles indicate
the execution order.

X0 X1 Y1 X4
Y1
M0 T0 M3
TMR T0 K10
X3 M1

Execution order of the sample program:

1 LD X0
2 OR M0
3 AND X1
4 LD X3
AND M1
ORB
5 LD Y1
AND X4
6 LD T0
AND M3
ORB
7 ANB
8 OUT Y1
TMR T0 K10

1-5
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

1.5.2 LD / LDI (Load NO contact / Load NC contact)

LD or LDI starts a row or block
LD instruction LD instruction

AND block OR block

1.5.3 LDP / LDF (Load Rising edge trigger/ Load Falling edge trigger)
Similar to LD instruction, LDP and LDF instructions only act at the rising edge or falling edge when
the contact is ON, as shown in the figure below.
Rising-edge Falling-edge
X0 X0
Time Time
OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
1.5.4 AND / ANI (Connect NO contact in series / Connect NC contact in series)
AND (ANI) instruction connects a NO (NC) contact in series with another device or block.
AND instruction AND instruction

1.5.5 ANDP / ANDF (Connect Rising edge in series/ Connect Falling edge in series)
Similar to AND instruction, ANDP (ANDF) instruction connects rising (falling) edge triggers in series
with another device or block.
1.5.6 OR / ORI (Connect NO contact in parallel / Connect NC contact in parallel)
OR (ORI) instruction connects a NO (NC) in parallel with another device or block.

OR instruction OR instruction OR instruction

1.5.7 ORP / ORF (Connect Rising edge in parallel/ Connect Falling edge in parallel)
Similar to OR instruction, ORP (ORF) instruction connects rising (falling) edge triggers in parallel
with another device or block
1.5.8 ANB (Connect block in series)
ANB instruction connects a block in series with another block
ANB command

1-6
 1 . P L C C o n c e p ts

1.5.9 ORB (Connect block in parallel)

ORB instruction connects a block in parallel with another block

ORB instruction

1.5.10 MPS / MRD / MPP (Branch instructions)

These instructions provide a method to create multiplexed output branches based on current result
stored by MPS instruction.
Branch Branch
Description
instruction Symbol
Start of branches. Stores current result of
MPS ┬ program evaluation. Max. 8 MPS-MPP pairs can
be applied
Reads the stored current result from previous
MRD ├
MPS
End of branches. Pops (reads then resets) the
MPP └
stored result in previous MPS

Note: When compiling ladder diagram with WPLSoft, MPS, MRD and MPP could be automatically
added to the compiled results in instruction format. However, sometimes the branch instructions
are ignored by WPLSoft if not necessary. Users programming in instruction format can enter branch
instructions as required.
Connection points of MPS, MRD and MPP:
MPS

MPS

MRD

MPP
MPP

Note: Ladder diagram editor in ISPSoft does not support MPS, MRD and MPP instructions. To
achieve the same results as branch instructions, users have to connect all branches to the left
hand bus bar.
WPLSoft ISPSoft

1.5.11 STL (Step Ladder Programming)

STL programming uses step points, e.g. S0 S21, S22, which allow users to program in a clearer
and understandable way as drawing a flow chart. The program will proceed to next step only if the

1-7
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

previous step is completed, therefore it forms a sequential control process similar to SFC
(Sequential Function Chart) mode. The STL sequence can be converted into a PLC ladder diagram
which is called “step ladder diagram” as below.
M1002
M1002 SET S0
initial S0
pulse S
S0 SET S21
S21
S SET S22
S21 S22
e
S S0

S22 RET

1.5.12 RET (Return)

RET instruction has to be placed at the end of sequential control process to indicate the completion
of STL flow.
S20
e
S

RET

S20
e
S

RET

Note: Always connect RET instruction immediately after the last step point indicated as the above
diagram otherwise program error may occur.

1-8
 1 . P L C C o n c e p ts

1.6 Conversion between Ladder Diagram and Instruction List Mode

Ladder Diagram Instruction
LD X0 OR
X0 X2 X1 OR X1 block
Y0
LD X2 OR
X1 M0 C0
SET S0 OR M0 block
M1 ORI M1
ANB Block in series
M2 Y0 LD M2 AND
AND Y0 block
ORB Block in parallel The output
AN I X1 ANI continues
S0 X10 based on
S Y10 OUT Y0
status of
AND C0 Multiple
outputs
SET S10 SET S0
STL S0 Start of step ladder
LD X10 S0 status operates with X10
S10 X11 OUT Y10 Output Y10 and
S Y11 transfer of step point
SET S10
SET S11 STL S10 Read S10 status
LD X11
SET S12 OUT Y11
SET S11 Output Y11 and
SET S13 SET S12 transfer of step points
SET S13
STL S11 Read S11 status
S11 X12
S Y12 LD X12 S11 operates with X12
OUT Y12 Output Y12 and
SET S20 SET S20 transfer of step points
STL S20
S20 S12 S13 X13 Convergence of
STL S12 multiple status
S S S S0
STL S13 End of step
RET LD X13 Read X13 status and ladder
OUT S0 transfer of step point

X0 RET Return
CNT C0 K10 LD X0
CNT C0 K10
C0 X1 LD C0 Read C0
M0 MPS
X1 AND X1
M1
M2 OUT M0
M2 MRD
Multiple
AN I X1 outputs
RST C0 OUT M1
MPP
END AN I M2
OUT M2
RST C0
END End of program

1-9
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

1.7 Fuzzy Syntax

Generally, the ladder diagram programming is conducted according to the “up to down and left to
right” principle. However, some programming methods not following this principle still perform the
same control results. Here are some examples explaining this kind of “fuzzy syntax.”
Example 1:
X0 X2 X4 Better method OK method
LD X0 LD X0
X1 X3 X5 OR X1 OR X1
LD X2 LD X2
OR X3 OR X3
ANB LD X4
LD X4 OR X5
OR X5 ANB
ANB ANB

The two instruction programs can be converted into the same ladder diagram. The difference
between Better and OK method is the ANB operation conducted by MPU. ANB instruction cannot
be used continuously for more than 8 times. If more than 8 ANB instructions are used continuously,
program error will occur. Therefore, apply ANB instruction after a block is made is the better
method to prevent the possible errors. In addition, it’s also the more logical and clearer
programming method for general users.
Example 2:
X0 Good method Bad method
LD X0 LD X0
X1 OR X1 LD X1
OR X2 LD X2
X2 OR X3 LD X3
ORB
X3 ORB
ORB

The difference between Good and Bad method is very clear. With longer program code, the
required MPU operation memory increases in the Bad method. To sum up, following the general
principle and applying good / better method when editing programs prevents possible errors and
improves program execution speed as well.
Common Programming Errors
PLC processes the diagram program from up to down and left to right. When editing ladder
diagram users should adopt this principle as well otherwise an error would be detected by WPLSoft
when compiling user program. Common program errors are listed below:
OR operation upward is not allowed.

“Reverse current” exists.

Reverse curr ent

Output should be connected on top of the circuit.

1-10
 1 . P L C C o n c e p ts

Block combination should be made on top of the

circuit.

Parallel connection with empty device is not

allowed..

Parallel connection with empty device is not

allowed.

No device in the middle block.

Devices and blocks in series should be

horizontally aligned

Label P0 should be at the first row of the

complete network.

“Reverse current” exists

1.8 Correcting Ladder Diagram

Example 1:
Connect the block to the front for omitting ANB instruction because simplified program improves
processing speed
X0 X1 Instruction List
LD X0
X2 LD X1
OR X2
ANB

X1 X0 Instruction List
LD X1
X2 OR X2
AND X0

1 - 11
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Example 2:
When a device is to be connected to a block, connect the device to upper row for omitting ORB
instruction
T0 Instruction List
LD T0
X1 X2 LD X1
AND X2
ORB

X1 X2 Instruction List
LD X1
T0 AND X2
OR T0

Example 3:
“Reverse current” existed in diagram (a) is not allowed for PLC processing principle.
X0 Instruction List
LD X0
X1 X2 OR X1
AND X2
X3
LD X3
X4
AND X4
ORB
(a)

X3 X4 Instruction List
LD X3
X1 X2 AND X4
LD X1
X0
OR X0
AND X2
ORB
(b)

Example 4:
For multiple outputs, connect the output without additional input devices to the top of the circuit for
omitting MPS and MPP instructions.
X0 Instruction List
Y1 MPS
AND X0
Y0 OUT Y1
MPP
OUT Y0

Y0
Instruction List
OUT Y0
X0 AND X0
Y1 OUT Y1

1-12
 1 . P L C C o n c e p ts

Example 5:
Correct the circuit of reverse current. The pointed reverse current loops are modified on the right.
X0 X1 X2

X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5

X3 X4 X5 X10


X6 X7 X10 LOO P1
X6 X7 X5

rev er se c urrent X10 LOOP1

Example 6:
Correct the circuit of reverse current. The pointed reverse current loops are modified on the right.
X0 X1 X2
X0 X1 X2
X3 X4 X5
X3 X4 X5
X6 X7 X10 LOO P1
X6

rev er se c urrent X3 X7 X10

Reverse curr ent 
X6
X0 X1 X2
LOOP1

X3 X4 X5 X0 X1 X4 X7 X10

X6 X7 X10 LOOP 2

LOO P2

1.9 Basic Program Design Examples

Example 1 - Stop First latched circuit
When X1 (START) = ON and X2 (STOP) = OFF, Y1 will be ON. Y1 X2
If X2 is turned on, Y1 will be OFF. This is a Stop First circuit Y1
because STOP button has the control priority than START X1

Example 2 - Start First latched circuit

When X1 (START) = ON and X2 (STOP) = OFF, Y1 will be ON X1 X2
and latched. If X2 is turned ON, Y1 remains ON. This is a Start Y1
First circuit because START button has the control priority than Y1
STOP

Example 3 - Latched circuit of SET and RST

The diagram opposite are latched circuits consist of RST and Stop first
SET instructions. X1
In PLC processing principle, the instruction close to the end of SET Y1
the program determines the final output status of Y1. Therefore, X2
if both X1 and X2 are ON, RST which is lower than SET forms a RST Y1

1-13
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Stop First circuit while SET which is lower than RST forms a Start first
Start First circuit. X2
RST Y1
X1
SET Y1

Example 4 - Power down latched circuit

The auxiliary relay M512 is a latched relay. Once X1 is ON, Y1 X1
retains its status before power down and resumes after power SET M512
up. X2
RST M512
M512
Y1

Example 5 - Conditional Control

X1 X3
Y1 X1

Y1 X3

X2
X2 X4 Y1
Y2
X4
Y2
Y1

Y2

Because NO contact Y1 is connected to the circuit of Y2 output, Y1 becomes one of the conditions
for enabling Y2, i.e. for turning on Y2, Y1 has to be ON

Example 6- Interlock control

X1 X3 Y2
Y1 X1

Y1 X3

X2

X2 X4 Y1 X4
Y2
Y1
Y2
Y2

NC contact Y1 is connected to Y2 output circuit and NC contact Y2 is connected Y1 output circuit.

If Y1 is ON, Y2 will definitely be OFF and vice versa. This forms an Interlock circuit which prevents
both outputs to be ON at the same time. Even if both X1 and X2 are ON, in this case only Y1 will
be enabled.

Example 7 - Sequential Control

X1 X3 Y2
Y1 Connect NC contact Y2 to Y1 output circuit and
Y1 NO contact Y1 to Y2 output circuit. Y1 becomes
one of the conditions to turn on Y2. In addition, Y1
X2 X4 Y1
will be OFF when Y2 is ON, which forms an
Y2
sequential control process.
Y2

1-14
 1 . P L C C o n c e p ts

Example 8 - Oscillating Circuit

An oscillating circuit with cycle ΔT+ΔT
Y1
Y1
Y1
T T
In the first scan, Y1 turns on. In the second scan, Y1 turns off due to the reversed state of contact
Y1. Y1 output status changes in every scan and forms an oscillating circuit with output
cycleΔT(ON)+ΔT(OFF)

Example 9 – Oscillating Circuit with Timer

An oscillating circuit with cycle nT+ΔT
X0 Y1
X0
TMR T0 Kn
T0
Y1 Y1

nT T
When X0 = ON, T0 starts timing (nT). Once the set time is reached, contact T0 = ON to enable
Y1(ΔT). In next scan, Timer T0 is reset due to the reversed status of contact Y1. Therefore contact
T0 is reset and Y1 = OFF. In next scan, T0 starts timing again. The process forms an oscillating
circuit with output cycle nT+ΔT.

Example 10 - Flashing Circuit

The ladder diagram uses two timers to form an oscillating circuit which enables a flashing indicator
or a buzzing alarm. n1 and n2 refer to the set values in T1 and T2 and T refers to timer resolution.
X0 T2
TMR T1 Kn1 X0
n2 T
T1
TMR T2 Kn2
Y1
X0 T1
Y1
n1 T

Example 11 - Trigger Circuit

In this diagram, rising-edge contact X0 generates trigger pulses to control two actions executing
interchangeably.
X0
M0 X0
M0 Y1 T
Y1
M0
M0 Y1
Y1

Example 12 - Delay OFF Circuit

If X0 = ON, timer T10 is not energized but coil Y1 is ON. When X0 is OFF, T10 is activated. After
100 seconds (K1000 × 0.1 sec = 100 sec), NC contact T10 is ON to turn off Y1. Turn-off action is
delayed for 100 seconds by this delay OFF circuit.
X0
TMR T10 K1000 X0
T10
Y1 Y1
Timer Resolution: 0.1 sec
100 seconds

1-15
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Example 13 - Output delay circuit

The output delay circuit is composed of two timers executing delay actions. No matter input X0 is
ON or OFF, output Y4 will be delayed.
X0
TMR T5 K50
5 secs
T5 T6
Y4 T5

Y4

Y4 X0 T
TMR T6 K30 T6
3 secs

Example 14 - Timing extension circuit

X0 The total delay time: (n1+n2)* T. T refers to the
TMR T11 Kn1 timer resolution.
T11
X0
TMR T12 Kn2
n1* T
T12
T11
Y1
. n2* T

Timer = T11, T12

T12
Timer resolution: T
Y1
(n1+n2)* T

Example 15 – Counting Range Extension Circuit

X13 The counting range of a 16-bit counter is 0 ~
CNT C5 Kn1 32,767. The opposite circuit uses two counters to
C5 increase the counting range as n1*n2. When
CNT C6 Kn2 value in counter C6 reaches n2, The pulses
counted from X13 will be n1*n2.
RST C5
X14
RST C6
C6
Y1

Example 16 - Traffic light control (Step Ladder Logic)

Traffic light control
Green light
Red light Yellow light Green light
blinking
Vertical light Y0 Y1 Y2 Y2
Horizontal light Y20 Y21 Y22 Y22
Light Time 35 Sec 5 Sec 25 Sec 5 Sec

Vertical
Light

Horizontal
Light

1-16
 1 . P L C C o n c e p ts

Timing Diagram:
Vertical
Light

Red Y0

Yellow Y1

Green Y2 25 Sec

Horizontal 5 Sec 5 Sec

Light
Red Y20

Yellow Y21

Green Y22
25 Sec
5 Sec 5 Sec

SFC Figure:
M1002
S0

S20 Y0 S30 Y22

TMR T0 K350 TMR T10 K250

T0 T10
S21 Y2 S31 TMR T11 K50
M1013
TMR T1 K250 Y22
T1 T11
S22 TMR T2 K50 S32 Y21
M1013
Y2 TMR T12 K50
T2 T12
S23 Y1 S33 Y20

TMR T13 K350

T13

S0

1-17
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Ladder Diagram:
M1002
ZRST S0 S127

SET S0
S0
S SET S20

SET S30
S20
S Y0

TMR T0 K350
T0
SET S21
S21
S Y2

TMR T1 K250
T1
SET S22
S22
S TMR T2 K50
M1013
Y2
T2
SET S23
S23
S Y1
S30
S Y22

TMR T10 K250

T10
SET S31
S31
S TMR T11 K50
M1013
Y22
T11
SET S32
S32
S Y21

TMR T12 K50

T12
SET S33
S33
S Y20

TMR T13 K350

S23 S33 T13
S S S0

RET

END

1-18
 1 . P L C C o n c e p ts

WPLSoft programming (SFC mode)

SFC logic Internal Ladder Logic
LAD-0
LAD-0 M1002
ZRST S0 S127
S0
SET S0

0 Transfer condition 1
T0
TRANS*
S20 S30

1 5 S22
S21 S31 TMR T2 K50
M1013
2 6 Y2

S22 S32 Transfer condition 4

T13
7
TRANS*
3

S23 S33

Transfer condition 7
T12
TRANS*
4

S0

1-19
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

MEMO

1-20
Programming Concepts
DVP-ES2/EX2/SS/SA2/SX2/SE is a programmable logic controller spanning an I/O range of
10–256 I/O points (SS2/SA2/SX2/SE: 512 points). PLC can control a wide variety of devices
to solve your automation needs. PLC monitors inputs and modifies outputs as controlled
by the user program. User program provides features such as boolean logic, counting,
timing, complex math operations, and communications to other communicating products.

Chapter Contents

2.1 ES2/EX2 Memory Map .............................................................................................................. 2-2

2.2 SS2 Memory Map ...................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3 SA2/SX2 Memory Map .............................................................................................................. 2-6
2.4 SE Memory Map ........................................................................................................................ 2-8
2.5 Status and Allocation of Latched Memory ........................................................................... 2-10
2.6 PLC Bits, Nibbles, Bytes, Words, etc ................................................................................... 2-11
2.7 Binary, Octal, Decimal, BCD, Hex ......................................................................................... 2-11
2.8 M Relay .................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.9 S Relay ..................................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.10 T (Timer) .................................................................................................................................. 2-24
2.11 C (Counter) .............................................................................................................................. 2-25
2.12 High-speed Counters ............................................................................................................. 2-27
2.13 Special Data Register ............................................................................................................. 2-31
2.14 E, F Index Registers ............................................................................................................... 2-42
2.15 Nest Level Pointer[N], Pointer[P], Interrupt Pointer [I] ....................................................... 2-43
2.16 Applications of Special M Relays and D Registers ............................................................. 2-45

2-1
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

2.1 ES2/EX2 Memory Map

Specifications
Control Method Stored program, cyclic scan system
Batch processing method (when END instruction is
I/O Processing Method
executed)
Execution Speed LD instructions – 0.54µs, MOV instructions – 3.4µs
Program language Instruction List + Ladder + SFC
Program Capacity 15872 steps
X0~X377, octal number system, 256
X External inputs
points max, (*4) Total
Y0~Y377, octal number system, 256 256+16 I/O
Y External outputs
points max, (*4)
M0~M511, 512 points, (*1)
General M768~M999, 232 points, (*1)
M2000~M2047, 48 points, (*1)
Auxiliary Total
M M512~M767, 256 points, (*2)
relay Latched 4096 points
M2048~M4095, 2048 points, (*2)
M1000~M1999, 1000 points, some
Special
are latched
T0~T126, 127 points, (*1)
100ms T128~T183, 56 points, (*1)
(M1028=ON, T184~T199 for Subroutines, 16
T64~T126: points, (*1)
10ms) T250~T255(accumulative), 6 points
(*1) Total
T Timer
10ms T200~T239, 40 points, (*1) 256 points
(M1038=ON, T240~T245(accumulative),
T200~T245: 1ms) 6 points, (*1)
T127, 1 points, (*1)
Bit 1ms T246~T249(accumulative), 4 points,
Contacts (*1)
C0~C111, 112 points, (*1)
16-bit count up C128~C199,72 points, (*1)
Total
C112~C127,16 points, (*2)
232 points
32-bit count C200~C223, 24 points, (*1)
up/down C224~C231, 8 points, (*2)
C235~C242, 1 phase 1 input, 8
Soft- points, (*2)
C Counter ware C232~C234, 2 phase 2 input, 3
32bit
points, (*2)
high-
C243~C244, 1 phase 1 input, 2 Total
speed
points, (*2) 23 points
count
Hard- C245~C250, 1 phase 2 input, 6
up/down
ware points, (*2)
C251~C254 2 phase 2 input, 4
points, (*2)
Initial step point S0~S9, 10 points, (*2)
S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST
Zero point return
Step instruction), (*2) Total 1024
S
point Latched S20~S127, 108 points, (*2) points
General S128~S911, 784 points, (*1)
Alarm S912~S1023, 112 points, (*2)
T Current value T0~T255, 256 words
Word
C0~C199, 16-bit counter, 200 words
Register C Current value
C200~C254, 32-bit counter, 55 words

2-2
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

Specifications
D0~D407, 408 words, (*1)
General D600~D999, 400 words, (*1)
D3920~D9999, 6080 words, (*1)
D408~D599, 192 words, (*2)
Latched
Data D2000~D3919, 1920 words, (*2) Total
D
register D1000~D1999, 1000 words, some 10000 points
Special
are latched
For Special D9900~D9999，100 words, (*1),
mudules (*5)
Index E0~E7, F0~F7, 16 words, (*1)
N Master control loop N0~N7, 8 points
P Pointer P0~P255, 256 points
I000/I001(X0), I100/I101(X1), I200/I201(X2),
I300/I301(X3), I400/I401(X4), I500/I501(X5),
External interrupt
I600/I601(X6), I700/I701(X7), 8 points (01: rising-
edge trigger , 00: falling-edge trigger )
Pointer I602~I699, I702~I799, 2 points (Timer resolution =
Interrupt 1ms)
I Timer interrupt
Service I805~I899, 1 point (Timer resolution = 0.1ms)
(Supported by V2.00 and above)
High-speed I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, I070, I080,8
counter interrupt points
Communication I140(COM1), I150(COM2), I160(COM3), 3 points,
interrupt (*3)
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation),
K Decimal K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit
Constant operation)
H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation),
H Hexadecimal
H00000000 ~HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation)
COM1: built-in RS-232 ((Master/Slave)
COM2: built-in RS-485 (Master/Slave)
COM3: built-in RS-485 (Master/Slave)
Serial ports
COM1 is typically the programming port.
Ethernet(*8): built-in Ethernet, refer to appendix B
for more details on operation
Real Time Clock(*6) Year, Month, Day, Week, Hours, Minutes, Seconds
Special I/O Modules Up to 8 special I/O modules can be connected
K0~K4999, 5000 points
File Register(*2)
K0~K7999, 8000 points (*9)
Notes:
1. Non-latched area cannot be modified
2. Latched area cannot be modified
3. COM1: built-in RS232 port. COM2: built-in RS485 port. COM3: built-in RS485 port.
4. When input points(X) are expanded to 256 points, only 16 output points(Y) are applicable. Also,
when ouput points(Y) are expanded to 256 points, only 16 input points(X) are applicable.
5. This area is applicable only when the ES2/EX2 MPU is connected with special I/O modules.
Every special I/O module occupies 10 points.
6. PLC with firmware version 2.00 or later support the function of keeping track of the current
even after the power is off. When the power is off, this function can go on for about 1 week.
7. PLC with firmware version 2.00 or later versions support the function of file register. Refer to
the instructions MEMR/MEMW for more details on operation.
8. Ethernet: this function is only available for DVP-EX2-E series PLC.
9. This function is available for ES2 and EX2 series with firmware V3.46 or later and for EX2-E
series with firmware V1.08 or later.

2-3
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

2.2 SS2 Memory Map

Specifications
Control Method Stored program, cyclic scan system
Batch processing method (when END instruction is
I/O Processing Method
executed)
Execution Speed LD instructions – 0.54µs, MOV instructions – 3.4µs
Program language Instruction List + Ladder + SFC
Program Capacity 7920 steps
X0~X377, octal number system, 256
X External inputs Total
points max.
480+14
Y0~Y377, octal number system, 256
Y External outputs I/O(*4)
points max.
M0~M511, 512 points, (*1)
General M768~M999, 232 points, (*1)
M2000~M2047, 48 points, (*1)
Auxiliary Total
M M512~M767, 256 points, (*2)
relay Latched 4096 points
M2048~M4095, 2048 points, (*2)
M1000~M1999, 1000 points, some
Special
are latched
T0~T126, 127 points, (*1)
100ms T128~T183, 56 points, (*1)
(M1028=ON, T184~T199 for Subroutines, 16
T64~T126: points, (*1)
10ms) T250~T255(accumulative), 6 points
(*1) Total
T Timer
10ms T200~T239, 40 points, (*1) 256 points
(M1038=ON, T240~T245(accumulative),
T200~T245: 1ms) 6 points, (*1)
T127, 1 points, (*1)
Bit 1ms T246~T249(accumulative), 4 points,
Contacts (*1)
C0~C111, 112 points, (*1)
16-bit count up C128~C199, 72 points, (*1)
Total
C112~C127, 16 points, (*2)
233 points
32-bit count C200~C223, 24 points, (*1)
up/down C224~C232, 9 points, (*2)
C235~C242, 1 phase 1 input, 8
Soft- points, (*2)
C Counter ware C233~C234, 2 phase 2 input, 2
32bit
points, (*2)
high-
C243~C244, 1 phase 1 input, 2 Total
speed
points, (*2) 22 points
count
Hard- C245~C250, 1 phase 2 input, 6
up/down
ware points, (*2)
C251~C254 2 phase 2 input, 4
points, (*2)
Initial step point S0~S9, 10 points, (*2)
S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST
Zero point return
Step instruction), (*2) Total 1024
S
point Latched S20~S127, 108 points, (*2) points
General S128~S911, 784 points, (*1)
Alarm S912~S1023, 112 points, (*2)
T Current value T0~T255, 256 words
Word
C0~C199, 16-bit counter, 200 words
Register C Current value
C200~C254, 32-bit counter, 55 words

2-4
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

Specifications
D0~D407, 408 words, (*1)
General D600~D999, 400 words, (*1)
D3920~D4999, 1080 words, (*1)
Data D408~D599, 192 words, (*2) Total
D Latched
register D2000~D3919, 1920 words, (*2) 5000 points
D1000~D1999, 1000 words, some
Special
are latched
Index E0~E7, F0~F7, 16 words, (*1)
N Master control loop N0~N7, 8 points
P Pointer P0~P255, 256 points
I000/I001(X0), I100/I101(X1), I200/I201(X2),
I300/I301(X3), I400/I401(X4), I500/I501(X5),
External interrupt
I600/I601(X6), I700/I701(X7), 8 points (01: rising-
edge trigger , 00: falling-edge trigger )
I602~I699, I702~I799, 2 points (Timer resolution =
Pointer
Interrupt 1ms)
I Timer interrupt
Service I805~I899, 1 point (Timer resolution = 0.1ms)
(Supported by V2.00 and above)
High-speed I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, I070, I080, 8
counter interrupt points
Communication
I140(COM1), I150(COM2), 2 points, (*3)
interrupt
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation),
K Decimal K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit
Constant operation)
H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation),
H Hexadecimal
H00000000 ~HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation)
COM1: built-in RS-232 ((Master/Slave)
Serial ports COM2: built-in RS-485 (Master/Slave)
COM1 is typically the programming port.
Real Time Clock Year, Month, Day, Week, Hours, Minutes, Seconds
Special I/O Modules Up to 8 special I/O modules can be connected
Notes:
1. Non-latched area cannot be modified
2. Latched area cannot be modified
3. COM1: built-in RS232 port. COM2: built-in RS485 port.
4. The PLC occupies 16 input points (X0~X17) and 16 output points (Y0~Y17). The extension
input point starts from X20 and extension output point from Y20.

2-5
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

2.3 SA2/SX2 Memory Map

Specifications
Control Method Stored program, cyclic scan system
Batch processing method (when END instruction is
I/O Processing Method
executed)
Execution Speed LD instructions – 0.54µs, MOV instructions – 3.4µs
Program language Instruction List + Ladder + SFC
Program Capacity 15872 steps
X0~X377, octal number system, 256
X External inputs Total
points max.
480 + points
Y0~Y377, octal number system, 256
Y External outputs for PLC (*4)
points max.
M0~M511, 512 points, (*1)
General M768~M999, 232 points, (*1)
M2000~M2047, 48 points, (*1)
Auxiliary Total
M M512~M767, 256 points, (*2)
relay Latched 4096 points
M2048~M4095, 2048 points, (*2)
M1000~M1999, 1000 points, some
Special
are latched
T0~T126, 127 points, (*1)
100ms T128~T183, 56 points, (*1)
(M1028=ON, T184~T199 for Subroutines, 16
T64~T126: points (*1)
10ms) T250~T255(accumulative), 6 points
(*1) Total
T Timer
10ms T200~T239, 40 points, (*1) 256 points
(M1038=ON, T240~T245(accumulative),
T200~T245: 1ms) 6 points, (*1)
T127, 1 points, (*1)
Bit 1ms T246~T249(accumulative), 4 points,
Contacts (*1)
C0~C111, 112 points, (*1)
16-bit count up C128~C199, 72 points, (*1)
Total
C112~C127, 16 points, (*2)
233 points
32-bit count C200~C223, 24 points, (*1)
up/down C224~C232, 9 points, (*2)
C235~C242, 1 phase 1 input, 8
Soft- points, (*2)
C Counter ware C233~C234, 2 phase 2 input, 2
32bit
points, (*2)
high-
C243~C244, 1 phase 1 input, 2 Total
speed
points, (*2) 22 points
count
Hard- C245~C250, 1 phase 2 input, 6
up/down
ware points, (*2)
C251~C254 2 phase 2 input, 4
points, (*2)
Initial step point S0~S9, 10 points, (*2)
S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST
Zero point return
Step instruction), (*2) Total 1024
S
point Latched S20~S127, 108 points, (*2) points
General S128~S911, 784 points, (*1)
Alarm S912~S1023, 112 points, (*2)
T Current value T0~T255, 256 words
Word
C0~C199, 16-bit counter, 200 words
Register C Current value
C200~C254, 32-bit counter, 55 words

2-6
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

Specifications
D0~D407, 408 words, (*1)
General D600~D999, 400 words, (*1)
D3920~D9799, 5880 words, (*1)
D408~D599, 192 words, (*2)
Latched
D2000~D3919, 1920 words, (*2)
Data D1000~D1999, 1000 words, some Total
D Special
register are latched 10000 points
Righ-side special
D9900~D9999, 100 words (*1) (*6)
module
Left-side special
D9800~D9899, 100 words (*1) (*7)
module
Index E0~E7, F0~F7, 16 words, (*1)
N Master control loop N0~N7, 8 points
P Pointer P0~P255, 256 points
I000/I001(X0), I100/I101(X1), I200/I201(X2),
I300/I301(X3), I400/I401(X4), I500/I501(X5),
External interrupt
I600/I601(X6), I700/I701(X7), 8 points (01: rising-
edge trigger , 00: falling-edge trigger )
I602~I699, I702~I799, 2 points (Timer resolution =
Pointer
Interrupt 1ms)
I Timer interrupt
Service I805~I899, 1 point (Timer resolution = 0.1ms)
(Supported by V2.00 and above)
High-speed I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, I070, I080, 8
counter interrupt points
Communication I140(COM1), I150(COM2), I160(COM3), 3 points,
interrupt (*3)
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation),
K Decimal K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit
Constant operation)
H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation),
H Hexadecimal
H00000000 ~HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation)
COM1: built-in RS-232 ((Master/Slave)
COM2: built-in RS-485 (Master/Slave)
SA2
COM3: built-in RS-485 (Master/Slave)
COM1 is typically the programming port.
Serial Ports
COM1: built-in RS-232 ((Master/Slave)
COM2: built-in RS-485 (Master/Slave)
SX2
COM3: built-in USB (Slave)
COM1 is typically the programming port.
Real Time Clock Year, Month, Day, Week, Hours, Minutes, Seconds
Right side: Up to 8 I/O modules can be connected
Special I/O Modules Left side: Up to 8 high-speed I/O module can be
connected
File Register (*5) K0~K4999, 5000 points (*2)
Notes:
1. Non-latched area cannot be modified
2. Latched area cannot be modified
3. Please refer to the table above for more information about serial ports. SX2 does not support
I160.
4. The PLC occupies 16 input points (X0~X17) and 16 output points (Y0~Y17). The extension
input point starts from X20 and extension output point from Y20.
5. If the firmware version of an MPU is 2.0 or above, the MPU support the use of file registers.
Please refer to the instruction MEMR/MEMW for more information about the reading/writing of
data.

2-7
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

6. If an SA2/SX2 series MPU is connected to a right-side special module, and M1183 is Off, the
range of data registers can be used. Every special module connected to an SA2/SX2 series
MPU occupies ten data registers.
7. If an SA2/SX2 series MPU is connected to a left-side special module, and M1182 is Off, the
range of data registers can be used. Every special module connected to an SA2/SX2 series
MPU occupies ten data registers.

2.4 SE Memory Map

Specifications
Control Method Stored program, cyclic scan system
Batch processing method (when END instruction is
I/O Processing Method
executed)
LD instructions – 0.64µs, MOV instructions – 2µs,
Execution Speed
1000 steps – approximately 1ms
Program language Instruction List + Ladder diagram+ SFC
Program Capacity 15872 steps
X0~X377, octal number system, 256
X External inputs Total
points max.
480+ points
Y0~Y377, octal number system, 256
Y External outputs for PLC (*4)
points max.
M0~M511, 512 points, (*1)
General M768~M999, 232 points, (*1)
M2000~M2047, 48 points, (*1)
Auxiliary Total
M M512~M767, 256 points, (*2)
relay Latched 4096 points
M2048~M4095, 2048 points, (*2)
M1000~M1999, 1000 points, some
Special
are latched
T0~T126, 127 points, (*1)
100ms T128~T183, 56 points, (*1)
(M1028=ON, T184~T199 for Subroutines, 16
T64~T126: points, (*1)
10ms) T250~T255(accumulative),
6 points (*1) Total
T Timer
10ms T200~T239, 40 points, (*1) 256 points
(M1038=ON, T240~T245(accumulative),
T200~T245: 1ms) 6 points, (*1)
Bit
T127, 1 points, (*1)
Contacts
1ms T246~T249(accumulative), 4 points,
(*1)
C0~C111, 112 points, (*1)
16-bit count up C128~C199, 72 points, (*1)
Total
C112~C127, 16 points, (*2)
232 points
32-bit count C200~C223, 24 points, (*1)
up/down C224~C231, 8 points, (*2)
C235~C242, 1 phase 1 input, 8
Soft- points, (*2)
C Counter ware C233~C234, 2 phase 2 input, 2
32bit
points, (*2)
high-
C243~C244, 1 phase 1 input, 2 Total
speed
points, (*2) 20 points
count
Hard- C245~C248, 1 phase 2 input, 4
up/down
ware points, (*2)
C251~C254 2 phase 2 input, 4
points, (*2)
Initial step point S0~S9, 10 points, (*2)
Step Total 1024
S S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST
point Zero point return points
instruction), (*2)

2-8
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

Specifications
Latched S20~S127, 108 points, (*2)
General S128~S911, 784 points, (*1)
Alarm S912~S1023, 112 points, (*2)
T Current value T0~T255, 256 words
C0~C199, 16-bit counter, 200 words
C Current value
C200~C254, 32-bit counter, 55 words
D0~D407, 408 words, (*1)
D600~D999, 400 words, (*1)
General
D3920~D9799, 5880 words, (*1)
D10000~D11999, 2000 words, (*1)
Word D408~D599, 192 words, (*2)
Latched
Register D2000~D3919, 1920 words, (*2)
Data Total
D D1000~D1999, 1000 words, some
register Special 12000 points
are latched
Right-side special
D9900~D9999, 100 words, (*1) (*5)
module
Left-side special
D9800~D9899, 100 words, (*1) (*6)
module
Index E0~E7, F0~F7, 16 words, (*1)
N Master control loop N0~N7, 8 points
P Pointer P0~P255, 256 points
I000/I001(X0), I100/I101(X1), I200/I201(X2),
I300/I301(X3), I400/I401(X4), I500/I501(X5),
External interrupt
I600/I601(X6), I700/I701(X7), 8 points (01: rising-
edge trigger , 00: falling-edge trigger )
Pointer I602~I699, I702~I799, 2 points (Timer resolution =
Interrupt 1ms)
I Timer interrupt
Service I805~I899, 1 point (Timer resolution = 0.1ms)
(Supported by V1.60 and above)
High-speed I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, I070, I080, 8
counter interrupt points
Communication
I150 (COM2), I160 (COM3), 2 points, (*3)
interrupt
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation),
K Decimal K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit
Constant operation)
H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation),
H Hexadecimal
H00000000 ~HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation)
COM1: built-in USB (Slave)
COM2: built-in RS-485 (Master/Slave)
COM3: built-in RS-485 (Master/Slave)
Serial Ports
Ethernet: built-in Ethernet (Please refer to Appendix
B for more information.)
COM1 is typically the programming port.
Real Time Clock Year, Month, Day, Week, Hours, Minutes, Seconds
Right side: Up to 8 I/O modules can be connected
Special I/O Modules Left side: Up to 8 high-speed I/O modules can be
connected
Notes:
1. Non-latched area cannot be modified
2. Latched area cannot be modified
3. COM2: built-in RS485 port. COM3: built-in RS485 port.
4. The PLC occupies 16 input points (X0~X17) and 16 output points (Y0~Y17). The extension
input point starts from X20 and extension output point from Y20.

2-9
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

5. If an SE series MPU is connected to a right-side special module, and M1183 is Off, the range
of data registers can be used. Every special module connected to an SE series MPU occupies
ten data registers.
6. If an SE series MPU is connected to a left-side special module, and M1182 is Off, the range of
data registers can be used. Every special module connected to an SE series MPU occupies
ten data registers.
2.5 Status and Allocation of Latched Memory

Clear all
Clear all
Memory Power non-latched Factory
STOP=>RUN RUN=>STOP latched areas
type OFF=>ON areas setting
(M1032=ON)
(M1031=ON)
When
M1033=OFF,
Non- clear
Clear Unchanged Clear Unchanged 0
latched When
M1033=ON, No
change
Latched Unchanged Unchanged Clear 0
Special
M,
Initial
Special Initial Unchanged Unchanged
setting
D, Index
register
File
Unchanged HFFFF
register

General Latched Special auxiliary relay

M0~M511
M512~M999
M M768~M999 M1000~M1999
M2048~M4095
Auxiliary relay M2000~M2047
Some are latched and
Not latched Latched
can’t be changed.
100
100 ms 100 ms 1 ms 10 ms 10ms 1 ms
ms
T0 ~T126 T250~
T T184~T199 T127 T200~T239 T240~T245 T246~T249
T128~T183 T255
Timer
M1028=1,T64~ For M1038=1,T200~T245:
- -
T126:10ms subroutine 1ms
non-latched non-latched Accumulative non-latched
32-bit high-
16-bit count up 32-bit count up/down speed count
C up/down
Counter C0~C111
C112~C127 C200~C223 C224~C232 C233~C254
C128~C199
Non-latched Latched Non-latched Latched Latched
Initial Zero return Latched General Step alarm
S
S0~S9 S10~S19 S20~S127 S128~S911 S912~S1023
Step relay
Latched Non-latched Latched
General Latched Special register For AIO
D0~D407
D408~D599 D9800~D999
D D600~D999 D1000~D1999
D2000~D3919 9
Register D3920~D11999
Some are latched, and
Non-latched Latched Non-latched
can’t be changed

2-10
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

2.6 PLC Bits, Nibbles, Bytes, Words, etc

For different control purposes, there are five types of values inside DVP-PLC for executing the
operations.
Numeric Description
Bit Bit is the basic unit of a binary number system. Range is 0 or 1
Consists of 4 consecutive bits, e.g. b3~b0. Range 0 ~ 9 in Decimal or 0~F in
Nibble
Hex
Byte Consists of 2 consecutive nibbles, e.g. b7~b0. Range 00 ~ FF in Hex
Word Consists of 2 consecutive bytes, e.g. b15~b0. Range 0000 ~ FFFF in Hex
Consists of 2 consecutive words, e.g. b31~b1. Range 00000000 - FFFFFFFF
Double Word
in Hex

Bit, nibble, byte, word, and double word in a binary system:

DW Double Word

W1 W0 Word

BY3 BY2 BY1 BY0 Byte

NB7 NB6 NB5 NB4 NB3 NB2 NB1 NB0 Nibble

Bit

2.7 Binary, Octal, Decimal, BCD, Hex

For fulllfilling different kinds of internal manipulation, DVP-PLC appies 5 foramts of number systems.
Each number system has its specific purpose and function described as below.
1. Binary Number, (BIN)
PLC internally calculates, operates, and stores the value in Binary format.
2. Octal Number, (OCT)
The external I/O points of DVP-PLC are numbered in octal format.
e.g.
External inputs: X0～X7, X10～X17, …, X377. (No. of device)
External outputs: Y0～Y7, Y10～Y17, …, Y377. (No. of device)
3. Decimal Number, (DEC)
DVP-PLC appies decimal operation in situations below:
 Set value for timers and counters, e.g. TMR C0 K50. (K value)
 No. of S, M, T, C, D, E, F, P, I devices, e.g. M10, T30. (No. of device)
 For use of operand in API instructions, e.g. MOV K123 D0. (K value)
4. BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)
BCD format takes 1 digit or 4 bits to indicate a Decimal value, so that data of consecutive 16
bits indicates a 4-digit decimal value. Used mainly for reading values from DIP switches or
sending data to 7-segement displays
5. Hexadecimal Number, HEX
DVP-PLC appies Hexadecimal operation in situations below:
 For use of operand in API instructions, e.g. MOV H1A2B D0。(H value)
Constant (K): A decimal number in a PLC is generally preceded by K. For example, K100
represents the decimal number 100.

2 - 11
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Exception:
If K is used with an X/Y/M/S device, a nibble device, a byte device, a word device, or a
double word device will be formed.
Example:
K1Y10 represents a device composed of 4 bits, K2Y10 represents a device composed of 8
bits, K3Y10 represents a device composed of 12 bit, and K4Y10 represents a device
composed of 16 bits. K1M100 represents a device composed of 4 bits, K2M100 represents
a device composed of 8 bits, K3M100 represents a device composed of 12 bit, and
K4M100 represents a device composed of 16 bits.

Constant (H): A hexadecimal number in a PLC is generally preceded by H. For example, the
hexadecimal number H100 represents the decimal number 256.
Reference Table:
Hexadecimal
Binary Octal Decimal (K) BCD
(H)
(BIN) (OCT) (DEC) (Binary Code Decimal)
(HEX)
For PLC Costant K, No. of
No. of X, Y For DIP Switch and 7-
internal registers M, S, T, C, Constant H
relay segment display
operation D, E, F, P, I devices
0000 0 0 0000 0
0001 1 1 0001 1
0010 2 2 0010 2
0011 3 3 0011 3
0100 4 4 0100 4
0101 5 5 0101 5
0110 6 6 0110 6
0111 7 7 0111 7
1000 10 8 1000 8
1001 11 9 1001 9
1010 12 10 0000 A
1011 13 11 0001 B
1100 14 12 0010 C
1101 15 13 0011 D
1110 16 14 0100 E
1111 17 15 0101 F
10000 20 16 0110 10
10001 21 17 0111 11
2.8 M Relay
The types and functions of special auxiliary relays (special M) are listed in the table below. Care
should be taken that some devices of the same No. may bear different meanings in different series
MPUs. Special M and special D marked with “*” will be further illustrated in 2.13. Columns marked
with “R” refers to “read only”, “R/W” refers to “read and write”, “-“ refers to the status remains
unchanged and “#” refers to that system will set it up according to the status of the PLC.
OFF STOP RUN
Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Function SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
M EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
M1000* Monitor normally open contact ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF ON OFF R NO OFF
M1001* Monitor normally closed contact ○ ○ ○ ○ ON OFF ON R NO ON
Enable single positive pulse at the
M1002* moment when RUN is activate (Normally ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF ON OFF R NO OFF
OFF)
Enable single negative pulse at the
M1003* moment when RUN is activate (Normally ○ ○ ○ ○ ON OFF ON R NO ON
ON)
M1004* ON when syntax errors occur ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
M1008* Watchdog timer (ON: PLC WDT time out) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
Indicate LV signal due to 24VDC
M1009 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
insufficiency
M1011* 10ms clock pulse, 5ms ON/5ms OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF

2-12
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Function SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
M EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
100ms clock pulse, 50ms ON / 50ms
M1012* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
OFF
M1013* 1s clock pulse, 0.5s ON / 0.5s OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1014* 1 min clock pulse, 30s ON / 30s OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1015* Enable high-speed timer ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1016* Indicate Year display mode of RTC. ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1017* ±30 seconds correction on real time clock ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1018 Flag for Radian/Degree, ON for degree ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
If the PLC detects the external 24V
voltage is unstable; OFF: the PLC runs
M1019* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
after the power is stabilized, ON: the error
LED keeps flashing
M1020 Zero flag ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1021 Borrow flag ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1022 Carry flag ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1024 COM1 monitor request ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
Indicate incorrect request for
M1025* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
communication
M1026 RAMP mode selection ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1027 PR output mode selection (8/16 bytes) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
Switch T64~T126 timer resulotion
M1028 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
(10ms/100ms). ON =10ms
CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output execution
M1029* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed.
M1030* Pulse output Y1 execution completed ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1031* Clear all non-latched memory ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1032* Clear all latched memory ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1033* Output state latched at STOP ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1034* Disable all Y outputs ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
Enable X7 input point as RUN/STOP
M1035* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
switch
Enable 8-sets SPD function (Has to be
M1037* used with D1037) (SE does not support ╳ ╳ ○ ○ OFF OFF OFF R/W NO OFF
this function.)
Switch T200~T255 timer resulotion
M1038 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
(10ms/1ms). ON = 1ms
M1039* Fix scan time ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1040 Disable step transition ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1041 Step transition start ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
M1042 Enable pulse operation ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1043 Zero return completed ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
M1044 Zero point condition ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
M1045 Disable “all output reset” function ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1046 Indicate STL status ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1047 Enable STL monitoring ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1048 Indicate alarm status ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1049 Enable alarm monitoring ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1050 Disable interruption I000 / I001 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1051 Disable interruption I100 / I101 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1052 Disable interruption I200 / I201 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1053 Disable interruption I300 / I301 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1054 Disable interruption I400 / I401 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1055 Disable interruption I500 / I501 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1056 Disable interruption I600~I699 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
Disable interruption I700~I799
M1057 Disable interruption I805~I899 (V2.00 and ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
above are supported.)
M1058 COM3 monitor request ○ ╳ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
Disable high-speed counter interruptions
M1059 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
I010~I080
M1060 System error message 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1061 System error message 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF

2-13
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Function SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
M EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
M1062 System error message 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1063 System error message 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1064 Incorrect use of operands ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
M1065 Syntax error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
M1066 Loop error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
M1067* Program execution error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
M1068* Execution error locked (D1068) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
Switching clock pulse of Y1 for PWM
M1070 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
instruction (ON: 100us; OFF: 1ms)
Switching clock pulse of Y3 for PWM
M1071 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
instruction (ON: 100us; OFF: 1ms)
M1072 PLC status (RUN/STOP), ON = RUN ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF ON OFF R/W NO OFF
M1075 Error occurring when write in Flash ROM ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
Y0/CH0(Y0, Y1) pulse output pause
M1078 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
(immediate)
M1079 Y1 pulse output pause (immediate) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
M1080 COM2 monitor request ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
Changing conversion mode for FLT
M1081 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
instruction
Selecting X6 pulse-width detecting mode.
M1083 = ON, detecting pulse-width when
M1083* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
X6 = ON; M1083 = OFF, detecting pulse-
width when X6 = OFF.
Enabling X6 Pulse width detecting
M1084* function. (has to be used with M1183 and ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF OFF R/W NO OFF
D1023)
M1085 Selecting DVP-PCC01 duplicating function ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
Enabling password function for DVP-
M1086 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
PCC01
Matrix comparison.
Comparing between equivalent values
M1088 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
(M1088 = ON) or different values (M1088
= OFF).
Indicating the end of matrix comparison.
M1089 When the comparison reaches the last bit, ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
M1089 = ON.
Indicating start of matrix comparison.
M1090 When the comparison starts from the first ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
bit, M1090 = ON.
Indicating matrix searching results. When
the comparison has matched results,
M1091 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
comparison will stop immediately and
M1091 = ON.
Indicating pointer error. When the pointer
M1092 Pr exceeds the comparison range, M1092 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
= ON
Matrix pointer increasing flag. Adding 1 to
M1093 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
the current value of the Pr.
Matrix pointer clear flag. Clear the current
M1094 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
value of the Pr to 0
Carry flag for matrix rotation / shift /
M1095 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
output.
M1096 Borrow flag for matrix rotation/shift/input ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
Direction flag for matrix
M1097 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
rotation/displacement
Counting the number of bits which are “1”
M1098 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
or “0”
M1099 ON when the bits counting result is “0” ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
Y2/CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output execution
M1102* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
completed
M1103* Y3 pulse output completed ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
Y2/CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output pause
M1104 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
(immediate)
M1105 Y3 pulse output pause (immediate) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
Zero point selection. M1106=ON, change
M1106 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
the zero point to the right of DOG switch

2-14
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Function SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
M EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
for zero return on CH0.
Zero point selection. M1107=ON, change
M1107 the zero point to the right of DOG switch ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
for zero return on CH1.
Y0/CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output pause
M1108 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
(ramp down)
M1109 Y1 pulse output pause (ramp down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
Y2/CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output pause
M1110 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
(ramp down)
M1111 Y3 pulse output pause (ramp down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
Switching clock pulse of Y0 for PWM
M1112 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
instruction (ON: 100us; OFF: 1ms)
Switching clock pulse of Y2 for PWM
M1113 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
instruction (ON: 100us; OFF: 1ms)
Enable 2-speed output function of
SA2
M1119* DDRVI/DDRVA instructions; refer to ○ ○ 26SE
○ OFF OFF OFF R/W NO OFF
section 2.16 for the usage
Retaining the communication setting of
M1120* COM2 (RS-485), modifying D1120 will be ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
invalid when M1120 is set.
For COM2(RS-485), data transmission
M1121 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
ready
M1122 For COM2(RS-485), sending request ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
For COM2(RS-485), data receiving
M1123 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
completed
M1124 For COM2(RS-485), data receiving ready ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
For COM2(RS-485), communication ready
M1125 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF OFF R/W NO OFF
status reset
For COM2(RS-485), set STX/ETX as user
M1126 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF OFF R/W NO OFF
defined or system defined
For COM2(RS-485), data sending /
M1127 receiving / converting completed. (RS ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF OFF R/W NO OFF
instruction is not supported)
For COM2(RS-485),
M1128 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF OFF R/W NO OFF
Transmitting/Receiving status Indication
M1129 For COM2(RS-485), receiving time out ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
M1130 For COM2(RS-485), STX/ETX selection ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
For COM2(RS-485), ON when
M1131 MODRD/RDST/MODRW data is being ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
converted from ASCII to Hex
ON when there are no communication
M1132 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
related instructions in the program
For COM3(RS-485/USB), retaining
M1136* ○ ╳ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
communication setting
Retain DNET mapping data during non-
M1137 ╳ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W NO OFF
executing period
For COM1 (RS-232), retaining
M1138* communication setting. Modifying D1036 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
will be invalid when M1138 is set.
For COM1(RS-232), ASCII/RTU mode
M1139* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
selection (OFF: ASCII; ON: RTU)
For COM2 (RS-485), MODRD / MODWR
M1140 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
/ MODRW data receiving error
For COM2 (RS-485), MODRD / MODWR
M1141 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
/ MODRW parameter error
Data receiving error of VFD-A handy
M1142 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R NO OFF
instructions
For COM2(RS-485), ASCII/RTU mode
M1143* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
selection (OFF: ASCII; ON: RTU)
Read MAC address from the left side
network module (should work with
M1145* ╳ ╳ ○ ○ OFF OFF OFF R/W NO OFF
D1400~1403); available for 12SA2:
V3.00, 12SE: V1.92, 20SX2: V3.00
After the instruction DELAY is executed,
V2.6
M1148 the execution of the program following V3.2 V3.0 V2.4 OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
V1.4
DELAY is delayed for 5us.

2-15
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Function SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
M EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
Enabling the mask and alignment mark
M1156* function on I400/I401(X4) corresponding ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
to Y0
Enabling the mask and alignment mark
M1157* function on I500/I501(X5) corresponding V3.41 ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
to Y1
Enabling the mask and alignment mark
M1158* function on I600/I601(X6) corresponding ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
to Y2
Enabling the mask and alignment mark
M1158* function on I700/I701(X7) corresponding V3.41 ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
to Y3
M1161 8/16 bit mode (ON = 8 bit mode) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
Switching between decimal integer and
binary floating point for SCLP instruction.
M1162 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
ON: binary floating point; OFF: decimal
integer
M1167 16-bit mode for HKY input ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1168 Designating work mode of SMOV ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
Enable the communication instruction for
Delta VFD series inverter.
M1177 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
ON: VFD-A (Default), OFF: other models
of VFD
M1178 Enable knob VR0 ╳ ╳ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1179 Enable knob VR1 ╳ ╳ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
The EX2/SX2 model reads analog-to-
M1180 ○ ╳ ╳ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
digital values immediately.
The EX2/SX2 model outputs digital-to-
M1181 ○ ╳ ╳ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
analog values immediately.
M1182 = ON, disable auto-mapping
function when connected with left-side
modules.
 For SA2 /SX2/SE models, values of
AIO modules will be auto-mapped to
D9800 and above.
M1182* ╳ ╳ ○ ○ ON - - R/W NO ON
 If the left side is connected with a
communication module, additional 10
words will be occupied. Ex: 04AD-SL
+ EN01-SL + SA2, average value of
Ch1~Ch4 of 04AD-SL maps to
D9810~D9813.
M1183 = ON, disable auto mapping
function when connected with special
M1183* modules ○ ╳ ○ ○ # - - R/W NO #
#: ES2/EX2: OFF; SE/SA2/SX2: ON
(maps to D9900 and later)
M1190 Set Y0 high speed output as 0.01 ~ 10Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
M1191 Set Y1 high speed output as 0.01 ~ 10Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
M1192 Set Y2 high speed output as 0.01 ~ 10Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
M1193 Set Y3 high speed output as 0.01 ~ 10Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
Keep connectivity flag for ETHRS
M1196 instrucitons (available for SA2/SX2 V2.89, ╳ ╳ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
SE with firmware V1.83 and later )
In execution flag for ETHRS instrucitons
M1197 (available for SA2/SX2 V2.89, SE with ╳ ╳ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
firmware V1.83 and later )
Error flag for ETHRS instrucitons
M1198 (available for SA2/SX2 V2.89, SE with ╳ ╳ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
firmware V1.83 and later )
M1200 C200 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1201 C201 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1202 C202 counting mode ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1203 C203 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1204 C204 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1205 C205 counting mode (ON :count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1206 C206 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1207 C207 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF

2-16
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Function SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
M EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
M1208 C208 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1209 C209 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1210 C210 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1211 C211 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1212 C212 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1213 C213 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1214 C214 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1215 C215 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1216 C216 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1217 C217 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1218 C218 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1219 C219 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1220 C220 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1221 C221 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1222 C222 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1223 C223 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1224 C224 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1225 C225 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1226 C226 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1227 C227 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1228 C228 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1229 C229 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1230 C230 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1231 C231 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
C232 counting mode (ON: count down) ╳ ○ ╳ ╳ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1232
C232 counter monitor (ON: count down) ○ ╳ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1233 C233 counter monitor (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1234 C234 counter monitor (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1235 C235 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1236 C236 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1237 C237 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1238 C238 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1239 C239 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1240 C240 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1241 C241 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1242 C242 counting mode (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
C243 Reset function control. ON = R
M1243 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
function disabled
C244 Reset function control. ON = R
M1244 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
function disabled
M1245 C245 counter monitor (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1246 C246 counter monitor (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1247 C247 counter monitor (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1248 C248 counter monitor (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1249 C249 counter monitor (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1250 C250 counter monitor (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1251 C251 counter monitor (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1252 C252 counter monitor (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1253 C253 counter monitor (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1254 C254 counter monitor (ON: count down) ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
Set the ramp up/down of Y0, Y2 to be “S
M1257 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
curve.” ON = S curve.
Set up X7 as the reset signal for software
M1260 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
counters C235 ~ C241
Enable cyclic output for table output
M1262 function of DPTPO instruction. ON = ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
enable.
C235 counting mode (ON: falling-edge
M1270 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
count)
C236 counting mode ON: falling-edge
M1271 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
count)

2-17
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Function SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
M EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
C237 counting mode (ON: falling-edge
M1272 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
count)
C238 counting mode (ON: falling-edge
M1273 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
count)
C239 counting mode (ON: falling-edge
M1274 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
count)
C240 counting mode (ON: falling-edge
M1275 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
count)
C241 counting mode (ON: falling-edge
M1276 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
count)
C242 counting mode (ON: falling-edge
M1277 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
count)
For I000 / I001, reverse interrupt trigger
M1280* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
pulse direction (Rising/Falling)
For I400 / I401, reverse interrupt trigger
M1284* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
pulse direction (Rising/Falling)
For I600 / I601, reverse interrupt trigger
M1286* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
pulse direction (Rising/Falling)
High / low bits exchange for XCH
M1303 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
instruction
M1304* Enable force-ON/OFF of input point X ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
Reverse Y1 pulse output direction in high
M1305 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
speed pulse output instructions
Reverse Y3 pulse output direction in high
M1306 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
speed pulse output instructions
For ZRN instruction, enable left limit
M1307 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
switch
Output specified pulses or seek Z phase
M1308* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF OFF R/W NO OFF
signal when zero point is achieved.
For COM1(RS-232), sending request
M1312 (Only applicable for MODRW and RS ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
instruction)
For COM1(RS-232), ready for data
M1313 receiving (Only applicable for MODRW ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
and RS instruction)
For COM1(RS-232), data receiving
M1314 completed (Only applicable for MODRW ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
and RS instruction)
For COM1(RS-232), data receiving error
M1315 (Only applicable for MODRW and RS ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
instruction)
For COM3(RS-485), sending request
M1316 (Only applicable for MODRW and RS ○ ╳ ○ ╳ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
instruction)
For COM3(RS-485), ready for data
M1317 receiving (Only applicable for MODRW ○ ╳ ○ ╳ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
and RS instruction)
For COM3(RS-485), data receiving
M1318 completed (Only applicable for MODRW ○ ╳ ○ ╳ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
and RS instruction)
For COM3(RS-485), data receiving error
M1319 (Only applicable for MODRW and RS ○ ╳ ○ ╳ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
instruction)
For COM3 (RS-485), ASCII/RTU mode
M1320* ○ ╳ ○ ╳ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
selection. (OFF: ASCII; ON: RTU)
Close the conditional contact and to
enable the instructions PLSR, DPLSR Y0,
DDRVI, DDRVA CH0(Y0/Y1) to execute
M1334* ramp-down (ON: Enable; OFF: Disable) ○ ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
(available for ES2/EX2: V3.42, ES2-C:
V3.48, ES2-E: V1.00, SS2: V3.28, 12SA2:
V2.86, 26SE: V2.0, SX2: V2.86, 28SA2:
V3.0 or later)

M1335* Close the conditional contact and to ○ ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

enable the instructions PLSR/DPLSR

2-18
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Function SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
M EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
Y2/DDRVI/DDRVA CH1(Y2/Y3) (ON:
Enable; OFF: Disable) (available for
ES2/EX2: V3.42, ES2-C: V3.48, ES2-E:
V1.00, SS2: V3.28, 12SA2: V2.86, 26SE:
V2.0, SX2: V2.86, 28SA2: V3.0 or later)
Output clear signals when ZRN is
M1346* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
completed
Auto-reset Y0 when high speed pulse
M1347 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
output is completed
Auto-reset Y1 when high speed pulse
M1348 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
output is completed
When M1349 is ON, the CANopen
M1349 function is enabled. (Only for DVP-ES2- ○ ╳ ╳ ╳ On - - R/W NO On
C)
M1350* Enable PLC LINK ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
M1351* Enable auto mode on PLC LINK ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
M1352* Enable manual mode on PLC LINK ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
Enable access up to 50 words through
M1353* PLC LINK (If M1353 is ON, ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W YES OFF
D1480~D1511 are latched devices.)
Enable simultaneous data read/write in a
M1354* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
polling of PLC LINK
Select Slave linking mode in PLC LINK
M1355* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
(ON: manual; OFF: auto-detection)
Enable station number selection function.
When both M1353 and M1356 are ON,
M1356* ○ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
the user can specify the station number
in D1900~D1931
Enabling the detection of X0’s input pulse V3.2 V2.6
M1357* ╳ ╳ 6 OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
frequency (ON: Enable; OFF: Disable) 2
Enablling the detection of X1’s input pulse V3.2 V2.6
M1358* ╳ ╳ 6 OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
frequency (ON: Enable; OFF: Disable) 2
Enablling the detection of X2’s input pulse V3.2 V2.6
M1359* ╳ ╳ 6
OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
frequency (ON: Enable; OFF: Disable) 2
M1360* Slave ID#1 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
M1361* Slave ID#2 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
M1362* Slave ID#3 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
M1363* Slave ID#4 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
M1364* Slave ID#5 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
M1365* Slave ID#6 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
M1366* Slave ID#7 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
M1367* Slave ID#8 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
M1368* Slave ID#9 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
M1369* Slave ID#10 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
M1370* Slave ID#11 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
M1371* Slave ID#12 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
M1372* Slave ID#13 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
M1373* Slave ID#14 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
M1374* Slave ID#15 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
M1375* Slave ID#16 status on PLC LINK network ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES OFF
Indicate Slave ID#1 data interchange
M1376* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK
Indicate Slave ID#2 data interchange
M1377* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK
Indicate Slave ID#3 data interchange
M1378* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK
Indicate Slave ID#4 data interchange
M1379* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK
Indicate Slave ID#5 data interchange
M1380* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK
Indicate Slave ID#6 data interchange
M1381* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK

2-19
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Function SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
M EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
Indicate Slave ID#7 data interchange
M1382* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK
Indicate Slave ID#8 data interchange
M1383* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK
Indicate Slave ID#9 data interchange
M1384* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK
Indicate Slave ID#10 data interchange
M1385* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK
Indicate Slave ID#11 data interchange
M1386* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK
Indicate Slave ID#12 data interchange
M1387* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK
Indicate Slave ID#13 data interchange
M1388* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK
Indicate Slave ID#14 data interchange
M1389* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK
Indicate Slave ID#15 data interchange
M1390* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK
Indicate Slave ID#16 data interchange
M1391* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
status on PLC LINK
M1392* Slave ID#1 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1393* Slave ID#2 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1394* Slave ID#3 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1395* Slave ID#4 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1396* Slave ID#5 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1397* Slave ID#6 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1398* Slave ID#7 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1399* Slave ID#8 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1400* Slave ID#9 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1401* Slave ID#10 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1402* Slave ID#11 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1403* Slave ID#12 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1404* Slave ID#13 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1405* Slave ID#14 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1406* Slave ID#15 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
M1407* Slave ID#16 linking error ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#1 is
M1408* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#2 is
M1409* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#3 is
M1410* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#4 is
M1411* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#5 is
M1412* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#6 is
M1413* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#7 is
M1414* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#8 is
M1415* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#9 is
M1416* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#10 is
M1417* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#11 is
M1418* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#12 is
M1419* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#13 is
M1420* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#14 is
M1421* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed

2-20
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Function SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
M EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#15 is
M1422* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that reading from Slave ID#16 is
M1423* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#1 is
M1424* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#2 is
M1425* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#3 is
M1426* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#4 is
M1427* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#5 is
M1428* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#6 is
M1429* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#7 is
M1430* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#8 is
M1431* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#9 is
M1432* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#10 is
M1433* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#11 is
M1434* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#12 is
M1435* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#13 is
M1436* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#14 is
M1437* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#15 is
M1438* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Indicate that writing to Slave ID#16 is
M1439* ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R NO OFF
completed
Auto-reset Y2 when high speed pulse
M1524 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
output is completed
Auto-reset Y3 when high speed pulse
M1525 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
output is completed
Enable ramp-down time setting on Y0.
M1534 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
Has to be used with D1348.
Enable ramp-down time setting on Y2.
M1535 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
Has to be used with D1349.
M1538 Indicate pause status of Y0 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
M1539 Indicate pause status of Y1 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
M1540 Indicate pause status of Y2 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
M1541 Indicate pause status of Y3 ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
The absolute position of Delta ASDA-A2
V2.6
M1580 servo is read successfully by means of V3.2 ╳ V2.4 OFF OFF OFF R/W NO OFF
V1.4
the instruction DABSR.
The absolute position of Delta ASDA-A2
V2.6
M1581 servo is not read successfully by means V3.2 ╳ V2.4 OFF OFF OFF R/W NO OFF
V1.4
of the instruction DABSR.
If the left limit switch of CH0 is enabled, it
can be triggered either by a rising-edge
V2.8
M1584 signal or by a falling-edge signal. (OFF: V3.2 V3.0 V2.6 OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
V1.4
Rising-edge signal; ON: Falling-edge
signal)
If the left limit switch of CH1 is enabled, it
can be triggered either by a rising-edge
V2.8
M1585 signal or by a falling-edge signal. (OFF: V3.2 V3.0 V2.6 OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
V1.4
Rising-edge signal; ON: Falling-edge
signal)

2-21
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Function SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
M EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
Enabling the acceleration of the Ethernet
V2.66
M1590 data exchange (ON: Enable; OFF: ╳ ╳ V1.4
V2.66 OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
Disable)
Enabling the fetching of the value in the
hardware counter
V V SA2:
M1598* C243/C245/C246/C247/C248/C251/C252 V2.82
V2.82 OFF - - R/W NO OFF
3.28 3.28
, and using X6 as a fetching signal (ON:
Enable; OFF: Disable)
Enabling the fetching of the value in the
hardware counter
V V SA2:
M1599* C244/C249/C250/C253/C254, and using V2.82
V2.82 OFF - - R/W NO OFF
3.28 3.28
X7 as a fetching signal (ON: Enable;
OFF: Disable)
ES2-
M1614 Enabling the drive function C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
V3.48
ES2-
M1615 Drive initializaiton complete C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48
ES2-
M1616 Drive error C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48
ES2-
Independent heartbeat mode (ON:
M1617 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
independent mode, OFF: linking mode V3.49
Communication protocol for CANRS
instruction; OFF: 2.0B, ON: 2.0A) ES2-
M1620 C ╳ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
(available for ES2-C: V3.49, SA2/SX2:
V2.89, SE: V1.87 or later)
Communication mode (Master/Slave) for
CANRS instruction; OFF: master, ON: ES2-
M1621 C
╳ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
slave) (available for ES2-C: V3.49,
SA2/SX2: V2.89, SE: V1.87 or later)
Single or two ways communication for
CANRS instruction; OFF: two ways, ON:
ES2-
M1622 single way C ╳ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
(available for ES2-C: V3.49, SA2/SX2:
V2.89, SE: V1.87 or later)
Communication error for CANRS
ES2-
M1623 instruction (available for ES2-C: V3.49, C ╳ ○ ○ OFF - - R/W NO OFF
SA2/SX2: V2.89, SE: V1.87 or later)
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #1 pulse
M1624 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
outputting complete V3.48
For drive instructions, drive #2 pulse ES2-
M1625 outputting complete
C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48
For drive instructions, drive #3 pulse ES2-
M1626 outputting complete
C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48
For drive instructions, drive #4 pulse ES2-
M1627 outputting complete
C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48
For drive instructions, drive #5 pulse ES2-
M1628 outputting complete
C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48
For drive instructions, drive #6 pulse ES2-
M1629 outputting complete
C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48
For drive instructions, drive #7 pulse ES2-
M1630 outputting complete
C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48
For drive instructions, drive #8 pulse ES2-
M1631 outputting complete
C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #1 ramp-
M1632 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
down stop V3.48
For drive instructions, drive #2 ramp- ES2-
M1633 down stop
C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48
For drive instructions, drive #3 ramp- ES2-
M1634 down stop
C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48
For drive instructions, drive #4 ramp- ES2-
M1635 down stop
C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48
For drive instructions, drive #5 ramp- ES2-
M1636 down stop
C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48
For drive instructions, drive #6 ramp- ES2-
M1637 down stop
C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48

2-22
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Function SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
M EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
For drive instructions, drive #7 ramp- ES2-
M1638 down stop
C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48
For drive instructions, drive #8 ramp- ES2-
M1639 down stop
C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #1 enabling
M1640 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
drive V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #2 enabling
M1641 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
drive V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #3 enabling
M1642 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
drive V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #4 enabling
M1643 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
drive V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #5 enabling
M1644 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
drive V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #6 enabling
M1645 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
drive V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #7 enabling
M1646 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
drive V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #8 enabling
M1647 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
drive V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #1 enabling
M1648 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
go back and forth function V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #2 enabling
M1649 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
go back and forth function V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #3 enabling
M1650 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
go back and forth function V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #4 enabling
M1651 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
go back and forth function V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #5 enabling
M1652 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
go back and forth function V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #6 enabling
M1653 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
go back and forth function V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #7 enabling
M1654 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
go back and forth function V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #8 enabling
M1655 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
go back and forth function V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #1 directional
M1656 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
indication V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #2 directional
M1657 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
indication V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #3 directional
M1658 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
indication V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #4 directional
M1659 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
indication V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #5 directional
M1660 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
indication V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #6 directional
M1661 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
indication V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #7 directional
M1662 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
indication V3.48
ES2-
For drive instructions, drive #8 directional
M1663 C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
indication V3.48
ES2-
M1664 Drive #1 heartbeat error C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.49
ES2-
M1665 Drive #2 heartbeat error C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.49
ES2-
M1666 Drive #3 heartbeat error C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.49
ES2-
M1667 Drive #4 heartbeat error C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.49

2-23
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Function SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
M EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
ES2-
M1668 Drive #5 heartbeat error C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.49
ES2-
M1669 Drive #6 heartbeat error C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.49
ES2-
M1670 Drive #7 heartbeat error C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.49
ES2-
M1671 Drive #8 heartbeat error C ╳ ╳ ╳ OFF - OFF R/W NO OFF
V3.49
Use REF instruction to refresh current
position of high-speed output Y0
M1672 (available for ES2/EX2/ES2-C: V3.60, ○ ╳ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
ES2-E: V1.00, 28SA2/12SA2/SX2: V3.0,
26SE: V1.92 and later)
Use REF instruction to refresh current
position of high-speed output Y1 (available
M1673 for ES2/EX2/ES2-C: V3.60, ES2-E: V1.00, ○ ╳ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
28SA2/12SA2/SX2: V3.0, 26SE: V1.92 and
later)
Use REF instruction to refresh current
position of high-speed output Y2 (available
M1674 for ES2/EX2/ES2-C: V3.60, ES2-E: V1.00, ○ ╳ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
28SA2/12SA2/SX2: V3.0, 26SE: V1.92 and
later)
Use REF instruction to refresh current
position of high-speed output Y3 (available
M1675 for ES2/EX2/ES2-C: V3.60, ES2-E: V1.00, ○ ╳ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
28SA2/12SA2/SX2: V3.0, 26SE: V1.92 and
later)
Enabling to read the code 0X04 of the
Slave ID1 from PLC Link (available for
M1700*
ES2/EX2/ES2-C: V3.48, ES2-E : V1.00, ○ ○ ○ ○ OFF OFF - R/W NO OFF
~1731*
12SA2: V3.0, SS2: V3.60, 2: V3.0, 26SE:
V2.0, 28SA2: V3.0 and later)

2.9 S Relay
Initial step relay Starting instruction in Sequential Function Chart (SFC).
S0~S9, total 10 points.
Zero return step relay Returns to zero point when using IST instruction in program. Zero
return step relays not used for IST instruction can be used as
general step relays.
S10~S19, total 10 ponits.
Latched step relay In sequential function chart (SFC), latched step relay will be saved
when power loss after running. The state of power on after power
loss will be the same as the sate before power loss.
S20 ~ S127, total 108 points.
General purpose step relay General relays in sequential function chart (SFC). They will be
cleared when power loss after running.
S128 ~ S911, total 784 points.
Alarm step relay Used with alarm driving instruction API 46 ANS as an alarm
contact for recording the alarm messages or eliminating external
malfunctions.
S912 ~ S1023, total 112 points.
2.10 T (Timer)
The units of the timer are 1ms, 10ms and 100ms and the counting method is counting up. When
the present value in the timer equals the set value, the associated output coil will be ON. The set
value should be a K value in decimal and can be specified by the content of data register D.
The actual set time in the timer = timer resolution× set value
Ex: If set value is K200 and timer resolution is 10ms, the actual set time in timer will be 10ms*200 =
2000ms = 2 sec.
General Timer
The timer executes once when the program reaches END instruction. When TMR instruction is

2-24
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

executed, the timer coil will be ON when the current value reaches its preset value.
When X0 = ON, TMR instruction is driven. When current value achieves K100, the assocailte timer
contact T0 is ON to drive Y0. If X0 = OFFor the power is off, the current value in T0 will be cleared
as 0 and output Y0 driven by contact T0 will be OFF.
X0
TMR T0 K100

T0
Y0 10 sec

X0
K100
present
T0 value

Y0

Accumulative Timer
The timer executes once when the program reaches END instruction. When TMR instruction is
executed, the timer coil will be ON when the current value reaches its preset value. For
accumulative timers, current value will not be cleared when timing is interrupted.
Timer T250 will be driven when X0 = ON. When X0 = OFFor the power is off, timer T250 will pause
and retain the current value. When X0 is ON again, T250 resumes timing from where it was paused.
X0
TMR T250 K100

T250
Y0

T1 T2 T1+T2=10sec

X0
K100
present
T250 value

Y0

Timers for Subroutines and Interrupts

Timers for subroutines and interrupts count once when END instruction is met. The associated
output coils will be ON if the set value is achieved when End instruction executes. T184~T199 are
the only timers that can be used in subroutines or interrupts. Generals timers used in subroutines
and interrupts will not work if the subroutines or interrupts are not executing.
2.11 C (Counter)
Counters will increment their present count value when input signals are triggered from OFFON.
16 bits
32 bits counters
counters
Type General General High speed
C232(C233)~C242,
Counters C0~C199 C200~C231(C232) C243, C244
C245~C254
Count
Count up Count up/down Count up
direction
Range 0~32,767 -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647 0~2,147,483,647
Preset Constant K or
value data register Constant K or data register D (Dword)
register D (Word)
Output Counter will Counter will keep on counting when preset Counter will keep on

2-25
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

16 bits
32 bits counters
counters
operation stop when value reached. The count value will become counting when preset
preset value -2,147,483,648 if one more count is added value is reached. The
reached to +2,147,483,647 count value will
become 0 if one more
count is added to
+2,147,483,647
Ouptut Coil
Output coil is ON when counter reaches or Output coil is ON
Output will be ON
is above preset value. when counter
contact when counter
Output coil is OFF when counter is below reaches or is above
function reaches
preset value. preset value
preset value.
Associated devices
are activated
immediately when
High speed
- preset value is -
conparison
reached, i.e.
independant of scan
time.
Reset The present value will reset to 0 when RST instruction is executed, output coil will
action be OFF.

Example:
LD X0 X0
RST C0
RST C0
LD X1 X1
CNT C0 K5
CNT C0 K5
C0
LD C0
Y0
OUT Y0
When X0 = ON, RST instruction resets X0
C0. Every time When X1 is driven, C0 will
count up (add 1).
When C0 reaches the preset value K5, X1
output coil Y0 will be ON and C0 will stop
counting and ignore the signals from input 5
4
X1. C0 3
settings
present 2
value 1
0 0

Contacts Y0, C0

M relays M1200~M1254 are used to set the up/down counting direction for C200~C254
respectively. Setting the corresponding M relay ON will set the counter to count down.
Example:
LD X10
X10
OUT M1200
M1200
LD X11
X11
RST C200 RST C200
LD X12 X12
CNT C200 K-5 DCNT C200 K-5
LD C200 C200
Y0
OUT Y0

2-26
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

a) X10 drives M1200 to

determine counting direction
(up / down) of C200
b) When X11 goes from OFF to
ON, RST instsruction will be Accumulatively Accumulatively
executed and the PV (present X10 increasing Progressively increasing
value) in C200 will be cleared decreasing
X11
and contact C200 is OFF.
c) When X12 goes from Off to
On, PV of C200 will count up X12
(plus 1) or count down (minus 5
1). 4 4
3 3
d) When PV in C200 changes 2 2
PV in
from K-6 to K-5, the contact C200
1 1
0 0 0
C200 will be energized. When -1
PV in C200 changes from K-5 -2
to K-6, the contact of C200 -3 -3
-4 -4
will be reset. -5 -5
e) If MOV instruction is applied When the output contact -6 -6
was On. -7 -7
through WPLSoft or HPP to -8
Contacts
designate a value bigger than Y0, C0
SV to the PV register of C0,
next time when X1 goes from
OFF to ON, the contact C0
will be ON and PV of C0 will
equal SV.
2.12 High-speed Counters
There are two types of high speed counters provided including Software High Speed Counter
(SHSC) and Hardware High Speed Counter (HHSC). The same Input point (X) can be designated
with only one high speed counter. Double designation on the same input or the same counter will
result in syntax error when executing DCNT instruction.
Applicable Software High Speed Counters:
C
1-phase input 2 phase 2 input
X
C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C232#2 C233 C234
X0 U/D A
X1 U/D
X2 U/D B
X3 U/D
X4 U/D A
X5 U/D B
X6 U/D A
X7 U/D B
R/F M1270 M1271 M1272 M1273 M1274 M1275 M1276 M1277 - - -
U/D M1235 M1236 M1237 M1238 M1239 M1240 M1241 M1242 - - -

U: Count up D: Count down A: Phase A input B: Phase B input

Note:
1. SHSC supports max 10kHz input pulse on single point. Max 8 counters are applicable in the
same time.
2. An SS2/SA2/SE model does not support a two-phase two-input counter (C232 with the input
points X0 and X2).
3. For 2-phase 2-input conuting, (X4, X5) (C233) and (X6, X7) (C234), max 5kHz. (X0,X2) (C232),
max 15kHz.
4. 2-phase 2-input counting supports double and quadruple frequency, which is selected in D1022
as the table shown below.

2-27
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

5. R/F (Rising edge trigger/ Falling edge trigger) can also be specified by special M. OFF = Rising;
ON = Falling.
6. U/D (Count up/Count down) can be specified by special M. OFF = count up; ON = count down.
Applicable Hardware High Speed Counters:
C 1-phase
1-phase 2-input 2-phase 2-input
input
X C243 C244 C245 C246 C247 C248 C249#2 C250#2 C251 C252 C253 C254
X0 U U/D U/D U U A A
X1 R Dir Dir D D B B
X2 U U/D U/D A A
X3 R Dir Dir B B
X4 R R R
X5 R R
U: Count up A: Phase A input Dir: Directoin signal input
D: Count down B: Phase B input R: Reset signal input
Note:
1. The max frequency of the 1-phase input counters X0 (C243) and X2 (C244) is 100kHz on
ES2/EX2/SA2/SX2 model and 20kHz on SS2 model.
2. An SE model does not support the counters C249 and C250.
3. The max frequency of the 1-phase 2-input counters (X0, X1) (C245, C246) and (X2, X3) (C249,
C250) is 100kHz on ES2/EX2/SA2/SX2 model and 20kHz on SS2 model.
4. The max frequency of the 1-phase 2-input counters (X0, X1) (C247, C248) is 10kHz on
ES2/EX2/SS2/SX2 model and 100kHz on 32ES211T and SA2 model.
5. The max frequency of the 2-phase 2-input counter (X0, X1) (C251, C252) is 5kHz on ES2/EX2
model, 10kHz on SS2/SX2 model and 30kHz on 32ES211Tmodel. For ES2 series released
after the year of 2013, the max frequency for 12SA2, 28SA2, 12SE and 26SE are up to 50kHz.
6. The max frequency of the 2-phase 2-input counter (X2, X3) (C253, C254) is 5kHz on
ES2/EX2/SA2 model, 10 kHz on SS2/SX2 model and 30kHz on 32ES211T. For ES2 series
released after the year of 2013, the max frequency for 28SA2 and 26SE are up to 50kHz.
7. 2-phase 2-input counting supports double and 4 times frequency, which is selected in D1022
as the table in next page. Please refer to the below table for detailed counting wave form.
D1022 Counting mode

K1

K2
(Double Frequency)

K4 or other value
(Quadruple frequency)
(Default)

8. DVP-ES2/DVP-SS2 series PLCs whose firmware version is 2.80 or above support the single
frequency mode. DVP-SA2/DVP-SX2 series PLCs whose firmware version is 2.00 support the

2-28
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

single frequency mode. The other PLCs support the three modes.
9. C243 and C244 support count-up mode only and occupy the associate input points X1 and X3
as reset (“R”) function. If users do not need to apply reset function, set ON the associated
special M relays (M1243 and M1244) to disable the reset function.
10. “Dir” refers to direction control function. OFF indicates counting up; ON indicates counting
down.
11. When X1, X3, X4 and X5 is applied for reset function and associated external interrupts are
disabled, users can define the reset function as Rising/Falling-edge triggered by special M
relays
Reset Function X1 X3 X4 X5
R/F M1271 M1273 M1274 M1275
12. When X1, X3, X4 and X5 is applied for reset function and external interrupts are applied, the
interrupt instructions have the priority in using the input points. In addition, PLC will move the
current data in the counters to the associated data registers below then reset the counters.
Special D D1241, D1240 D1243, D1242
Counter C243 C246 C248 C252 C244 C250 C254
X1 X3
External Interrupt X4(I400/I401) X5(I500/I501)
(I100/I101) (I300/I301)

Example:
EI
M1000
DCNT C243 K100

FEND
M1000
I101 DMOV D1240 D0

IRET

END

When C243 is counting and external interrupt is triggerred from X1(I101), counted value in C243
will be move to (D1241, D1240) immediately then C243 is reset. After this interrupt I101 executes.
1-phase 1 input high-speed counter:
Example:
LD X20 X20
RST C235 RST C235
LD X21 X21
OUT M1235 M1235
X22
LD X22
DCNT C235 K5
DCNT C235 K5
C235
LD C235
Y0
OUT Y0
1. X21 drives M1235 to determine counting direction (Up/Down) of C235.
2. When X20 = ON, RST instsruction executes and the current value in C235 will be cleared.
Contact C235 will be OFF
3. When X22 = ON, C235 receives signals from X0 and counter will count up (+1) or count down
(-1).
4. When counter C235 reaches K5, contact C235 will be ON. If there is still input signal input for
X0, it will keep on counting.

2-29
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

counting down
X21,M1243 contact counting up

X20

X22

X0

C243
present 7
value 6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2
1
0

Y0, C243 contact

1-phase 2 inputs high-speed counter:

Example:
LD X20 X20
RST C247 RST C247

LD X21 X21
DCNT C247 K5
DCNT C247 K5
C247
LD C247
Y0
OUT Y0
1. When X20 is ON, RST instsruction executes and the current value in C247 will be cleared.
Contact C247 will be OFF.
2. When X21=ON, C247 receives count signals from X0 and counter counts up (+1), or C247
receives count signal from X1 and counter counts down (-1)
3. When C247 reaches K5, contact C247 will be ON. If there is still input signal from X0 or X1,
C247 will keep on counting
X20

X21

X0
count up
X1
count down
C247
present 7
value 6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2
1
0
Y0, C247 contact

2-30
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

AB-phase input high-speed counter:

Example:
LD M1002 M1002
MOV K2 D1022 MOV K2 D1022

LD X20 X20
RST C251 RST C251

LD X21 X21
DCNT C251 K5
DCNT C251 K5
C251
LD C251
Y0
OUT Y0
1. When X20 is ON, RST instsruction executes and the current value in C251 will be cleared.
Contact C251 will be OFF.
2. When X21 is ON, C251 receives A phase counting signal of X0 input terminal and B phase
counting signal of X1 input terminal and executes count up or count down
3. When counter C251 reaches K5, contact C251 will be ON. If there is still input signal from X0
or X1, C251 will keep on counting
4. Counting mode can be specified as double frequency or 4-times frequency by D1022. Default:
quadruple frequency.
X20

X21

A-phase X0

B-phase X1
6
C251 present value 5 5
4 4
3 3 3
2 2
1 Counting up 1
Counting down
0 0

Y0, C251 contact

2.13 Special Data Register

The types and functions of special registers (special D) are listed in the table below. Care should
be taken that some registers of the same No. may bear different meanings in different series MPUs.
Special M and special D marked with “*” will be further illustrated in 2.13. Columns marked with “R”
refers to “read only”, “R/W” refers to “read and write”, “-“ refers to the status remains unchanged
and “#” refers to that system will set it up according to the status of the PLC. For detailed
explanation please also refer to 2.13 in this chapter.
OFF STOP RUN
Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Content SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
D EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
Setting value of the watchdog timer (WDT)
D1000* ○ ○ ○ ○ 200 - - R/W NO 200
(Unit: 1ms)
Displaying the firmware version of DVP-
D1001 PLC (For example, the firmware version is ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R NO #
1.0 if the value in D1001 is HXX10.)
Program capacity (ES2/EX2/SA2/SX2:
D1002* ○ ○ ○ ○ # - - R NO #
15872; SS2: 7920)
Sum of the PLC internal program memory
D1003 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R YES #
(ES2/EX2/SA2/SX2: -15872; SS2: -7920)
D1004* Syntax check error code ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
D1008* Step address when WDT is ON ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1009 Number of LV (Low voltage) signal ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R YES 0

2-31
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Content SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
D EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
occurrence
D1010* Current scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) ○ ○ ○ ○ # # # R NO 0
D1011* Minimum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) ○ ○ ○ ○ # # # R NO 0
D1012* Maximum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) ○ ○ ○ ○ # # # R NO 0
Value of accumulative high-speed timer
D1015* ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
(0~32,767, unit: 0.1ms)
H’ H’ H’ H’
D1018* πPI (Low byte) ○ ○ ○ ○ R/W NO
0FDB 0FDB 0FDB 0FDB
H’ H’ H’ H’
D1019* πPI(High byte) ○ ○ ○ ○ R/W NO
4049 4049 4049 4049
X0~X7 input filter (unit: ms) 0~20ms
D1020* ○ ○ ○ ○ 10 - - R/W NO 10
adjustable
X10~X17 X7 input filter (unit: ms) 0~20ms
D1021* adjustable (available for 28SS2: V3.42, ╳ ○ ○ ╳ 10 - - R/W NO 10
28SA2: V3.0, 26SE: V2.0 and later)
Counting mode selection (Double
D1022 frequency/ 4 times frequency) for AB phase ○ ○ ○ ○ 4 - - R/W NO 4
counter (From X0, X1 input)
Register for Storing detected pulse width
D1023* ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
(unit: 0.1ms)
D1025* Code for communication request error ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
The pulse number for masking Y0 is set
D1026* ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R/W NO 0
when M1156 = ON (Low word)
The pulse number for masking Y0 is set
when M1156 = ON (High word)
If the value in the 32-bit register (D1027,
D1027* ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R/W NO 0
D1026) is less than or equal to 0, the
function will not be enabled. (Default value:
0)
D1028 Index register E0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1029 Index register F0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1030 PV of Y0 pulse output (Low word) ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
D1031 PV of Y0 pulse output (High word) ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
D1032 PV of Y1 pulse output (Low word) ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1033 PV of Y1 pulse output (High word) ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1036* COM1 (RS-232) communication protocol ○ ○ ○ ○ H’86 - - R/W NO H’86
Register for setting 8-sets SPD function
D1037* ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
(has to be used with M1037)
1. Delay time setting for data response
when PLC is SLAVE in COM2 / COM3 RS-
485 communication. Range: 0 ~ 10,000
(unit: 0.1ms).
D1038 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W NO 0
2. By using PLC LINK in COM2 (RS-485),
D1038 can be set to send next
communication data with delay. Range: 0 ~
10,000 (Unit: one scan cycle)
D1039* Fixed scan time (ms) ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1040 No. of the 1st step point which is ON. ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1041 No. of the 2nd step point which is ON ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1042 No. of the 3rd step point which is ON. ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1043 No. of the 4th step point which is ON ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1044 No. of the 5th step point which is ON. ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1045 No. of the 6th step point which is ON ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1046 No. of the 7th step point which is ON. ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1047 No. of the 8th step point which is ON ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1049 No. of alarm which is ON ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
Processing MODRD communication data
D1050 The PLC automatically converts the data in
D1070~D1085 in the ASCII mode into
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
hexadecimal values, or combines two lower
D1055 8 bits in the RTU mode into 16 bits in the
RTU mode.
Low word of X0’s input pulse frequency
D1056* (Unit: 0.001Hz) V3.22 ╳ ╳ V2.66 0 0 - R NO 0
It is used with M1357.

2-32
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Content SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
D EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
High word of X0’s input pulse frequency
D1057* (Unit: 0.001Hz) V3.22 ╳ ╳ V2.66 0 0 - R NO 0
It is used with M1357.
Low word of X1’s input pulse frequency
D1058* (Unit: 0.001Hz) V3.22 ╳ ╳ V2.66 0 0 - R NO 0
It is used with M1358.
High word of X1’s input pulse frequency
D1059* (Unit: 0.001Hz) V3.22 ╳ ╳ V2.66 0 0 - R NO 0
It is used with M1358.
Average number of times an analog signal
is input to the EX2/SX2 series PLC
D1062* ○ ╳ ╳ ○ 2 - - R/W YES 2
The default value is K10 for EX2 version
2.6 and version 2.8.
D1067* Error code for program execution error ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
D1068* Address of program execution error ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
Feedback data (ASCII) of Modbus
communication. When PLC’s RS-485
D1070
communication instruction receives
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
feedback signals, the data will be saved in
D1085 the registers D1070~D1085. Usres can
check the received data in these registers.
High word of the password in DVP-PCC01
D1086 (displayed in hex according to its ASCII ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
codes)
Low word of the password in DVP-PCC01
D1087 (displayed in hex according to its ASCII ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
codes)
Sent data of Modbus communication.
D1089 When PLC’s RS-485 communication
↓ instruction sends out data, the data will be ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1099 stored in D1089~D1099. Users can check
the sent data in these registers.
D1109* COM3 (RS-485) Communication protocol ○ ╳ ○ ○ H’86 - - R/W NO H’86
Average value of EX2/SX2 analog input
channel 0 (AD 0) When average times in
D1110* ○ ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1062 is set to 1, D1110 indicates present
value.
Average value of EX2/SX2 analog input
channel 1 (AD 1) When average times in
D1111* ○ ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1062 is set to 1, D1111 indicates present
value
Average value of EX2/SX2 analog input
channel 2 (AD 2) Whenaverage times in
D1112* ○ ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1062 is set to 1, D1112 indicates present
value
Average value of 20EX2/SX2 analog input
channel 3 (AD 3) Whenaverage times in
○ ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1062 is set to 1, D1113 indicates present
D1113*
value
Displaying the status of the analog input
○ ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
channel of 30EX2
Enable/disable 20EX2/SX2 AD channels
(0: enable (default) / 1: disable)
D1114* ○ ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W YES 0
bit0~bit3 sets AD0~AD3.
P.S. 30EX2 does not support this function.
20EX2/SX2 analog input/output mode
○ ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R/W YES 0
D1115* setting
30EX2 analog input/output mode setting ○ ╳ ╳ ╳ - - - R/W YES H’FFFF
Output value of analog output channel 0
D1116* ○ ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
(DA 0) of EX2/SX2
Output value of analog output channel 1
D1117* (DA 0) of 20EX2/SX2 ○ ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
P.S. 30EX2 does not support this function.
EX2/SX2 sampling time of analog/digital
converstion. Default: 2. Unit: 1ms.
D1118* Sampling time will be regarded as 2ms if ○ ╳ ╳ ○ 2 - - R/W YES 2
D1118≦2

2-33
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Content SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
D EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
D1120* COM2 (RS-485) communication protocol ○ ○ ○ ○ H’86 - - R/W NO H’86
COM1(RS-232) and COM2(RS-485) PLC
D1121* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes 1
communication address
COM2(RS-485) Residual number of words
D1122 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
of transmitting data
COM2(RS-485) Residual number of words
D1123 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
of the receiving data
COM2(RS-485) Definition of start character
D1124 ○ ○ ○ ○ H’3A - - R/W NO H’3A
(STX)
COM2(RS-485) Definition of first ending
D1125 ○ ○ ○ ○ H’0D - - R/W NO H’0D
character (ETX1)
COM2(RS-485) Definition of second ending
D1126 ○ ○ ○ ○ H’0A - - R/W NO H’0A
character (ETX2)
Number of pulses for ramp-up operation of
D1127 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
positioning instruction (Low word)
Number of pulses for ramp-up operation of
D1128 ○ ○ ○ ○
positioning instruction (High word)
COM2 (RS-485) Communication time-out
D1129 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
setting (ms)
COM2 (RS-485) Error code returning from
D1130 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
Modbus
Input/output percentage value of
D1131 ○ ○ ○ ○ 100 - - R/W NO 100
CH0(Y0,Y1) close loop control
Input/output percentage value of
D1132 ○ ○ ○ ○ 100 - - R/W NO 100
CH1(Y2,Y3) close loop control
Number of pulses for ramp-down operation
D1133 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
of positioning instruction (Low word)
Number of pulses for ramp-down operation
D1134 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
of positioning instruction (High word)
Pulse number for masking Y2 when M1158
D1135* ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R/W NO 0
= ON (Low word)
Pulse number for masking Y2 when M1158
D1136* ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R/W NO 0
= ON (High word)
Address where incorrect use of operand
D1137* ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
occurs
D1140* Number of I/O modules (max. 8) ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1142* Number of input points (X) on DIO modules ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
Number of output points (Y) on DIO
D1143* ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
modules
D1145* Number of the connected let-side modules ╳ ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
Vale fetched from the hardware counter
V V SA2:
D1150* C243/C245/C246/C247/C248/C251/C252 3.28 3.28 V2.82
V2.82 0 - - R/W NO 0
(Low word)
Value fetched from the hardware counter
V V SA2:
D1151* C243/C245/C246/C247/C248/C251/C252 3.28 3.28 V2.82
V2.82 0 - - R/W NO 0
(High word)
Value fetched from the hardware counter V V SA2:
D1152* 3.28 3.28 V2.82
V2.82 0 - - R/W NO 0
C244/C249/C250/C253/C254 (Low word)
Value fetched from the hardware conter V V SA2:
D1153* 3.28 3.28 V2.82
V2.82 0 - - R/W NO 0
C244/C249/C250/C253/C254 (High word)
The specific end word to be detected for
D1167 RS instruction to execute an interruption ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
request (I140) on COM1 (RS-232).
The specific end word to be detected for
D1168 RS instruction to execute an interruption ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
request (I150) on COM2 (RS-485)
The specific end word to be detected for
D1169 RS instruction to execute an interruption ○ ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
request (I160) on COM3 (RS-485)
Number of communication packets
D1175 received via broadcasting (number of ES2-C ╳ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
slaves) by executing CANRS instruction
Error code for ETHRS instruction (available
D1176 for ES2-E: V1.2, 12SE: V1.92, 26SE: V2.00 ES2-C ╳ SE ╳ 0 0 - R NO 0
and later)
Communication timeout setting for CANRS
D1177 instruction (available for ES2-C: V3.48, ES2-C ╳ ○ ○ 200 - - R/W NO 200
SA2/SX2: V2.89, SE: V1.83 and later)
D1178 VR0 value ╳ ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

2-34
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Content SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
D EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
D1179 VR1 value ╳ ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1182 Index register E1 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1183 Index register F1 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1184 Index register E2 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1185 Index register F2 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1186 Index register E3 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1187 Index register F3 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1188 Index register E4 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1189 Index register F4 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1190 Index register E5 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1191 Index register F5 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1192 Index register E6 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1193 Index register F6 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1194 Index register E7 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1195 Index register F7 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1220 Pulse output mode setting of CH0 (Y0, Y1) ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1221 Pulse output mode setting of CH1 (Y2, Y3) ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
Sender’s IP address when executing
D1227 ETHRS instruction in receiving mode ES2-C ╳ SE ╳ 0 0 - R NO 0
D1228 (available for ES2-E: V1.2, 12SE: V1.92,
26SE: V2.00)
Network MAC address (hexadecimal format
ex: 12:34:56:78:9A:BC => D1229=H'1234,
D1229~
D1230=H'5678, D1231=H'9ABC) (available ES2-C ╳ SE ╳ 0 0 - R YES 0
D1231
for ES2-E: V1.2, 12SE: V1.92, 26SE:
V2.00)
Number of output pulses for CH0 (Y0, Y1)
D1232* ramp-down stop when mark sensor ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 -- R/W NO 0
receives signals. (Low word).
Number of output pulses for CH0 (Y0, Y1)
D1233* ramp-down stop when mark sensor ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 -- R/W NO 0
receives signals. (High word).
Number of output pulses for CH1 (Y2, Y3)
D1234* ramp-down stop when mark sensor ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 -- R/W NO 0
receives signals. (Low word).
Number of output pulses for CH2 (Y2, Y3)
D1235* ramp-down stop when mark sensor ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 -- R/W NO 0
receives signals. (High word).
When interupt I400/I401/I100/I101 occurs,
D1240* D1240 stores the low word of high-speed ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
counter.
When interupt I400/I401/I100/I101 occurs,
D1241* D1241 stores the high Word of high-speed ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
counter.
When interupt I500/I501/I300/I301 occurs,
D1242* D1242 stores the low Wordof high-speed ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
counter.
When interupt I500/I501/I300/I301 occurs,
D1243* D1243 stores the high Word of high-speed ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
counter.
Idle time (pulse number) setting of CH0 (Y0,
D1244 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
Y1) The function is disabled if set value≦0.
Idle time (pulse number) setting of CH1 (Y2,
D1245 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
Y3) The function is disabled if set value≦0.
Low word of X2’s input pulse frequency
D1246* (Unit: 0.01Hz) V3.22 ╳ ╳ V2.66 0 0 - R NO 0
It is used with M1359.
High word of X2’s input pulse frequency
D1247* (Unit: 0.01Hz) V3.22 ╳ ╳ V2.66 0 0 - R NO 0
It is used with M1359.
Set value for COM1 (RS-232) data
receiving time-out (Unit: 1ms, min. 50ms,
D1249 value smaller than 50ms will be regarded ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
as 50ms) (only applicable for MODRW/RS
instruction) In RS instruction, no time-out

2-35
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Content SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
D EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
setting if “0” is specified.
COM1 (RS-232) communication error code
D1250 (only applicable for MODRW/RS ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
instruction)
Set value for COM3 (RS-485) data
receiving time-out (Unit: 1ms, min. 50ms,
value smaller than 50ms will be regarded
D1252 ○ ╳ ○ ╳ 50 - - R/W NO 50
as 50ms) (only applicable for MODRW/RS
instruction) In RS instruction, no time-out
setting if “0” is specified
COM3 (RS-485) communication error code
D1253 (only applicable for MODRW/RS ○ ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
instruction)
COM3 (RS-485) PLC communication
D1255* ○ ╳ ○ ○ 50 - - R/W YES 1
address
For COM2 RS-485 MODRW instruction.
D1256 D1256~D1295 store the sent data of
MODRW instruction. When MODRW
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
instruction sends out data, the data will be
D1295 stored in D1256~D1295. Users can check
the sent data in these registers.
For COM2 RS-485 MODRW instruction.
D1296 D1296~D1311 store the converted hex data
↓ from D1070 ~ D1085 (ASCII). PLC ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1311 automatically converts the received ASCII
data in D1070 ~ D1085 into hex data.
Specify the number of additional pulses for
additional pulses output and Z-phase
D1312* ○ ╳ ○ ○ 0 0 - R/W NO 0
seeking function of ZRN instruction (Has to
be used with M1308)
D1313* Second of RTC: 00 ~ 59 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
D1314* Minute of RTC: 00 ~ 59 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
D1315* Hour of RTC: 00 ~ 23 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
D1316* Day of RTC: 01 ~ 31 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 1
D1317* Month of RTC: 01 ~ 12 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 1
D1318* Week of RTC: 1 ~ 7 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 2
D1319* Year of RTC: 00 ~ 99 (A.D.) ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 8
D1320* ID of the 1st right side module ○ ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1321* ID of the 2nd right side module ○ ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1322* ID of the 3rd right side module ○ ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1323* ID of the 4th right side module ○ ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1324* ID of the 5th right side module ○ ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1325* ID of the 6th right side module ○ ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1326* ID of the 7th right side module ○ ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1327* ID of the 8th right side module ○ ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1336 PV of Y2 pulse output (Low word) ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
D1337 PV of Y2 pulse output (High word) ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
D1338 PV of Y3 pulse output (Low word) ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W NO 0
D1339 PV of Y3 pulse output (High word) ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W NO 0
Start/end frequency of the 1st group pulse
D1340 ○ ○ ○ ○ 100 - - R/W NO 100
output CH0 (Y0, Y1)
Ramp up/down time of the 1st group pulse
D1343 ○ ○ ○ ○ 100 - - R/W NO 100
output CH0 (Y0, Y1)
When M1534 = ON, D1348 stores the
D1348* ramp-down time of CH0(Y0, Y1) pulse ○ ○ ○ ○ 100 - - R/W NO 100
output.
When M1535 = ON, D1349 stores the
D1349* ramp-down time of CH1(Y2, Y3) pulse ○ ○ ○ ○ 100 - - R/W NO 100
output.
Start/end frequency of the 2nd group pulse
D1352 ○ ○ ○ ○ 100 - - R/W NO 100
output CH1 (Y2, Y3)
Ramp up/down time of the 2nd group pulse
D1353 ○ ○ ○ ○ 100 - - R/W NO 100
output CH1 (Y2, Y3)
PLC Link scan cycle (Unit: 1ms)
 Max: K32000
D1354 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
 D1354 = K0 when PLC Link stops or
when the first scan is completed

2-36
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Content SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
D EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1355* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#1
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1356* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#2
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1357* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#3
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1358* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#4
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1359* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#5
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1360* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#6
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1361* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#7
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1362* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#8
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1363* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#9
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1364* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#10
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1365* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#11
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1366* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#12
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1367* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#13
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1368* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#14
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1369* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#15
Starting reference for Master to read from
D1370* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
Slave ID#16
D1386 ID of the 1st left side module ╳ ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1387 ID of the 2nd left side module ╳ ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1388 ID of the 3rd left side module ╳ ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1389 ID of the 4th left side module ╳ ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1390 ID of the 5th left side module ╳ ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1391 ID of the 6th left side module ╳ ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1392 ID of the 7th left side module ╳ ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1393 ID of the 8th rleft side module ╳ ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
Starting ID of Slave designated by PLC
D1399* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 1
LINK
Read MAC address from the left side
module (ex: the 1st is K100, the 8th is K107)
D1400 ╳ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W NO 0
should work with M1145, refer to M1145 for
module availability
D1401~
Put MAC address in a consecutive order ╳ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R NO 0
D1403
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1415* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
Slave ID#1
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1416* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
Slave ID#2
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1417* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 10C8
Slave ID#3
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1418* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
Slave ID#4
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1419* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
Slave ID#5
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1420* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
Slave ID#6
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1421* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
Slave ID#7
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1422* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
Slave ID#8
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1423* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
Slave ID#9

2-37
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Content SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
D EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1424* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
Slave ID#10
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1425* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
Slave ID#11
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1426* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
Slave ID#12
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1427* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
Slave ID#13
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1428* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
Slave ID#14
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1429* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
Slave ID#15
Starting reference for Master to write in
D1430* ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
Slave ID#16
D1431* Times of PLC LINK polling cycle ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1432* Current times of PLC LINK polling cycle ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
Number of slave units linked to EASY PLC
D1433* ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
LINK
D1434* Data length to be read on Slave ID#1 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1435* Data length to be read on Slave ID#2 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1436* Data length to be read on Slave ID#3 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1437* Data length to be read on Slave ID#4 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1438* Data length to be read on Slave ID#5 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1439* Data length to be read on Slave ID#6 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1440* Data length to be read on Slave ID#7 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1441* Data length to be read on Slave ID#8 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1442* Data length to be read on Slave ID#9 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1443* Data length to be read on Slave ID#10 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1444* Data length to be read on Slave ID#11 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1445* Data length to be read on Slave ID#12 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1446* Data length to be read on Slave ID#13 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1447* Data length to be read on Slave ID#14 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1448* Data length to be read on Slave ID#15 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1449* Data length to be read on Slave ID#16 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1450* Data length to be written on Slave ID#1 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1451* Data length to be written on Slave ID#2 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1452* Data length to be written on Slave ID#3 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1453* Data length to be written on Slave ID#4 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1454* Data length to be written on Slave ID#5 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1455* Data length to be written on Slave ID#6 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1456* Data length to be written on Slave ID#7 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1457* Data length to be written on Slave ID#8 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1458* Data length to be written on Slave ID#9 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1459* Data length to be written on Slave ID#10 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1460* Data length to be written on Slave ID#11 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1461* Data length to be written on Slave ID#12 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1462* Data length to be written on Slave ID#13 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1463* Data length to be written on Slave ID#14 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1464* Data length to be written on Slave ID#15 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
D1465* Data length to be written on Slave ID#16 ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
The data which is read from slave ID#1 in
the PLC LINK at the time when M1353 is ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1480*
OFF
↓
The initial data register where the data read
D1495*
from slave ID#1~ID#16 in the PLC LINK is ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R YES 0
stored at the time when M1353 is ON
The data which is written into slave ID#1 in
the PLC LINK at the time when M1353 is ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1496* OFF
↓ The initial data register where the data
D1511* written into slave ID#1~ID#16 in the PLC
○ ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
LINK is stored at the time when M1353 is
ON

2-38
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Content SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
D EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
D1512*
The data which is read from slave ID#2 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1527*
D1528*
The data which is written into slave ID#2 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1543*
D1544*
The data which is read from slave ID#3 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1559*
D1560*
The data which is written into slave ID#3 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1575*
D1576*
The data which is read from slave ID#4 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1591*
D1592*
The data which is written into slave ID#4 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1607*
D1608*
The data which is read from slave ID#5 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1623*
D1624*
The data which is written into slave ID#5 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1639*
D1640*
The data which is read from slave ID#6 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1655*
D1656*
The data which is written into slave ID#6 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1671*
D1672*
The data which is read from slave ID#7 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1687*
D1688*
The data which is written into slave ID#7 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1703*
D1704*
The data which is read from slave ID#8 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1719*
D1720*
The data which is written into slave ID#8 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1735*
D1736*
The data which is read from slave ID#9 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1751*
D1752*
The data which is written into slave ID#9 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1767*
D1768*
The data which is read from slave ID#10 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1783*
D1784*
The data which is written into slave ID#10
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
in the PLC LINK
D1799*
D1800*
The data which is read from slave ID#11 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1815*
D1816*
The data which is written into slave ID#11
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
in the PLC LINK
D1831*
D1832*
The data which is read from slave ID#12 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1847*
D1848*
The data which is written into slave ID#12
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
in the PLC LINK
D1863*

2-39
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Content SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
D EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
D1864*
The data which is read from slave ID#13 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1879*
D1880*
The data which is written into slave ID#13
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
in the PLC LINK
D1895*
D1896*
The data which is read from slave ID#14 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1911*
Specify the station number of Slaves for
D1900* PLC-Link when M1356 is ON. Consecutive
↓ station numbers set by D1399 will be ○ ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO
D1931* invalid in this case. Note that the registers
are latched only when M1356 is ON.
D1912*
The data which is written into slave ID#14
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
in the PLC LINK
D1927*
D1928*
The data which is read from slave ID#15 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1943*
D1944*
The data which is written into slave ID#15
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
in the PLC LINK
D1959*
D1960*
The data which is read from slave ID#16 in
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the PLC LINK
D1975*
D1976*
The data which is written into slave ID#16
↓ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
in the PLC LINK
D1991*
Remaining times for PLC password setting
D1994 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0
on DVP-PCC01
Data length for PLC ID Setting on DVP-
D1995 ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
PCC01
1st Word of PLC ID Setting for DVP-PCC01
D1996 (Indicated by Hex format corresponding to ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
ASCII codes)
2nd Word of PLC ID Setting for DVP-PCC01
D1997 (Indicated by Hex format corresponding to ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
ASCII codes)
3rd Word of PLC ID Setting for DVP-PCC01
D1998 (Indicated by Hex format corresponding to ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
ASCII codes)
4th word of PLC ID Setting for DVP-PCC01
D1999 (Indicated by Hex format corresponding to ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
ASCII codes)
Axis number that has error during
D6000 V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
CANopen communication on Delta Servo
Error code of CANopen communication on
D6001 V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
Delta Servo
Record the STEP that error occurs
D6002 duringCANopen communication on Delta V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
Servo
The PR command of the Delta CANopen
D6008 V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
communication axis 1 from the Delta servo
PR command of the Delta CANopen
D6009 communication axis 2 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
PR command of the Delta CANopen
D6010 communication axis 3 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
PR command of the Delta CANopen
D6011 communication axis 4 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
PR command of the Delta CANopen
D6012 communication axis 5 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
PR command of the Delta CANopen
D6013 communication axis 6 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
PR command of the Delta CANopen
D6014 communication axis 7 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

2-40
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Content SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
D EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
PR command of the Delta CANopen
D6015 communication axis 8 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
Alarm code of the Delta CANopen
D6016 communication axis 1 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
Alarm code of the Delta CANopen
D6017 communication axis 2 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
Alarm code of the Delta CANopen
D6018 communication axis 3 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
Alarm code of the Delta CANopen
D6019 communication axis 4 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
Alarm code of the Delta CANopen
D6020 communication axis 5 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
Alarm code of the Delta CANopen
D6021 communication axis 6 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
Alarm code of the Delta CANopen
D6022 communication axis 7 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
Alarm code of the Delta CANopen
D6023 communication axis 8 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
The DO state of the Delta CANopen
D6024 communication axis 1 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
The DO state of the Delta CANopen
D6025 communication axis 2 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
The DO state of the Delta CANopen
D6026 communication axis 3 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
The DO state of the Delta CANopen
D6027 communication axis 4 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
The DO state of the Delta CANopen
D6028 communication axis 5 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
The DO state of the Delta CANopen
D6029 communication axis 6 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
The DO state of the Delta CANopen
D6030 communication axis 7 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

The DO state of the Delta CANopen

D6031 V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
communication axis 8 from the Delta servo
Current position of the Delta CANopen
D6032
communication axis 1 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D6033
(32-bit)
Current position of the Delta CANopen
D6034
communication axis 2 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D6035
(32-bit)
Current position of the Delta CANopen
D6036
communication axis 3 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D6037
(32-bit)
Current position of the Delta CANopen
D6038
communication axis 4 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D6039
(32-bit)
Current position of the Delta CANopen
D6040
communication axis 5 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D6041
(32-bit)
Current position of the Delta CANopen
D6042
communication axis 6 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D6043
(32-bit)
Current position of the Delta CANopen
D6044
communication axis 7 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D6045
(32-bit)
Current position of the Delta CANopen
D6046
communication axis 8 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D6047
(32-bit)
Target position of the Delta CANopen
D6048
communication axis 1 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D6049
(32-bit)
D6050 Target position of the Delta CANopen
V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D6051 communication axis 2 from the Delta servo

2-41
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

OFF STOP RUN

Special ES2 SA2 Latch
Content SS2 SX2    Attrib. Default
D EX2 SE -ed
ON RUN STOP
(32-bit)

Target position of the Delta CANopen

D6052
communication axis 3 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D6053
(32-bit)
Target position of the Delta CANopen
D6054
communication axis 4 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D6055
(32-bit)
Target position of the Delta CANopen
D6056
communication axis 5 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D6057
(32-bit)
Target position of the Delta CANopen
D6058
communication axis 6 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D6059
(32-bit)
Target position of the Delta CANopen
D6060
communication axis 7 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D6061
(32-bit)
Target position of the Delta CANopen
D6062
communication axis 8 from the Delta servo V2.8 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO
D6063
(32-bit)
They are for left-side special modules
D9800~
which are connected to an SA2/SX2/SE ╳ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W NO 0
D9879
series MPU.
They are for special modules connected to
an ES2/EX2 series MPU. (Please refer to
D9900~ DVP-PLC Operation Manual – Modules
○ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W NO 0
D9979 for more information)
They are for right-side special modules
connected to an SA2/SX2/SE series MPU.
CANopen status message code
D9980 ○ ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
(Only for DVP-ES2-C series MPUs)
(Only for DVP-ES2-C series MPUs)
D9981~
CANopen status message code in slave ○ ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D9996
station 1~slave station 16
Bit0~15 represent station 1~station 16. If a
bit is ON, an error occurs.
(It is only applicable to DVP-ES2-C series
MPUs. If DVP-ES2-C V3.24 (or above) is H’
D9998 ○ ╳ ╳ ╳ - - R NO 0
turned from OFF to ON, the value in D9998 FFFF
will be H’0. If DVP-ES2-C V3.26 (or above)
is turned from OFF to ON, the value in
D9998 will be H’FFFF.)
Showing the CAN baud rate
K1: 20K; K2: 50K; K3: 125K; K4: 250K; K5:
D9999 500K; K6: 1M V3.26 ╳ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
(It is only applicable to DVP-ES2-C V3.26
and above.)

2.14 E, F Index Registers

Index registers are used as modifiers to indicate a specified device (word, double word) by defining
an offset. Devices can be modified includes byte device (KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D) and bit
device (X, Y, M, S). E, F registers cannot be used for modifying constant (K, H) Index registers not
used as a modifier can be used as general purpose register.
Index register [E], [F]
Index registers are 16-bit registers which can be read and written. There are 16 points indicated as
E0~E7 and F0~F7. If you need a 32-bit register, you have to designate E. In this case, F will be
covered up by E and cannot be used. It is recommended to use instruction DMOVP K0 E to reset E
(including F) at power-on.
16-bit 16-bit
F0 E0

32-bit
F0 E0
High word Low word

2-42
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

The combinations of E and F when designating a 32-bit register are:

(E0, F0) , (E1, F1) (E2, F2) (E3, F3) (E4, F4) , (E5, F5) (E6, F6) (E7, F7)
Example:
When X0 = ON and E0 = 8, F0 = 14, D5E0 = D(5+8) = D13, D10F0 = D(10+14) = D24, the content
in D13 will be moved to D24.
X0
MOV K8 E0

MOV K14 F0

MOV D5E0 D10F0

2.15 Nest Level Pointer[N], Pointer[P], Interrupt Pointer [I]

The control point of
N Master control nested N0~N7, 8 points
master control nested
Pointer
The location point of CJ,
P For CJ, CALL instructions P0~P255, 256 points
CALL
I000/I001(X0),
I100/I101(X1),
I200/I201(X2),
I300/I301(X3),
I400/I401(X4),
External interrupt I500/I501(X5),
I600/I601(X6),
I700/I701(X7), 8 points
(01, rising-edge trigger
, 00, falling-edge
trigger )
For interrupt

I602/I699, I702/I799, 2
points (Timer resolution=1 The location point of
Pointer I
ms), I805/I899, 1 point interrupt subroutine.
(Timer resolution=0.1 ms)
Timer interrupt
(available for SE/ES2-E,
for other series, firmware
version should be V2.00
or later)
I010, I020, I030, I040,
High-speed counter
I050, I060, I070, I080, 8
interrupt
points
I140(COM1: RS232),
Communication I150(COM2: RS-485),
interrupt I160(COM3: RS-485), 3
points

Nest Level Pointer N: used with instruction MC and MCR. MC is master start instruction. When
the MC instruction is executed, the instructions between MC and MCR will be executed normally.
MC-MCR master control instruction is nested level structure and max. 8 levels can be applicable,
which is numbered from N0 to N7.
Pointer P: used with application instructions CJ, CALL, and SRET.
CJ condition jump:
When X0 = ON, program will jump from address 0 to N (designated label P1) and keep on the
execution. Instructions between 0 and N will be ignored.
When X0 = OFF, program will execute from 0 and keep on executing the followings. CJ instruction

2-43
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

won’t be executed at this time.

P**
X0
0 CJ P1

X1
Y1
X2
P1 N Y2

CALL subroutine, SRET subroutine END:

When X0 is ON, program will jump to P2 to execute the designated subroutine. When SRET
instruction is executed, it returns to address 24 to go on executing.
P**
X0
20 CALL P2 Call subroutine P**
X1
24 Y1

FEND

P2 Y0
(subroutine
P2) subroutine
Y1

SRET subroutine return

Interrupt pointer I: used with application instruction API 04 EI, API 05 DI, API 03 IRET. There are
four types of interruption pointers. To insert an interruption, users need to combine EI (enable
interruption), DI (disable interruption) and IRET (interruption return) instructions.

When the instruction EI is enabled, the PLC will check if there is any interrupt that need to be done
everytime an instruction is executed. If an interrupt is found, the PLC will stop executing the
instruction and execute the interrupt first. If no interrupt is found, the PLC will keep executing the
instruction. From the explanation, we can conclude that the maximum waiting time for an interrupt
to be executed is the execution time of an instruction.
Check interrupt Check interrupt

One instruction One instruction One instruction One instruction

EI executing time executing time executing time executing time

Interrupt occurred IRET

Interrupt
sub-routine

1. External interrupt
 When input signal of input terminal X0~X7 is triggered on rising-edge or falling-edge, it will
interrupt current program execution and jump to the designated interrupt subroutine pointer

2-44
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

I000/I001(X0), I100/I101(X1), I200/I201(X2), I300/I301(X3), I400/I401(X4), I500/I501(X5),

I600/I601(X6), I700/I701(X7). When IRET instruction is executed, program execution
returns to the address before interrupt occurs.
 When X0 (C243) works with I100/I101 (X1), X0/X1 (C246, C248, C252) works with
I400/I401, the value of C243, C246, C248, C252 will be stored in (D1240, D1241)
 When X2 (C244) works with I300/I301 (X3), X2/X3 (C250, C254) works with I500/I501, the
value of C244, C250, C254 will be stored in (D1242, D1243).
2. Timer interrupt
PLC automatically interrupts the currently executed program every a fixed period of time
(2ms~99ms or 0.5ms~9.9ms) and jumps to the execution of a designated interruption
subroutine
3. Counter interrupt
The high-speed counter comparison instruction API 53 DHSCS can designate that when the
comparison reaches the target, the currently executed program will be interrupted and jump to
the designated interruption subrountine executing the interruption pointers I010, I020, I030,
I040, I050 ,I060, I070, I080.
4. Communication interrupt
I140:
Communication instruction RS (COM1 RS-232) can be designated to send interrupt request
when specific charcters are received. Interrupt I140 and specific characters is set to low byte of
D1167.
This function can be adopted when the PLC receives data of different length during the
communication. Set up the specific end word in D1167 and write the interruption subroutine
I140. When PLC receives the end word, the program will execute I140.
I150:
Communication instruction RS (COM2 RS-485) can be designated to send interrupt request
when specific charcters are received. Interrupt I150 and specific characters is set to low byte of
D1168.
This function can be adopted when the PLC receives data of different length during the
communication. Set up the specific end word in D1168 and write the interruption subroutine
I150. When PLC receives the end word, the program will execute I150..
I160:
Communication instruction RS (COM3 RS-485) can be designated to send interrupt request
when specific charcters are received. Interrupt I160 and specific characters is set to low byte of
D1169
This function can be adopted when the PLC receives data of different length during the
communication. Set up the specific end word in D1169 and write the interruption subroutine
I160. When PLC receives the end word, the program will execute I160
2.16 Applications of Special M Relays and D Registers
Function Group PLC Operation Flag
Number M1000~M1003
Contents:
These relays provide information of PLC operation in RUN status.
M1000:
NO contact for monitoring PLC status. M1000 remains “ON” when PLC is running.
M1000
Y0 PLC is running

Normally ON contact
in PLC RUN status Keeps being ON

M1001:
NC contact for monitoring PLC status. M1001 remains “OFF” when PLC is running.
M1002:
Enables single positive pulse for the first scan when PLC RUN is activated. Used to initialize
registers, ouptuts, or counters when RUN is executed..
M1003:
Enables single negative pulse for the first scan when PLC RUN is activated. Used to initialize

2-45
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

registers, ouptuts, or counters when RUN is executed.

PLC RUN

M1000

M1001

M1002

M1003

scan time

Function Group Watchdog Timer (WDT)

Number D1000
Contents:
1. Monitor timer is used for moitoring PLC scan time. When the scan time exceeds the set value
(SV) in the monitor timer, the red ERROR LED will be ON and all outputs will be “OFF”.
2. The default in the monitor timer is 200ms. If the program is long or the operation is too
complicated, MOV instruction can be used to modify SV. See the example below for SV =
300ms.
M1002
0 MOV K300 D1000
Initial pulse
3. The maximum SV in the monitor timer is 32,767ms. However, care should be taken when
adjusting SV. If SV in D1000 is too big, it cost much longer for operation errors to be detected.
Therefore, SV is suggested to be shorter than 200ms.
4. Scan time could be prolonged due to complicated instruction operations or too many I/O
modules being connected. Check D1010 ~ D1012 to see if the scan time exceeds the SV in
D1000. Besides modifying the SV in D1000, users can also apply WDT instruction (API 07).
When program execution progresses to WDT instruction, the internal monitor timer will be reset
and therefore the scan time will not exceed the set value in the monitor timer.

Function Group Program Capacity

Number D1002
Contents:
This register holds the program capacity of the PLC.
SS2: 7,920 steps (Word)
ES2 / EX2 / SA2 / SX2 / SE series: 15,872 steps (Word)

Function Group Syntax Check

Number M1004, D1004, D1137
Contents:
1. When errors occur in syntax check, ERROR LED indicator will flash and special relay M1004 =
ON.
2. Timings for PLC syntax check:
a) When the power goes from “OFF” to “ON”.
b) When WPLSoft writes the program into PLC.
c) When on-line editing is being conducted on WPLSoft.
3. Errors might result from parameter error or grammar error. The error code of the error will be
placed in D1004. The address where the fault is located is saved in D1137. If the error belongs
to loop error it may not have an address associated with it. In this case the value in D1137 is
invalid.
4. For syntax error codes pease refer to section 6.2 Error Code table.

2-46
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

Function Group Watchdog Timer

Number M1008, D1008
Contents:
1. When the scan is time-out during execution, ERROR LED will be ON and M1008 = ON.
2. D1008 saves the STEP address where the timeout occurred

Function Group Scan Time Monitor

Number D1010~D1012
Contents:
The present value, minimum value and maximum value of scan time are stored in D1010 ~ D1012.
D1010: current scan time
D1011: minimum scan time
D1012: maximum scan time

Function Group Internal Clock Pulse

Number M1011~M1014
Contents:
1. PLC provides four different clock pulses to aid the application. When PLC is power-on, the four
clock pulses will start automatically.
10 ms

M1011 (10 ms) 100 Hz

100 ms

M1012 (100 ms) 10 Hz

1 sec

M1013 (1 sec) 1 Hz
1 min

M1014 (60 sec)

2. Clock pulse works even when PLC stops, i.e. activation of clock pulse is not synchronized with
PLC RUN execution.

Function Group High-speed Timer

Number M1015, D1015
Contents:
1. When M1015 = ON, high-speed timer D1015 will be activated when the current scan proceeds
to END instruction. The minimum resolution of D1015 is 100us.
2. The range of D1015 is 0~32,767. When it counts to 32,767, it will start from 0 again.
3. When M1015 = OFF, D1015 will stop timing immediately.
Example:
1. When X10 = ON, M1015 = ON to start high-speed timer and record the present value in D1015.
2. When X10 = OFF, M1015 = OFF. High-speed timer is disabled.
X10
M1015

Function Group M1016~M1017, D1313~D1319

Number Real Time Clock
Contents:
1. Special M and special D relevant to RTC
Device Name Function
OFF: display the last 2 digits of year in A.D
M1016 Year Display
ON: display the last 2 digits of year in A.D. plus 2,000
±30 seconds When triggered from “Off” to “On”, the correction is enabled.
M1017
correction 0 ~ 29 second: minute intact; second reset to 0

2-47
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

30~ 59 second: mimute + 1; second reset to 0

D1313 Second 0~59
D1314 Minute 0~59
D1315 Hour 0~23
D1316 Day 1~31
D1317 Month 1~12
D1318 Week 1~7
D1319 Year 0 ~ 99 (last 2 digits of Year in A.D.)
2. If set value for RTC is invalid. RTC will display the time as Second→0, Minute→0, Hour→0,
Day→1, Month→1, Week→1, Year→0.
3. Only when power is on can RTCs of SS2 series perform the fuction of timing. Memory of RTC
is latched. RTC will resume the time when power is down. For higher accuracy of RTC, please
conduction calibratoin on RTC when power resumes.
4. RTCs of SA2/SE V1.0 and ES2/EX2/SX2 V2.0 series can still operate for one or two weeks
after the power is off (they vary with the ambient temperature). Therefore, if the machine has
not operated since one or two weeks ago, please reset RTC.
5. Methods of modifying RTC:
a) Apply TWR instruction to modify the built-in real time clock. Please refer to TWR instruction
for detail.
b) Use peripheral devices or WPLSoft to set the RTC value.

Function Group π (PI)

Number D1018~D1019
Contents:
1. D1018 and D1019 are combined as 32-bit data register for storing the floating point value ofπ
2. Floating point value = H 40490FDB

Function Group Adjustment on Input Terminal Response Time

Number D1020, D1021
Contents:
1. D1020 can be used for setting up the response time of receiving pulses at X0 ~X7 for ES2
series MPU. Default: 10ms, 0~20ms adjustable.
2. D1021 can be used for setting up the response time of receiving pulses at X10~X17 X7 for
28SS2 V3.42 /28SA2 V3.0 /26SE with firmware V2.0 or later versions. Default: 10ms, 0~20ms
adjustable.
3. When the power of PLC goes from “OFF” to “ON”, the content of D1020 is set to 10
automatically.
Terminal response time
0
X0 0ms
1
1ms
Set by D1020
(default: 10)
Update input
10 status
X7 10ms
15
15ms Status
memory
4. If the following programs are executed, the response time of X0 ~ X7 will be set to 0ms.
However, the fastest response time of input terminals will be 50μs due to that all terminals are
connected with RC filters..
M1000
MOV K0 D1020

normally ON contact
5. It is not necessary to adjust response time when using high-speed counters or interrupts

2-48
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

6. Using API 51 REFF instruction has the same effect as modifying D1020 and D1021.

Function Group X6 pulse width detecting function

Number M1083,M1084, D1023
Contents:
When M1084 = ON, X6 pulse width detecting function is enabled and the detected pulse width is
stored in D1023 (unit: 0.1ms)
M1083 On：detecting width of negative half cycle (OFFON)
M1083 Off：detecting width of positive half cycle (ONOFF)

Function Group Communication Error Code

Number M1025, D1025
Contents:
In the connection between PLC and PC/HMI, M1025 will be ON when PLC receives illegal
communication request during the data transmission process. The error code will be stored in
D1025.
01: illegal instruction code
02: illegal device address.
03: requested data exceeds the range.
07: checksum error

Function Group Pulse output Mark and Mask function

M1108, M1110, M1156, M1157, M1158, M1538, M1159, M1540, D1026,
Number
D1027, D1135, D1136, D1232, D1233, D1234, D1235, D1348, D1349
Contents:
Please refer to explanations of API 59 PLSR / API 158 DDRVI / API 197 DCLLM instructions.

Function Group Execution Completed Flag

Number M1029, M1030, M1102, M1103
Contents:
Execution Completed Flag:
MTR, HKY, DSW, SEGL, PR:
M1029 = ON for a scan cycle whenever the above instructions complete the execution.
PLSY, PLSR:
1. M1029 = ON when Y0 pulse output completes.
2. M1030 = ON when Y1 pulse output completes
3. M1102 = ON when Y2 pulse output completes.
4. M1103 = ON when Y3 pulse output completes.
5. When PLSY, PLSR instruction are OFF, M1029, M1030, M1102, M1103 will be OFF as well.
When pulse output instructions executes again, M1029, M1030, M1102, M1103 will be OFF
and turn ON when execution completes.
6. Users have to clear M1029 and M1030 manually.
INCD:
M1029 will be “ON” for a scan period when the assigned groups of data comparison is completed
RAMP, SORT:
1. M1029= ON when instruction is completed. M1029 must be cleared by user manually.
2. If this instruction is OFF, M1029 will be OFF.
DABSR:
1. M1029= ON when instruction is completed.
2. When the instruction is re-executed for the next time, M1029 will turn off first then ON again
when the instruction is completed
ZRN, DRVI, DRVA:
1. M1029 will be “ON” after Y0 and Y1 pulse output is completed. M1102 will be “ON” after Y2
and Y3 pulse output is compeleted.
2. When the instruction is re-executed for the next time, M1029 / M1102 will turn off first then ON
again when the instruction is completed.

2-49
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Function Group Clear Instruction

Number M1031, M1032
Contents:
M1031 (clear non-latched memory), M1032 (clear latched memory)
Device Devices will be cleared
M1031 Contact status of Y, general-purpose M and general-purpose S
Clear non-latched area  General-purpose contact and timing coil of T
 General-purpose contact, counting coil reset coil of C
 General-purpose present value register of D
 General-purpose present value register of T
 General-purpose present value register of C
M1032 Contact status of M and S for latched
Clear latched area  Contact and timing coil of accumulative timer T
 Contact and timing coil of high-speed counter C for latched
 Present value register of D for latched
 Present value register of accumulative timer T
 Present value register of high-speed counter C for latched
Function Group Output State Latched in STOP mode
Number M1033
Contents:
When M1033 = ON, PLC outputs will be latched when PLC is switched from RUN to STOP.

Function Group Disabling all Y outputs

Number M1034
Contents:
When M1034 = ON, all outputs will turn off.

Function Group RUN/STOP Switch

Number M1035
Contents:
When M1035 = ON, PLC uses input point X7 as the switch of RUN/STOP.

Function Group COM Port Function

Port
COM1 COM2 COM3
Item
Number Communication format D1036 D1120 D1109
Communication setting holding M1138 M1120 M1136
ASCII/RTU mode M1139 M1143 M1320
Slave communication address D1121 D1255

Contents:
COM ports (COM1: RS-232, COM2: RS-485, COM3: RS-485) support communication format of
MODBUS ASCII/RTU modes. When RTU format is selected, the data length should be set as 8.
COM2 and COM3 support transmission speed up to 921kbps. COM1, COM2 and COM3 can be
used at the same time.
COM1:
Can be used in master or slave mode. Supports ASCII/RTU communication format, baudrate
(115200bps max), and modification on data length (data bits, parity bits, stop bits). D1036: COM1
(RS-232) communication protocol of master/slave PLC. (b8 - b15 are not used) Please refer to
table below for setting.
COM2:
Can be used in master or slave mode. Supports ASCII/RTU communication format, baudrate
(921kbps max), and modification on data length (data bits, parity bits, stop bits). D1120: COM2
(RS-485) communication protocol of master/slave PLC. Please refer to table below for setting.
COM3:

2-50
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

Can be used in master or slave mode. Supports ASCII/RTU communication format, baudrate
(921kbps max), and modification on data length (data bits, parity bits, stop bits). D1109: COM3
(RS-485) communication protocol of master/slave PLC. (b8 - b15 are not used) Please refer to
table below for setting.

Content
0: 7 data bits, 1: 8 data bits
b0 Data Length
(RTU supports 8 data bits only)
00: None
b1
Parity bit 01: Odd
b2
11: Even
b3 Stop bits 0: 1 bit, 1: 2bits
b4 0001(H1): 110
b5 0010(H2): 150
b6 0011(H3): 300
b7 0100(H4): 600
0101(H5): 1200
0110(H6): 2400
0111(H7): 4800
1000(H8): 9600
Baud rate 1001(H9): 19200
1010(HA): 38400
1011(HB): 57600
1100(HC): 115200
500000 (COM2 /
1101(HD):
COM3)
31250 (COM2 /
1110(HE):
COM3)
921000 (COM2 /
1111(HF):
COM3)
b8 Select start bit 0: None 1: D1124
b9 Select the 1st end bit 0: None 1: D1125
b10 Select the 2nd end bit 0: None 1: D1126
b11~b15 Undefined

Example 1: Modifying COM1 communication format

1. Add the below instructions on top of the program to modify the communication format of COM1.
When PLC switches from STOP to RUN, the program will detect whether M1138 is ON in the
first scan. If M1138 is ON, the program will modify the communication settings of COM1
according to the value set in D1036
2. Modify COM1 communication format to ASCII mode, 9600bps, 7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop
bits (9600, 7, E, 1).
M1002
MOV H86 D1036

SET M1138

Example 2: Modiying COM2 communication format

1. Add the below instructions on top of the program to modify the communication format of COM2.
When PLC switches from STOP to RUN, the program will detect whether M1120 is ON in the
first scan. If M1120 is ON, the program will modify the communication settings of COM2
according to the value set in D1120
2. Modify COM2 communication format to ASCII mode, 9600bps, 7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop
bits (9600, 7, E, 1)

2-51
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

M1002
MOV H86 D1120

SET M1120

Example 3: Modifying COM3 communication format

1. Add the below instructions on top of the program to modify the communication format of
COM3. When PLC switches from STOP to RUN, the program will detect whether M1136 is
ON in the first scan. If M1136 is ON, the program will modify the communication settings of
COM3 according to the value set in D1109
2. Modify COM3 communication format to ASCII mode, 9600bps, 7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop
bits (9600, 7, E, 1).
M1002
MOV H86 D1109

SET M1136

Example 4: RTU mode setting of COM1、COM2、COM3

1. COM1, COM2 and COM3 support ASCII/RTU mode. COM1 is set by M1139, COM2 is set by
M1143 and COM3 is set by M1320. Set the flags ON to enable RTU mode or OFF to enable
ASCII mode.
2. Modify COM1/COM2/COM3 communication format to RTU mode, 9600bps, 8 data bits, even
parity, 1 stop bits (9600, 8, E, 1).
COM1:
M1002
MOV H87 D1036

SET M1138

SET M1139

COM2:
M1002
MOV H87 D1120

SET M1120

SET M1143

COM3:
M1002
MOV H87 D1109

SET M1136

SET M1320

Note:
1. The modified communication format will not be changed when PLC state turns from RUN to
STOP.

2-52
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

2. If the PLC is powered OFF then ON again in STOP status, the modified communication format
on COM1~COM3 will be reset to default communication format (9600, 7, E, 1).

Definitions of the pins in COM1: (It is suggested that users should use the Delta communication
cable DVPACAB2A30.)
CN1 3000 ± 50 CN2

31. 0
3 CN1
1 6
4 7
2 8 Unit: mm
5
PC/HMI COM PLC COM1
9 PI N D-S UB female 8 PIN MINI DI N
Tx 3 4 Rx 2 1
Rx 2 5 Tx 5 4 3
GND 5 8 GND 8 6
1 7 1,2 5V 7
4 8
6

Function Group Enable SPD function

Number M1037, D1037
Contents:
1. M1037 and D1037 can be used to enable 8 sets of SPD instructions. When M1037 is ON, 8
sets of SPD instructions will be enabled. When M1037 is OFF, the function will be disabled.
2. The detected speed will be stored in the registers designated by D1037, e.g. if D1037 = K100,
the user has to set up the value in D100, indicating the interval for capturing the speed value
(unit: ms). In addition, the captured speed value will be stored in D101 ~ D108 in order.
※ When the function is enabled, C235~C242 will be occupied and unavailable in PLC
execution process program.

M1002
ZRST C235 C242

MOV K100 D1037

MOV K1000 D100

M1
M1037
M1000
PLSY K10000 K0 Y0
M1000
PLSY K9000 K0 Y1
M1000
PLSY K8000 K0 Y2
M1000
PLSY K7000 K0 Y3

END

2-53
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Function Group Communication Response Delay

Number D1038
Contents:
1. Data response delay time can be set when PLC is a Slave in COM2, COM3 RS-485
communication. Unit: 0.1ms. 0~10,000 adjustable.
2. By using PLC-Link, D1038 can be set to send next communication data with delay. Unit: 1 scan
cycle. 0~10,000 adjustable

Function Group Fixed scan time

Number M1039, D1039
Contents:
1. When M1039 is ON, program scan time is determined by D1039. When program execution is
completed, next scan will be activated only when the fixed scan time is reached. If D1039 is
less than actual scan time, it will scan by the actual program scan time.
M1000
M1039 Fix scan time

normally ON
contact MOV P K20 D1039

Scan time is fixed to 20ms

2. Instructions related to scan time, RAMP, HKY, SEGL, ARWS and PR should be used with
“fixed scan time” or “timed interrupt”.
3. Particularly for instruction HKY, which is applied for 16-keys input operated by 4x4 matrix,
scan time should be set to 20ms or above.
4. Scan time displayed in D1010~D1012 also includes fixed scan time.

Function Group Analog Function built in the PLC

Number D1062, D1110~D1118
Contents:
1. The function is for EX2/SX2 Only
2. Resolution of AD (analog input) channels: 12 bits for 20EX2 and 20SX2; 16 bits for the
voltage/current mode of 30EX2; 0.1 ℃ for the temperature mode of 30EX2
3. The analog input signals and their corresponding digital values:
Model
20EX2/SX2 30EX2
Mode
-10 V~+10 V -2000~+2000 -32000~+32000
Voltage -5 V~+5 V Not support -32000~+32000
+1 V~+5 V Not support +0~+32000
-20 mA~+20 mA -2000~+2000 -32000~+32000
Current
+4 mA~+20 mA +0~+2000 +0~+32000
PT100/PT1000
Not support -1800~+8000
-180 ℃~
Temperature
NI100/NI1000
Not support -800~+1700
-80 ℃

4. Resolution of DA (analog output) channels: 12 bits

5. The analog output signals and their corresponding digital values:
Model
20EX2/SX2 30EX2
Mode
Voltage -10 V~+10 V -2000~+2000 -32000~+32000
Current +0 mA~+20 mA +0~+4000 +0~+32000
+4 mA~+20 mA +0~+4000 +0~+32000

2-54
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

6. The descriptions of the special data registers for the analog functions:
Device Function
Average number of times analog input signals are input through CH0~CH3 of
20EX2/SX2: 1~20, Default = K2
D1062
Average number of times analog input signals are input through CH0~CH2 of
30EX2: 1~15, Default = K2
D1110 Average value of EX2/SX2 analog input channel 0 (AD 0)
D1111 Average value of EX2/SX2 analog input channel 1 (AD 1)
D1112 Average value of EX2/SX2 analog input channel 2 (AD 2)
Average value of 20EX2/SX2 analog input channel 3 (AD 3)
If D1062 is ON, the average value is the current value.
D1113
Displaying the status of the analog input channel of 30EX2
Please see the explanation below for more information.
Enable/disable 20EX2/SX2 AD channels
(0: enable (default) / 1: disable)
D1114
bit0~bit3 sets AD0~AD3.
30EX2 does not support this function.
D1116 Output value of analog output channel 0 (DA 0) of EX2/SX2
Output value of analog output channel 1 (DA 1) of 20EX2/SX2
D1117
30EX2 does not support this function.
For EX2/SX2 series, sampling time of analog/digital conversion. Sampling
D1118
time will be regarded as 2ms If D1118≦2.

The description of D1113 for 30EX2:

Bit15~12 Bit11~8 Bit7~4 Bit3~0
Status of the analog Status of the analog Status of the analog
Reserved
input channel (AD2) input channel (AD1) input channel (AD0)

The status of the analog input channel of 30EX2:

Status 0x0 0x1 0x2
The analog input exceeds the The temperature sensor is
Description Normal
upper/lower limit. disconnected.

The upper/lower limit values for the analog input mode of 30EX2:
Analog input mode Upper limit value Lower limit value
-10~+10 V
+32384 -32384
Voltage -5V~+5 V
+1 V~+5 V +32384 -384
-20 mA~+20 mA +32384 -32384
Current
+4 mA~+20 mA +32384 -384
PT100/PT1000 +8100 -1900
Temperature
NI100/NI1000 +1800 -900

Device
Function
number
20EX2/SX2 analog input/output mode setting (Default=H’0)
bit0~bit5: Selection between the voltage/current mode (0: Voltage; 1: Current;
Default: Voltage)
bit0~bit3: Analog inputs (AD0~AD3)
D1115 bit4~bit5: Analog outputs (DA0~DA1)
bit8~bit 13: Current mode
bit8~bit11: AD0~AD3 (0: -20 mA~20 mA; 1: 4~20 mA)
bit12~bit13: DA0~DA1 (0: 0~20 mA; 1: 4~20 mA)
30EX2 analog input/output mode setting (Default=H’FFFF)

2-55
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

The description of D1115 for 30EX2:

Bit15~12 Bit11~8 Bit7~4 Bit3~0
Analog output mode Analog input mode Analog input mode Analog input mode
of DA0 of AD2 of AD1 of AD0

The analog input modes for 30EX2:

Code 0x0 0x1 0x2 0x3
Three-wire Two-wire
Description Two-wire PT100 Two-wire NI1000
NI100 PT1000
Code 0x4 0x5 0x6 0x7
Three-wire Three-wire Three-wire Three-wire
Description
PT100 NI100 PT1000 NI1000
Code 0x8 0x9 0xA 0xB
Voltage: Voltage: Voltage: Current:
Description
-10 V~+10 V -5 V~+5 V +1 V~+5 V -20 mA~+20 mA
Code 0xC 0xD 0xE 0xF
Current:
Description Reserved Unused
+4 mA~+20 mA

The analog output modes for 30EX2:

Code 0x0 0x1 0x2 0xF
Voltage: Current: Current:
Description Unused
-10 V~+10 V +0 mA~+20 mA +4 mA~+20 mA

The example of setting D1115 for 30EX2:

If the analog input mode of AD0 is the two-wire NI100, the analog input mode of AD1 is the
three-wire 1000, the analog input mode of AD2 is the voltage mode (+1 V~ +5 V), and the
analog output mode of DA0 is the current mode (+4 mA ~ +20 mA), the setting value in D1115
is H’2A61.

Function Group Enable 2-speed output function of DDRVI/DDRVA instruction

Number M1119
Contents:
When M1119 is ON, 2-speed output function of DDRVI/DDRVA will be enabled.
Example: Assume that D0 (D1) is the first speed and D2(D3) is the second speed. D10(D11) is the
output pulse number of the first speed and D12(D13) is the output pulse number of the second
speed.

2-56
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

M0
DMOV K100000 D0
M1
DMOV K50000 D2
M2
DMOV K100000 D10
M3
DMOV K50000 D12

DMOV K0 D1030

DMOV K0 D1336
M0
SET M1119
M1

M0
DDRVI D10 D0 Y0 Y1
M1029
S0

M1
DDRVI D10 D0 Y2 Y3
M1102
S1

END

Vbase T1 T2+T3 P(1) V(1) P(2) V(2)

Position of The
Initial Ramp-up Ramp- Position of the The first
the second second
frequency time down time first speed speed
speed speed

2-57
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Function Group Program Execution Error

Number M1067~M1068, D1067~D1068
Contents:
Device Explanation Latched STOP→RUN RUN→STOP
M1067 Program execution error None Clear Unchanged
M1068 Execution error locked None Unchanged Unchanged
D1067 Error code for program execution None Clear Unchanged
Address of program execution
D1068 None Unchanged Unchanged
error

Error code explanation:

D1067 error code Function
0E18 BCD conversion error
0E19 Divisor is 0
0E1A Use of device exceeds the range (including E, F index register modification)
0E1B Square root value is negative
0E1C FROM/TO instruction communication error

Function Group I/O Modules Detection

Number D1140, D1142, D1143, D1145
Contents:
D1140: Number of right-side modules (AIO, PT, TC, etc.), max. 8 modules can be connected.
D1142: Number of input points (X) on DIO modules.
D1143: Number of output points (Y) on DIO modules.
D1145: Number of left-side modules (AIO, PT, TC, etc.), max. 8 modules can be connected.
(Only applicable for SA2/SX2/SE).

Function Group Reverse Interrupt Trigger Pulse Direction

Number M1280, M1284, M1286
Contents:
1. The falgs should be used with EI instruction and should be inserted before EI instruction
2. The default setting of interrupt I101 (X0) is rising-edge triggered. If M1280 is ON and EI
instruction is executed, PLC will reverse the trigger direction as falling-edge triggered. The
trigger pulse direction of X1 will be set as rising-edge again by resetting M1280.
3. When M0 = OFF, M1280 = OFF. X0 external interrupt will be triggered by rising-edge pulse.
4. When M0 = ON, M1280 = ON. X0 external interrupt will be triggered by falling-edge pulse.
Users do not have to change I101 to I000.
M0
OUT M1280

EI

FEND
M1000
I001 INC D0

IRET

END

Function Group Stores Value of High-speed Counter when Interrupt Occurs

Number D1240~D1243
Contents:
1. If extertal interrupts are applied on input points for Reset, the interrupt instructions have the
priority in using the input points. In addition, PLC will move the current data in the counters to
the associated data registers below then reset the counters.

2-58
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

Special D D1241, D1240 D1243, D1242

Counter C243 C246 C248 C252 C244 C250 C254
Interrupt signal X1(I100/I101) X4(I400/I401) X3(I300/I301) X5(I500/I501)
2. Function:
a) When X0 (counter input) and X1 (external Interrupt) correspondingly work together with
C243, and I100/I101, PLC will move the count value to D1241 and D1240.
b) When X0 (counter input) and X4 (external Interrupt) correspondingly work together with
C246, C248, C252 and I400/I401, PLC will move the count value to D1241 and D1240
c) When X2 (counter input) and X3 (external Interrupt) correspondingly work together with
C244, and I300/I301, PLC will move the count value to D1243 and D1242.
d) When X2 (counter input) and X5 (external Interrupt) correspondingly work together with
C250, C254 and I500/I501, PLC will move the count value to D1243 and D1242.
Example:

EI
M1000
DCNT C243 K100

FEND
M1000
I101 DMOV D1240 D0

IRET

END

When external interrupt (X1, I101) occurs during counting process of C243, the count value in
C243 will be stored in (D1241, D1240) and C243 is reset. After this, the interrupt subroutine I101
will be executed

Function Group Enabling force-ON/OFF of input point X

Number M1304
Contents:
When M1304 = ON, WPLSoft or ISPSoft can set ON/OFF of input pont X, but the associated
hardware LED will not respond to it.

Function Group Output specified pulses or seek Z phase signal when zero point is achieved.
Number M1308, D1312
Contents:
When zero point is achieved, PLC can output specified pulses or seek Z phase signal by this
function. Input terminals X2, X3 are the Z-phase signal input point of CH1, CH2. When M1308= ON,
D1312 is the setting register to specify the additional pulses within the range -30,000~30,000.
Specified value exceeds the range will be changed as the max/min value automatically. When
D1312 is set to 0, the additional pulses output function will be disabled.
Functions of other input terminals:
X4 → CH1 DOG signal input X6 → CH2 DOG signal input
X5 → CH1 LSN signal input X7 → CH2 LSN signal input

Function Group ID of right side modules on ES2/EX2/SS2/SA2/SX2/SE

Number D1320~ D1327
Contents:
When right side modules are connected on ES2/EX2, the ID of each I/O module will be stored in
D1320~D1327 in connection order.
ID of each special module:
Name ID (HEX) Name ID (HEX)
DVP04AD-E2 H’0080 DVP06XA-E2 H’00C4
DVP02DA-E2 H’0041 DVP04PT-E2 H’0082
DVP04DA-E2 H’0081 DVP04TC-E2 H’0083

2-59
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Function Group ID of left side modules on SA2/SX2/SE

Number D1386~D1393
Contents:
When left side modules are connected on SA2/SX2/SE, the ID of each I/O module will be stored in
D1386~D1393 in connection order.
ID of each special module:
Name ID (HEX) Name ID (HEX)
DVP04AD-SL H’4480 DVP01HC-SL H’4120
DVP04DA-SL H’4441 DVP02HC-SL H’4220
DVP04PT-SL H’4402 DVPDNET-SL H’4131
DVP04TC-SL H’4403 DVPEN01-SL H’4050
DVP06XA-SL H’6404 DVPMDM-SL H’4040
DVP01PU-SL H’4110 DVPCOPM-SL H’4133

Function Group Mapping function of SA2/SX2/SE for left-side high-speed special modules
Number M1182, D9800~D9879
Contents:
The default value of M1182 in SA2 version 2.42/SX2 version 2.20 and below is Off. When M1182 is
Off, the mapping function is enabled.
The default value of M1182 in SA2 version 2.60/SX2 version 2.40 and above/SE is On. When
M1182 is On, the mapping function is disabled.
Example:
If the modules connected to SA2 from left to right are 04DA-SL and 04AD-SL, and M1182 is Off,
D9810~D9813 will be assigned to 04DA-SL, and D9800~D9803 will be assigned to 04AD-SL.
Model name 04DA-SL 04AD-SL SA2
Channel 1 (Ch1) D9810 D9800
Channel 2 (Ch2) D9811 D9801
Channel 3 (Ch3) D9812 D9802
Channel 4 (Ch4) D9813 D9803

Function Group Mapping function for right-side high-speed special modules

Number M1183, D9900 ~ D9979
Contents:
The default value of M1183 in ES2/EX2 is Off. When M1183 is Off, the mapping function is enabled.
The default value of M1183 in SA2/SX2/SS2/SE is On. When M1183 is On, the mapping function is
disabled.
Example:
If the modules connected to ES2 from left to right are 04DA-E2 and 04AD-E2, and M1183 is Off,
D9900~D9901 will be assigned to 04DA-E2, and D9910~D991 will be assigned to 04AD-E2.
Model name ES2 04DA-E2 04AD-E2
Channel 1 (Ch1) D9900 D9910
Channel 2 (Ch2) D9901 D9911
Channel 3 (Ch3) D9902 D9912
Channel 4 (Ch4) D9903 D9913

Function Group Output clear signals when ZRN is completed

Number M1346
Contents:
When M1346 = ON, PLC will output clear signals when ZRN is completed. The clear signals to Y0,
Y1 will be sent by Y4 for 20ms, and the clear signals to Y2, Y3 will be sent by Y5 for 20ms.

Function Group PLC LINK

M1350-M1356, M1360-M1439, D1355-D1370, D1399, D1415-D1465, D1480-
Number
D1991
Contents:
1. PLC LINK supports COM2 (RS-485) with communication of up to 16 slaves and access of up
to 50 words. (DVP-12SE V1.6 and DVP-26SE V2.0 can connect to up to 32 slaves, and
read/write up to 100 words.)

2-60
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

2. Special D and special M corresponding to Slave ID1~ Slave ID8: (M1353 = OFF, access
available for only 16 words)
MASTER PLC
SLAVE ID 1 SLAVE ID 2 SLAVE ID 3 SLAVE ID 4 SLAVE ID 5 SLAVE ID 6 SLAVE ID 7 SLAVE ID 8
Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write
out in out in out in out in out in out in out in out in
Special D registers for storing the read/written 16 data (Auto-assigned)
D1480 D1496 D1512 D1528 D1544 D1560 D1576 D1592 D1608 D1624 D1640 D1656 D1672 D1688 D1704 D1720
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
D1495 D1511 D1527 D1543 D1559 D1575 D1591 D1607 D1623 D1639 D1655 D1671 D1687 D1703 D1719 D1735
Data length for accessing the Slave (Max 16 pieces of data, no access is performed when SV = 0)
D1434 D1450 D1435 D1451 D1436 D1452 D1437 D1453 D1438 D1454 D1439 D1455 D1440 D1456 D1441 D1457
Starting reference of the Slave to be accessed*
D1355 D1415 D1356 D1416 D1357 D1417 D1358 D1418 D1359 D1419 D1360 D1420 D1361 D1421 D1362 D1422
M1355 = ON, Slave status is user-defined. Set the linking status of Slave manually by M1360~M1367.
M1355 = OFF, Slave status is auto-detected. Linking status of Slave can be monitored by M1360~M1367
M1360 M1361 M1362 M1363 M1364 M1365 M1366 M1367
Data interchange status of Slaves.
M1376 M1377 M1378 M1379 M1380 M1381 M1382 M1383
Error flag for errors occurred when reading and writing (ON = normal; OFF = error)
M1392 M1393 M1394 M1395 M1396 M1397 M1398 M1399
“Reading completed” flag (turns “Off” whenever access of a Slave is completed)
M1408 M1409 M1410 M1411 M1412 M1413 M1414 M1415
“Writing completed” flag (turns “Off” whenever access of a Slave is completed)
M1424 M1425 M1426 M1427 M1428 M1429 M1430 M1431
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Slave PLC*
SLAVE ID 1 SLAVE ID 2 SLAVE ID 3 SLAVE ID 4 SLAVE ID 5 SLAVE ID 6 SLAVE ID 7 SLAVE ID 8
Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write
out in out in out in out in out in out in out in out in
D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215

3. Special D and special M corresponding to Slave ID9~ Slave ID16: (M1353 = OFF, access
available for only 16 words)
MASTER PLC
SLAVE ID 9 SLAVE ID 10 SLAVE ID 11 SLAVE ID 12 SLAVE ID 13 SLAVE ID 14 SLAVE ID 15 SLAVE ID 16
Read Write Read Write Read Write Reado Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write
out in out in out in ut in out in out in out in out in
Special D registers for storing the read/written 16 pieces of data (Auto-assigned)
D1736 D1752 D1768 D1784 D1800 D1816 D1832 D1848 D1864 D1880 D1896 D1912 D1928 D1944 D1960 D1976
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
D1751 D1767 D1783 D1799 D1815 D1831 D1847 D1863 D1879 D1895 D1911 D1927 D1943 D1959 D1975 D1991
Data length for accessing the Slave (Max 16 pieces of data, no access is performed when SV = 0)
D1442 D1458 D1443 D1459 D1444 D1460 D1445 D1461 D1446 D1462 D1447 D1463 D1448 D1464 D1449 D1465
Starting reference of the Slave to be accessed*
D1363 D1423 D1364 D1424 D1365 D1425 D1366 D1426 D1367 D1427 D1368 D1428 D1369 D1429 D1370 D1430
M1355 = ON, Slave status is user-defined. Set the linking status of Slave manually by M1368~M1375.
M1355 = OFF, Slave status is auto-detected. Linking status of Slave can be monitored by M1368~M1375
M1368 M1369 M1370 M1371 M1372 M1373 M1374 M1375
Data interchange status of Slaves
M1384 M1385 M1386 M1387 M1388 M1389 M1390 M1391
Access error flag (ON = normal; OFF = error)
M1400 M1401 M1402 M1403 M1404 M1405 M1406 M1407
“Reading completed” flag (turns “Off” whenever access of a Slave is completed)
M1416 M1417 M1418 M1419 M1420 M1421 M1422 M1423
“Writing completed” flag (turns “Off” whenever access of a Slave is completed)
M1432 M1433 M1434 M1435 M1436 M1437 M1438 M1439
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Slave PLC*
SLAVE ID 9 SLAVE ID 10 SLAVE ID 11 SLAVE ID 12 SLAVE ID 13 SLAVE ID 14 SLAVE ID 15 SLAVE ID 16
Read Write Read Write Read Write Reado Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write
out in out in out in ut in out in out in out in out in
D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215

2-61
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

4. Special D and special M corresponding to Slave ID1~ID8: (M1353 = ON, access available for
up to 50 words) (DVP-12SE V1.6 and DVP-26SE V2.0 supports 100 words at most.)
MASTER PLC
SLAVE ID 1 SLAVE ID 2 SLAVE ID 3 SLAVE ID 4 SLAVE ID 5 SLAVE ID 6 SLAVE ID 7 SLAVE ID 8
Read Write Read Write Read Write Reado Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write
out in out in out in ut in out in out in out in out in
M1353 = ON, enable access up to 50 words.
The user can specify the starting register for storing the read/written data in registers below.
D1480 D1496 D1481 D1497 D1482 D1498 D1483 D1499 D1484 D1500 D1485 D1501 D1486 D1502 D1487 D1503
M1356 = ON, the user can specify the station number of Slave ID1~ID8 in D1900~D1907
D1900 D1901 D1902 D1903 D1904 D1905 D1906 D1907
Data length for accessing the Slave (Max 50 pieces of data, no access is performed when SV = 0)
D1434 D1450 D1435 D1451 D1436 D1452 D1437 D1453 D1438 D1454 D1439 D1455 D1440 D1456 D1441 D1457
Starting reference of the Slave to be accessed*
D1355 D1415 D1356 D1416 D1357 D1417 D1358 D1418 D1359 D1419 D1360 D1420 D1361 D1421 D1362 D1422
M1355 = ON, Slave status is user-defined. Set the linking status of Slave manually by M1360~M1367.
M1355 = OFF, Slave status is auto-detected. Linking status of Slave can be monitored by M1360~M1367
M1360 M1361 M1362 M1363 M1364 M1365 M1366 M1367
Data interchange status of Slaves
M1376 M1377 M1378 M1379 M1380 M1381 M1382 M1383
Error flag for errors occurred when reading and writing (ON = normal; OFF = error)
M1392 M1393 M1394 M1395 M1396 M1397 M1398 M1399
“Reading completed” flag (turns “Off” whenever access of a Slave is completed)
M1408 M1409 M1410 M1411 M1412 M1413 M1414 M1415
“Writing completed” flag (turns “Off” whenever access of a Slave is completed)
M1424 M1425 M1426 M1427 M1428 M1429 M1430 M1431
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Slave PLC*
SLAVE ID 1 SLAVE ID 2 SLAVE ID 3 SLAVE ID 4 SLAVE ID 5 SLAVE ID 6 SLAVE ID 7 SLAVE ID 8
Read Write Read Write Read Write Reado Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write
out in out in out in ut in out in out in out in out in
D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215

5. Special D and special M corresponding to Slave ID9~ID16: (M1353 = ON, access available for
up to 50 words) (DVP-12SE V1.6 and DVP-26SE V2.0 supports 100 words at most.)
MASTER PLC
SLAVE ID 9 SLAVE ID 10SLAVE ID 11 SLAVE ID 12 SLAVE ID 13 SLAVE ID 14 SLAVE ID 15 SLAVE ID 16
Read Write Read Write Read Write Reado Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write
out in out in out in ut in out in out in out in out in
M1353 = ON, enable access up to 50 words.
The user can specify the starting register for storing the read/written data in registers below.
D1488 D1504 D1489 D1505 D1490 D1506 D1491 D1507 D1492 D1508 D1493 D1509 D1494 D1510 D1495 D1511
M1356 = ON, the user can specify the station number of Slave ID9~ID16 in D1908~D1915
D1908 D1909 D1910 D1911 D1912 D1913 D1914 D1915
Data length for accessing the Slave (Max 50 pieces of data, no access is performed when SV = 0)
D1442 D1458 D1443 D1459 D1444 D1460 D1445 D1461 D1446 D1462 D1447 D1463 D1448 D1464 D1449 D1465
Starting reference of the Slave to be accessed*
D1363 D1423 D1364 D1424 D1365 D1425 D1366 D1426 D1367 D1427 D1368 D1428 D1369 D1429 D1370 D1430
M1355 = ON, Slave status is user-defined. Set the linking status of Slave manually by M1368~M1375.
M1355 = OFF, Slave status is auto-detected. Linking status of Slave can be monitored by M1368~M1375
M1368 M1369 M1370 M1371 M1372 M1373 M1374 M1375
Data interchange status of Slaves
M1384 M1385 M1386 M1387 M1388 M1389 M1390 M1391
Access error flag (ON = normal; OFF = error)
M1400 M1401 M1402 M1403 M1404 M1405 M1406 M1407
“Reading completed” flag (turns “Off” whenever access of a Slave is completed)
M1416 M1417 M1418 M1419 M1420 M1421 M1422 M1423
“Writing completed” flag (turns “Off” whenever access of a Slave is completed)
M1432 M1433 M1434 M1435 M1436 M1437 M1438 M1439
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Slave PLC*
SLAVE ID 9 SLAVE ID 10 SLAVE ID 11 SLAVE ID 12 SLAVE ID 13 SLAVE ID 14 SLAVE ID 15 SLAVE ID 16
Read Write Read Write Read Write Reado Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write
out in out in out in ut in out in out in out in out in
D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200

2-62
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215

*Note:
 Default setting for starting reference of the Slave (DVP-PLC) to be read: H1064 (D100)
 Default setting for starting reference of the Slave (DVP-PLC) to be written: H10C8 (D200)

6. Special D and special M corresponding to Slave ID17~ID24: (M1353 = ON, access available
for up to 100 words) (Model supported: DVP-12SE V1.6 and DVP-26SE V2.0)
MASTER PLC
SLAVE ID 17 SLAVE ID 18 SLAVE ID 19 SLAVE ID 20 SLAVE ID 21 SLAVE ID 22 SLAVE ID 23 SLAVE ID 24
Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write
out in out in out in out in out in out in out in out in
DVP-SE supports M1353. When M1353 is On, 32 stations in the Link and the function of reading/writing more than 16 data
(SET M1353) are enabled. The user can specify the starting register for storing the read/written data in registers below.
D1576 D1592 D1577 D1593 D1578 D1594 D1579 D1595 D1580 D1596 D1581 D1597 D1582 D1598 D1583 D1599
If M1356 is ON, users can set the station numbers of slave ID17~ID24 in D1916~D1923. The master station sends
commands according to the station numbers set.
D1916 D1917 D1918 D1919 D1920 D1921 D1922 D1923
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data
D1544 D1560 D1545 D1561 D1546 D1562 D1547 D1563 D1548 D1564 D1549 D1565 D1550 D1566 D1551 D1567
Start Communication Address
D1512 D1528 D1513 D1529 D1514 D1530 D1515 D1531 D1516 D1532 D1517 D1533 D1518 D1534 D1519 D1535
LINK in SLAVE PLC?
M1440 M1441 M1442 M1443 M1444 M1445 M1446 M1447
Action flag for SLAVE PLC from MASTER PLC
M1456 M1457 M1458 M1459 M1460 M1461 M1462 M1463
“Read/write error” flag
M1472 M1473 M1474 M1475 M1476 M1477 M1478 M1479
“Reading completed” flag (turns “Off” whenever read/write a station is completed)
M1488 M1489 M1490 M1491 M1492 M1493 M1494 M1495
“Writing completed” flag (turns “Off” whenever read/write a station is completed)
M1504 M1505 M1506 M1507 M1508 M1509 M1510 M1511

SLAVE ID 17 SLAVE ID 18 SLAVE ID 29 SLAVE ID 20 SLAVE ID 21 SLAVE ID 22 SLAVE ID 23 SLAVE ID 24

Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write
out in out in out in out in out in out in out in out in
D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215

 Default start communication address D1512 ~ D1519 to be read = H1064 (D100)

 Default start communication address D1528 ~ D1535 to be written = H10C8 (D200)

7. Special D and special M corresponding to Slave ID25~ID32: (M1353 = ON, access available
for up to 100 words) (Mode supported: DVP-12SE V1.6 and DVP-26SE V2.0)
MASTER PLC
SLAVE ID 25 SLAVE ID 26 SLAVE ID 27 SLAVE ID 28 SLAVE ID 29 SLAVE ID 30 SLAVE ID 31 SLAVE ID 32
Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write
out in out in out in out in out in out in out in out in
DVP-SE supports M1353. When M1353 is On, 32 stations in the Link and the function of reading/writing more than 16 data
(SET M1353) are enabled. The user can specify the starting register for storing the read/written data in registers below.
D160
D1584 D1600 D1585 D1601 D1586 D1602 D1587 D1603 D1588 D1604 D1589 D1605 D1590 D1606 D1591
7
If M1356 is ON, users can set the station numbers of slave ID25~ID32 in D1924~D1931. The master station sends
commands according to the station numbers set.
D1924 D1925 D1926 D1927 D1928 D1929 D1930 D1931
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data
D157
D1552 D1568 D1553 D1569 D1554 D1570 D1555 D1571 D1556 D1572 D1557 D1573 D1558 D1574 D1559
5
Start Communication Address
D154
D1520 D1536 D1521 D1537 D1522 D1538 D1523 D1539 D1524 D1540 D1525 D1541 D1526 D1542 D1527
3
LINK in SLAVE PLC?
M1448 M1449 M1450 M1451 M1452 M1453 M1454 M1455

2-63
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Action flag for SLAVE PLC from MASTER PLC

M1464 M1465 M1466 M1467 M1468 M1469 M1470 M1471
“Read/write” error flag
M1480 M1481 M1482 M1483 M1484 M1485 M1486 M1487
“Reading completed” flag (turns “Off” whenever read/write a station is completed)
M1496 M1497 M1498 M1499 M1500 M1501 M1502 M1503
“Writing completed” flag (turns “Off” whenever read/write a station is completed)
M1512 M1513 M1514 M1515 M1516 M1517 M1518 M1519

SLAVE ID 25 SLAVE ID 26 SLAVE ID 27 SLAVE ID 28 SLAVE ID 29 SLAVE ID 30 SLAVE ID 31 SLAVE ID 32

Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write
out in out in out in out in out in out in out in out in
D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215

 Default start communication address D1520 ~ D1527 to be read = H1064 (D100)

 Default start communication address D1536 ~ D1543 to be written = H10C8 (D200)

8. Explanation: (16 slave stations at most can be supported.)

a) PLC LINK is based on MODBUS communication protocol.
b) Baud rate and communication format of all phariferal devices connected to the Slave PLC
should be the same as the communication format of Master PLC, no matter which COM
port of Slave PLC is used.
c) When M1356 = OFF(Default), the station number of the starting Slave (ID1) can be
designated by D1399 of Master PLC through PLC LINK, and PLC will automatically assign
ID2~ID16 with consecutive station numbers according to the station number of ID1. For
example, if D1399 = K3, Master PLC will send out communication commands to ID1~ID16
which carry station number K3~K18. In addition, care should be taken when setting the
station number of Slaves. All station numbers of slaves should not be the same as the
station number of the Master PLC, which is set up in D1121/D1255.
d) When both M1353 and M1356 are ON, the station number of ID1~ID16 can be specified by
the user in D1900~D1915 of Master PLC. For example, when D1900~D1903 = K3, K3, K5,
K5, Master PLC will access the Slave with station number K3 for 2 times, then the slave
with station number K5 for 2 times as well. Note that all station numbers of slaves should
not be the same as the station number of the Master PLC, and M1353 must be set ON for
this function.
e) Station number selection function (M1356 = ON) is supported by versions of ES2/EX2
v1.4.2 or later, SS2/SX2 v1.2 or later, and SA2 v1.0 or later.
9. Explanation: (32 slave stations at most can be supported. The models which are supported
now are DVP-12SE V1.6 and DVP-26SE V2.0)
a) PLC LINK is based on MODBUS communication protocol.
b) Baud rate and communication format of all phariferal devices connected to the Slave PLC
should be the same as the communication format of Master PLC, no matter which COM
port of Slave PLC is used.
c) When M1356 = OFF (Default), the station number of the starting Slave (ID1) can be
designated by D1399 of Master PLC through PLC LINK, and PLC will automatically assign
ID2~ID16 with consecutive station numbers according to the station number of ID1. (When
M1356 = ON, the station number of the starting Slave (ID1) can be designated by D1399 of
Master PLC through PLC LINK, and PLC will automatically assign ID2~ID32 with
consecutive station numbers according to the station number of ID1). For example, if
D1399 = K3, and M1353 = Off, Master PLC will send out communication commands to
ID1~ID16 which carry station number K3~K18. If D1399 = K3, and M1353 = On, In addition,
Master PLC will send out communication commands to ID1~ID32 which carry station
number K3~K34. In addition, care should be taken when setting the station number of
Slaves. All station numbers of slaves should not be the same as the station number of the
Master PLC, which is set up in D1121/D1255.
d) When both M1353 and M1356 are ON, the station number of ID1~ID32 can be specified by
the user in D1900~D1931 of Master PLC. For example, when D1900~D1903 = K3, K3, K5,
K5, Master PLC will access the Slave with station number K3 for 2 times, then the slave

2-64
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

with station number K5 for 2 times as well. Note that all station numbers of slaves should
not be the same as the station number of the Master PLC (D1121/D1255), and M1353
must be set ON for this function.
e) When M1356 is ON, the station number selection function is enabled.
10. Operation:
a) Set up the baud rates and communication formats. Master PLC and all connected Slave
PLCs should have the same communication settings. COM1_RS-232: D1036, COM2_RS-
485: D1120, COM3_RS-485: D1109.
b) Set up Master PLC ID by D1121 and the starting slave ID by D1399. Then, set slave ID of
each slave PLC. The ID of master PLC and slave PLC cannot be the same.
c) Set data length for accessing. (If data length is not specified, PLC will take default setting
or the previous value as the set value. For details of data length registers, please refer to
the tables above)
d) Set starting reference of the Slave to be accessed. (Default setting for starting reference to
be read: H1064 (D100); default setting for starting reference to be written: H10C8 (D200).
For details of starting reference registers, please refer to the tables above)
e) Steps to start PLC LINK:
 Set ON M1354 to enable simultabeous data read/write in a polling of PLC LINK.
 M1355 = ON, Slave status is user-defined. Set the linking statuses of slave ID 1~slave
ID 16 (slave ID 1~slave ID 32) manually by M1360~M1375 (M1360~M1375 and
M1440~M1455). M1355 = OFF, the linking statuses of slave ID 1~slave ID 16 (slave ID
1~slave ID 32) are auto-detected. The linking statuses of slave ID 1~slave ID 32 can
be monitored by M1360~M1375, and M1440~M1455.
 Select auto mode on PLC LINK by M1351 or manual mode by M1352 (Note that the 2
flags should not be set ON at the same time.) After this, set up the times of polling
cycle by D1431.
 Finally, enable PLC LINK (M1350)
11. The Operation of Master PLC:
a) M1355 = ON indicates that Slave status is user-defined. Set the linking status of slave ID
1~slave ID 16 (slave ID 1~slave ID 32) manually by M1360~M1375 (M1360~M1375 and
M1440~M1455).
b) M1355 = OFF indicates that the linking statuses of slave ID 1~slave ID 16 (slave ID
1~slave ID 32) are auto-detected. The linking statuses of slave ID 1~slave ID 32 can be
monitored by M1360~M1375, and M1440~M1455.
 Enable PLC LINK (M1350). Master PLC will detect the connected Slaves and store the
number of connected PLCs in D1433. The time for detection differs by number of
connected Slaves and time-out setting in D1129.
 M1360~M1375 indicate the linking statuses of slave ID 1~slave ID 16. If M1353 is ON,
M1360~M1375 and M1440~M1455 will indicate the linking statuses of slave ID
1~slave ID 32.
 If no slave is detected, M1350 will be OFF and PLC LINK will be stopped.
 PLC will only detect the number of slaves at the first time when M1350 turns ON.
 After auto-detection is completed, master PLC starts to access each connected slave.
Once slave PLC is added after auto-detection, master PLC cannot access it unless
auto-detection is conducted again.
c) Simultaneous read/write function (M1354) has to be set up before enabling PLC LINK.
Setting up this flag during PLC LINK execution will not take effect.
d) When M1354 = ON, PLC takes Modbus Function H17 (simultaneous read/write function)
for PLC LINK communication function. If the data length to be written is set to 0, PLC will
select Modbus Function H03 (read multiple WORDs) automatically. In the same way, if
data length to be read is set to 0, PLC will select Modbus Function H06 (write single
WORD) or Modbus Function H10 (write multiple WORDs) for PLC LINK communication
function.
e) When M1353 = OFF, PLC LINK accesses the Slave with max 16 words, and the data is
automatically stored in the corresponding registers. When M1353 = ON, up to 100 words
are accessible and the user can specify the starting register for storing the read/written
data.
For example, if the register for storing the read/written data on Slave ID1 is specified as
D1480 = K500, D1496 = K800, access data length D1434 = K50, D1450 = K50, registers

2-65
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

of Master PLC D500~D549 will store the data read from Slave ID1, and the data stored in
D800~D849 will be written into Slave ID1.
f) Master PLC conducts reading before writing. Both reading and writing is executed
according to the range specified by user.
g) Master PLC accesses slave PLCs in order, i.e. data access moves to next slave only when
access on previous slave is completed.
h) Modbus Function H03 will be replaced by Modbus Function H04 for read/write function
code. M1700~M1715 are corresponding to Slave ID 1~16 orderly; when the status is ON,
the read/write function code can be changed from H04 to H04 for the following series.
ES2/ 12SA2/
Series ES2-C ES2-E SS2 12SE 26SE 28SA2
EX2 SX2
Firmware
V3.48 V3.48 V1.0 V3.0 V3.60 -- V2.0 V3.0
version

M1700~M1731 are corresponding to Slave ID 1~32 for 26SE series.

12. Auto mode and Manual mode:
a) Auto mode (M1351): when M1351 = ON, Master PLC will access slave PLCs as the
operation described above, and stop the polling till M1350 or M1351 is OFF.
b) Manual mode (M1352): When manual mode is selected, times of polling cycle in D1431
has to be set up. A full polling cycle refers to the completion of accessing all Slaves. When
PLC LINK is enabled, D1432 starts to store the times of polling. When D1431 = D1432,
PLC LINK stops and M1352 is reset. When M1352 is set ON again, PLC will start the
polling according to times set in D1431 automatically.
c) Note:
 Auto mode M1351 and manual mode M1352 cannot be enabled at the same time. If
M1351 is enabled after M1352 is ON, PLC LINK will stop and M1350 will be reset.
 Communication timeout setting can be modified by D1129 with available range 200
≦D1129 ≦ 3000. PLC will take the upper / lower bound value as the set value if the
specified value is out of the available range. D1129 has to be set up before M1350 =
ON.
 PLC LINK function is only valid when baud rate is higher than 1200 bps. When baud
rate is less than 9600 bps, please set communication time-out to more than 1 second.
 The communication is invalid when data length to be accessed is set to 0.
 Access on 32-bit high speed counters (C200~C255) is not supported.
 Available range for D1399: 1 ~ 230. PLC will take the upper / lower bound value as the
set value if the specified value exceeds the availanle range.
 D1399 has to be set up before enabling PLC LINK. Setting up this register during PLC
LINK execution will not take effect.
 Advantage of using D1399 (Designating the ID of starting Slave):
In old version PLC LINK, PLC detects Slaves from ID1 to ID16. Therefore, when PLC
LINK is applied in multi-layer networks, e.g. 3 layers of networks, the Slave ID of 2nd
and 3rd layer will be repeated. When Slave ID is repeated, i.e. the same as Master ID,
the Slave will be passed. In this case, only 15 Slaves can be connected in 3rd layer. To
solve this problem, D1399 can be applied for increasing the connectable Slaves in
multi-layer network structure.

2-66
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

13. Operation flow chart: In the flow chart below, there are 16 slaves, and 50 words are accessed.
Set starting refer ence of the Slave PLC to be read: D1355~D1370
Set data length for reading from Slave PLC: D1434~D1449
Set starting refer ence of the Slave PLC to be written: D1414~D1430
Set data length for writing in Slave PLC: D1450~D1465
(PLC will take default or previous setting as the set value
if these r egisters ar e not specified)

Enable Disable
M 1355

M1355 = ON, auto-detection disabled. M1350=OFF, Slave ID

Set the S lave to be linked by M1360~ auto-detection enabled
M1375 manually

Enable Communication by Disable

Modbus 0X17 f unct ion

SE T M1354 RST M1354

Enable access up to 50 Enable access up to 16

words through P LC LINK words through P LC LINK
Length of the data read/written

SET M1353 RST M1353

Enable auto mode Manual / Auto mode

Enable manual mode
EASY PLC LINK

SE T M1351 SE T M1352
Set times of polling
cycle (D1431)

SET M1350
Star t to execute EASY PLC LINK

2-67
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

14. Example 1: Connect 1 Master and 2 Slaves by RS-485 and exchange 16 data between Master
and Slaves through PLC LINK
a) Write the ladder diagram program into Master PLC (ID#17)
M1002
MOV K17 D1121 Master ID#

MOV H86 D1120 COM2 communication protocol

SET M1120 Retain communication protocol

MOV K16 D1434 Data length to be read from Slave ID#1

MOV K16 D1450 Data length to be written into Slave ID#1

MOV K16 D1435 Data length to be read from Slave ID#2

MOV K16 D1451 Data length to be written into Slave ID#2

X1
M1351 Auto mode

M1350

END

b) When X1 = On, the data exchange between Master and the two Slaves will be
automatically executed by PLC LINK. The data in D100 ~ D115 in the two Slaves will be
read into D1480 ~ D1495 and D1512 ~ D1527 of the Master, and the data in D1496 ~
D1511 and D1528 ~ D1543 will be written into D200 ~ D215 of the two Slaves.
Master PLC *1 Slave PLC*2
Read
D1480 ~ D1495 D100 ~ D115 of Slave ID#1

Write
D1496 ~ D1511 D200 ~ D215 of Slave ID#1
Read
D1512 ~ D1527 D100 ~ D115 of Slave ID#2

Write
D1528 ~ D1543 D200 ~ D215 of Slave ID#2

c) Assume the data in registers for data exchange before enabling PLC LINK (M1350 = OFF)
is as below:
Master PLC Preset value Slave PLC Preset value
D1480 ~ D1495 K0 D100 ~ D115 of Slave ID#1 K5,000
D1496 ~ D1511 K1,000 D200 ~ D215 of Slave ID#1 K0
D1512 ~ D1527 K0 D100 ~ D115 of Slave ID#2 K6,000
D1528 ~ D1543 K2,000 D200 ~ D215 of Slave ID#2 K0

After PLC LINK is enabled (M1350 = ON), the data in registers for data exchange
becomes:
Master PLC Preset value Slave PLC Preset value
D1480 ~ D1495 K5,000 D100 ~ D115 of Slave ID#1 K5,000
D1496 ~ D1511 K1,000 D200 ~ D215 of Slave ID#1 K1,000
D1512 ~ D1527 K6,000 D100 ~ D115 of Slave ID#2 K6,000

2-68
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

Master PLC Preset value Slave PLC Preset value

D1528 ~ D1543 K2,000 D200 ~ D215 of Slave ID#2 K2,000
d) Up to16 Slaves can be accessed through PLC LINK. For allocation of D100 ~ D115 and
D200 ~ D215 in each Slave PLC, please refer to the tables of Special M and Special D of
this function in previous pages.
15. Example 2: Conncet DVP-PLC with VFD-M inverter and control the RUN, STOP, Forward
operation, Reverse operation through PLC LINK.
a) Write the ladder diagram program into Master PLC (ID#17)
M1002
MOV K17 D1121 Master ID#

MOV H86 D1120 COM2 communication protocol

SET M1120 Retain communication setting

MOV K6 D1434 Data length to be read

MOV K2 D1450 Data length to be witten

Starting reference of data

MOV H2100 D1355
to be read on Slave

MOV H2000 Starting reference of data

D1415
to be written on Slave

MOV K1 D1399 ID# of the starting Slave

SET M1355 Set the Slave to be linked manually

SET M1360 Link Slave ID#1

X1
M1351 Auto mode

M1350 Enable EASY PLC LINK

END

b) M1355 = ON. Set the Slave to be linked manually by M1360~M1375. Set ON M1360 to
link Slave ID#1.
c) Address H2100-H2105 maps to registers D1480-D1485 of PLC. When X1 = ON, PLC
LINK executes, and the data in H2100-H2105 will be displayed in D1480-D1485.
d) Address H2000-H2001 maps to registers D1496-D1497 of PLC. When X1 = ON, PLC LINK
executes, and the parameter in H2000-H2001 will be specified by D1496-D1497.
e) Commands of VFD can be specified by changing the value in D1496. (e.g. D1496 =
H12=>VFD forward operation; D1496 = H1=> VFD stops)
f) Frequency of VFD can be specified by changing the value in D1497. (e.g. D1497 = K5000,
set VFD frequency as 50kHz.)
g) In addition to VFD AC motor drives, devices support MODBUS protocol such as DTA/DTB
temperature controllers and ASDA servo drives can also be connected as Slaves. Up to 16
Slaves can be connected.
16. TD1354 is a PLC link scan cycle (unit: 1ms), and max. display value is K32000. D1354 = K0
when PLC Link stops or when the first scan is completed.

2-69
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Function Group Frequency Detection Function

Number M1357-M1359, D1056-D1059, D1246-D1247
Contents:
1. The special M devices and the Special D devices which are related to the frequency detection
function are listed below.
Enabling the Showing the input frequency
Pulse input
frequency detection (Unit: 0.001Hz)
X0 M1357 D1056/D1057 (32 bits)
X1 M1358 D1058/D1059 (32 bits)
X2 M1359 D1246/D1247 (32 bits)

2. The minimum input frequency which can be detected by the function is 0.5Hz (K500), the
maximum input frequency which can be detected by the function is 1KHz (K1000000). If the
input frequency is less than 0.5Hz, or there is no pulse input for more than 2 seconds, the
value in the corresponding special D device will automatically become 0. If the input frequency
exceeds 1KHz, the PLC will continue catch the input frequency. If the input frequency exceeds
the hardware specifications for the input, the PLC will not be able to catch the input frequency.
3. If the frequency detection function is disabled (the special M device is Off), the last value which
is stored in the special D device will be retained.
4. If the input frequency is less than 100Hz, the error will be less than one ten thousandth. If the
input frequency exceeds 100Hz, the error will become bigger, but the maximum error will not
exceed one one thousandth.
5. Difference between the frequency detection function and SPD: The frequency detection
function is mainly used to detect the frequencies less than 1KHz, and is used in the application
environments which need high precision (unit: 0.001Hz). For example, the frequency detection
function can be used to monitor the output frequency of a generator.
6. After the frequency detection function is enabled, the other functions of the input will not be
enabled. (For example, the external interrupt or SPD will not be enabled after the frequency
detection function is enabled.)
7. DVP-ES2/EX2 series PLCs (exclusive of DVP-ES2-C series PLCs) whose firmware version is
3.22 (or above), and DVP-SX2 series PLCs whose firmware version is 2.66 (or above) support
this function.
8. Example: Detecting X0’s input frequency
Program in the PLC:
M0
DMOV K0 D1056

M0
M1357
If X0’ s input frequency is 50Hz, the 32-bit value in (D1057, D1056) will be K50000.

Function Group Fetching the Value in a Hardware Counter

Number M1598-M1599, D1150-D1153
Contents:
1. The special M devices and the Special D devices which are related to the function of fetching
the value in a hardware counter are listed below.
Enabling the fetching
Fetchinng Value which
Hardware counter of the value in the
signal is fetched
hardware counter
D1150/D1151
C243/C245/C246/C247/C248/C251/C252 X6 M1598
(32 bits)
D1152/D1153
C244/C249/C250/C253/C254 X7 M1599
(32 bits)

2. The function needs to be used with an external interrupt (X6 (I600/I601) or X7 (I700/I701)). The
value in a hardware counter is moved to a special D device when there is a transition in a
fetching signal from low to high or form high to low. The setting of an external interrupt
determines when the value in a hardware counter is moved to a special D device.

2-70
 2 . P r o g r a m m i n g C o n c e p ts

3. DVP-ES2/EX2/SS2 series PLCs whose firmware version is 3.28 (or above), and DVP-
SA2/SX2 series PLCs whose firmware version is 2.82 (or above) support this function.
4. Example: The value in C243 is fetched when there is a transition in X6’s signal from low to high.
Program in the PLC:
EI

M1002
Enabling the fetching
SET M1598 of the value in C243
M1000
DCNT C243 K100

FEND
M1000
I601 DMOV D1150 D0 Moving the value fetched from C243
to (D1,D0).

IRET

END

Function Group When the conditional contacts are closed, execute the ramp-down on the
outputs
Number M1334, M1335
Contents:
1. When M1334 or M1335 is enabled, execute API59 PLSR/DPLSR instructions on Y0 or Y2 to
ramp-down when the conditional contacts are closed.
2. When M1334 or M1335 is enabled, execute API158 DDRVI or API159 DDRVA instructions on
CH0 (CH1) to ramp-down when the conditional contacts are closed.
3. This function is available for the followings:

ES2/ 12SA2/
Series ES2-C ES2-E SS2 26SE 28SA2
EX2 SX2
Firmware version or
V3.42 V3.48 V1.0 V2.86 V3.28 V2.0 V3.0
later versions

Function Group If the PLC detects that the external 24V voltage is unstable, the error LED
flashes
Number M1019
Contents:
1. When M1019 is ON, if the PLC detects the external 24V voltage is unstable, the error LED
keeps flashing.
2. When M1019 is OFF, if the PLC detects the external 24V voltage is below 17.8V, the error LED
flashes. After the PLC detects the external voltage is normal again for more than 2 seconds,
the error LED stops flashing.
3. This function is available for the followings:

ES2/ 12SA2/
Series ES2-C ES2-E SS2 26SE 26SE 28SA2
EX2 SX2
Firmware version or
V3.60 V3.60 V1.00 V3.00 V3.50 V1.92 V1.92 V3.0
later versions

2-71
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Function Group
Read MAC address from the left side network module EN01
Number M1145 (should work with D1400~1403)
Contents:
1. Enter K101 in D1400 to read MAC Address from the 2nd left side EN01 module
2. Once M1145 is set, PLC stores the MAC address of EN01 in D1401~1403.
3. For example if the MAC address of EN01 is 11:22:33:44:55:66, the contents of D1401~D1403
are D1401 = 0x1122, D1402 = 0x3344, D1403 = 0x5566.
4. This function is available for the followings:

Series 12SA2 / SX2 12SE

Firmware version or
V3.00 V1.92
later versions

2-72
Instruction Set
This chapter explains all of the instructions that are used with DVP-ES2/EX2/SS2/
SA2/SX2/SE as well as detailed information concerning the usage of the
instructions.

Chapter Contents

3.1 Basic Instructions (without API numbers) ............................................................................. 3-2

3.2 Explanations to Basic Instructions ........................................................................................ 3-2
3.3 Pointers ................................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.4 Interrupt Pointers ................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.5 Application Programming Instructions ................................................................................ 3-15
3.6 Numerical List of Instructions (classified according to the function) .............................. 3-24
3.7 Numerical List of Instructions (in alphabetic order) ........................................................... 3-32
3.8 Detailed Instruction Explanation........................................................................................... 3-41

3-1
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

3.1 Basic Instructions (without API numbers)

Execution speed
(us)
Instruction Function Operand Steps
ES2/EX2/SS2
SE
SA2/SX2
LD Load NO contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 0.76 0.64 1~3
LDI Load NC contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 0.78 0.68 1~3
AND Connect NO contact in series X, Y, M, S, T, C 0.54 0.58 1~3
ANI Connect NC contact in series X, Y, M, S, T, C 0.56 0.62 1~3
OR Connect NO contact in parallel X, Y, M, S, T, C 0.54 0.62 1~3
ORI Connect NC contact in parallel X, Y, M, S, T, C 0.56 0.64 1~3
ANB Connect a block in series N/A 0.68 0.68 1
ORB Connect a block in parallel N/A 0.76 0.76 1
Start of branches. Stores current N/A
MPS 0.74 0.68 1
result of program evaluation
Reads the stored current result N/A
MRD 0.64 0.54 1
from previous MPS
End of branches. Pops (reads and N/A
MPP resets) the stored result in 0.64 0.54 1
previous MPS
OUT Output coil Y, S, M 0.88 0.68 1~3
SET Latches the ON status Y, S, M 0.76 0.68 1~3
Y, M, S, T, C, D,
RST Resets contacts, registers or coils 2.2 1.04 3
E, F
MC Master control Start N0~N7 1 0.8 3
MCR Master control Reset N0~N7 1 0.8 3
END Program End N/A 1 0.8 1
NOP No operation N/A 0.4 0.5 1
P Pointer P0~P255 0.4 0.5 1
I Interrupt program pointer I□□□ 0.4 0.5 1
STL Step ladder start instruction S 2.2 2 1
RET Step ladder return instruction N/A 1.6 1.4 1
Negative contact to Positive
NP N/A 1.66 0.72 1
contact
Positive contact to Negative
PN N/A 1.62 0.72 1
contact
Note: The execution speed is obtained by basic test programs, therefore the actual instruction
execution time could be longer due to a more complicated program, e.g. program contains multiple
interruptions or high speed input/output.

3.2 Explanations to Basic Instructions

Mnemonic Operands Function Program steps Controllers

SA2
LD X, Y, M, S, T, C Load NO contact 1~3 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Explanations:
1. The LD instruction is used to load NO contact which connects to left side bus line or starts a
new block of program connecting in series or parallel connection.
2. DVP-ES2/EX2 series PLCs whose version is 3.20/DVP-SS2 series PLCs whose version is
3.00/DVP-SA2 series PLCs whose version is 2.60/DVP-SE series PLCs whose version is

3-2
 3. Instruction Set

1.20/DVP-SX2 series PLCs whose version is 2.40 (and above) support the operands X, Y, M,
and S. These operands can be qualified by E or F. Users have to use WPLSoft version 2.31
(or above)/ISPSoft version 2.01 (or above).
Program example:
Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X0 X1 LD X0 Load NO contact X0
Y1
AND X1 Connect NO contact X1 in series
OUT Y1 Drive coil Y1

Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X1 LD X5E2 Load NO contact X3
LD X5E2 Y1
(SupposeE2=K-2)
AND X1 Connect NO contact X1 in series
OUT Y1 Drive coil Y1

Mnemonic Operands Function Program steps Controllers

SA2
LDI X, Y, M, S, T, C Load NC contact 1~3 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Explanations:
1. The LDI instruction is used to load NC contact which connects to left side bus line or starts a
new block of program connecting in series or parallel connection.
2. DVP-ES2/EX2 series PLCs whose version is 3.20/DVP-SS2 series PLCs whose version is
3.00/DVP-SA2 series PLCs whose version is 2.60/DVP-SE series PLCs whose version is
1.20/DVP-SX2 series PLCs whose version is 2.40 (and above) support the operands X, Y, M,
and S. These operands can be qualified by E or F. Users have to use WPLSoft version 2.31
(or above)/ISPSoft version 2.01 (or above).
Program example:
Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X0 X1 LDI X0 Load NC contact X0

Y1
AND X1 Connect NO contact X1 in series
OUT Y1 Drive coil Y1

Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X1 LDI X7F5 Load NC contact X12
LDI X7F5 Y1
(Suppose F5=K3)
AND X1 Connect NO contact X1 in series
OUT Y1 Drive coil Y1

3-3
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Mnemonic Operands Function Program steps

Controllers
Connect NO SA2
AND X, Y, M, S, T, C 1~3 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
contact in series SE

Explanations:
1. The AND instruction is used to connect NO contact in series.
2. DVP-ES2/EX2 series PLCs whose version is 3.20/DVP-SS2 series PLCs whose version is
3.00/DVP-SA2 series PLCs whose version is 2.60/DVP-SE series PLCs whose version is
1.20/DVP-SX2 series PLCs whose version is 2.40 (and above) support the operands X, Y, M,
and S. These operands can be qualified by E or F. Users have to use WPLSoft version 2.31
(or above)/ISPSoft version 2.01 (or above).
Program example:
Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X1 X0 LDI X1 Load NC contact X1

Y1
AND X0 Connect NO contact X0 in series
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X1 LDI X1 Load NC contact X1
LD X10E2 Y1
AND X10E2 Connect NO contact X20 in series
(Suppose E2 = K8)
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Operands Function Program steps Controllers

Connect NC contact SA2
ANI X, Y, M, S, T, C 1~3 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
in series SE

Explanations:
1. The ANI instruction is used to connect NC contact in series.
2. DVP-ES2/EX2 series PLCs whose version is 3.20/DVP-SS2 series PLCs whose version is
3.00/DVP-SA2 series PLCs whose version is 2.60/DVP-SE series PLCs whose version is
1.20/DVP-SX2 series PLCs whose version is 2.40 (and above) support the operands X, Y, M,
and S. These operands can be qualified by E or F. Users have to use WPLSoft version 2.31
(or above)/ISPSoft version 2.01 (or above).
Program example:
Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X1 X0 LD X1 Load NO contact X1
Y1
ANI X0 Connect NC contact X0 in series
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

3-4
 3. Instruction Set

Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X1 LD X1 Load NO contact X1
LDI X15F4 Y1
ANI X15F4 Connect NC contact X11 in series
(Suppose F4=K-4)
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Operands Function Program steps Controllers

Connect NO contact SA2
OR X, Y, M, S, T, C 1~3 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
in parallel SE

Explanations:
1. The OR instruction is used to connect NO contact in parallel.
2. DVP-ES2/EX2 series PLCs whose version is 3.20/DVP-SS2 series PLCs whose version is
3.00/DVP-SA2 series PLCs whose version is 2.60/DVP-SE series PLCs whose version is
1.20/DVP-SX2 series PLCs whose version is 2.40 (and above) support the operands X, Y, M,
and S. These operands can be qualified by E or F. Users have to use WPLSoft version 2.31
(or above)/ISPSoft version 2.01 (or above).
Program example:
Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:
X0 LD X0 Load NO contact X0
Y1
X1 OR X1 Connect NO contact X1 in parallel
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X0
LD X0 Load NO contact X0
Y1
OR X0F1 Connect NO contact X5 in parallel
LD X0F1
(Suppose F1=K5)
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Operands Function Program steps Controllers

Connect NC contact SA2
ORI X, Y, M, S, T, C 1~3 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
in parallel SE

Explanations:
1. The ORI instruction is used to connect NC contact in parallel.
2. DVP-ES2/EX2 series PLCs whose version is 3.20/DVP-SS2 series PLCs whose version is
3.00/DVP-SA2 series PLCs whose version is 2.60/DVP-SE series PLCs whose version is
1.20/DVP-SX2 series PLCs whose version is 2.40 (and above) support the operands X, Y, M,
and S. These operands can be qualified by E or F. Users have to use WPLSoft version 2.31
(or above)/ISPSoft version 2.01 (or above).

3-5
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Program example:
Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:
X0 LD X0 Load NO contact X0
Y1
X1 ORI X1 Connect NC contact X1 in parallel
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X0
LD X0 Load NO contact X0
Y1
ORI X7E6 Connect NC contact X4 in parallel
LDI X7E6
(Suppose E6=K-3)
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Function Program steps Controllers

SA2
ANB Connect a block in series 1 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE
Explanations:
The ANB instruction is used to connect a circuit block to the preceding block in series. Generally,
the circuit block to be connected in series consists of several contacts which form a parallel
connection structure.
Program example:
Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X0 ANB X1 LD X0 Load NO contact X0

Y1
ORI X2 Connect NC contact X2 in parallel
X2 X3
LDI X1 Load NC contact X1
Block A Block B OR X3 Connect NO contact X3 in parallel
ANB Connect circuit block in series
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Function Program steps Controllers

SA2
ORB Connect a block in parallel 1 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Explanations:
The ORB instruction is used to connect a circuit block to the preceding block in parallel. Generally,
the circuit block to be connected in parallel consists of several contacts which form a serial
connection structure.

3-6
 3. Instruction Set

Program example:
Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X0 X1 Block A LD X0 Load NO contact X0

Y1 ANI X1 Connect NC contact X1 in series
X2 X3
ORB LDI X2 Load NC contact X2
Block B AND X3 Connect NO contact X3 in series
ORB Connect circuit block in parallel
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Function Program steps

Controllers
Start of branches. Stores current result SA2
MPS 1 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
of program evaluation SE

Explanations:
As the start of branches, MPS stores current result of program evaluation at the point of
divergence.

Mnemonic Function Program steps

Controllers
Reads the stored current result from SA2
MRD 1 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
previous MPS SE

Explanations:
MRD reads the stored current result from previous MPS and operates with the contact connected
after MRD.

Mnemonic Function Program steps

Controllers
End of branches. Pops (reads and SA2
MPP resets) the stored result in previous 1 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE
MPS.
Explanations:
As the end of branches, MPP pops the stored result in previous MPP, which means it operates
with the contact connected first then resets the storage memory.
Points to note:
1. Every MPS can not be applied without a corresponding MPP
2. Max. 8 MPS-MPP pairs can be applied..

3-7
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Program example:
Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:
MPS LD X0 Load NO contact X0
X0 X1
Y1 MPS Store current status
X2
AND X1 Connect NO contact X1 in series
MRD M0
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
Y2
MPP
MRD Read the stored status
END
AND X2 Connect NO contact X2 in series
OUT M0 Drive M0 coil
MPP Read the stored status and reset
OUT Y2 Drive Y2 coil
END End of program

Note: When compiling ladder diagram with WPLSoft, MPS, MRD and MPP will be automatically
added to the compiled results in instruction format. However, users programming in instruction
mode have to enter branch instructions as required.

Mnemonic Operands Function Program steps Controllers

SA2
OUT Y, M, S Output coil 1~3 ES2/EX2 SS2 SA2
SE

Explanations:
1. Output the program evaluation results before OUT instruction to the designated device.
2. DVP-ES2/EX2 series PLCs whose version is 3.20/DVP-SS2 series PLCs whose version is
3.00/DVP-SA2 series PLCs whose version is 2.60/DVP-SE series PLCs whose version is
1.20/DVP-SX2 series PLCs whose version is 2.40 (and above) support the operands Y, M,
and S. These operands can be qualified by E or F. Users have to use WPLSoft version 2.31
(or above)/ISPSoft version 2.01 (or above).
Status of coil contact
OUT instruction
Evaluation result Associated Contacts
Coil
NO contact（normal open） NC contact（normal close）
FALSE OFF Current blocked Current flows
TRUE ON Current flows Current blocked
Program example:
Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:
X0 X1 LDI X0 Load NC contact X0
Y1
AND X1 Connect NO contact X1 in series
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

3-8
 3. Instruction Set

Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X0 X1 LDI X0 Load NC contact X0
OUT Y10F0
AND X1 Connect NO contact X1 in series
OUT Y10F0 Drive Y5 coil (Suppose F0=K-3)

Mnemonic Operands Function Program steps Controllers

Latches the ON SA2
SET Y, M, S 1~3 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
status SE

Explanations:
1. When the SET instruction is driven, its designated device will be ON and latched whether the
SET instruction is still driven. In this case, RST instruction can be applied to turn off the
device.
2. DVP-ES2/EX2 series PLCs whose version is 3.20/DVP-SS2 series PLCs whose version is
3.00/DVP-SA2 series PLCs whose version is 2.60/DVP-SE series PLCs whose version is
1.20/DVP-SX2 series PLCs whose version is 2.40 (and above) support the operands Y, M,
and S. These operands can be qualified by E or F. Users have to use WPLSoft version 2.31
(or above)/ISPSoft version 2.01 (or above).
Program example:
Ladder Diagram: Instruction: Operation:
X0 Y0 LD X0 Load NO contact X0
SET Y1
ANI Y0 Connect NC contact Y0 in series
SET Y1 Drive Y1 and latch the status

Ladder Diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X0 Y0 LD X0 Load NO contact X0
SET Y15E5
ANI Y0 Connect NC contact Y0 in series
SET Y15E5 Drive Y20 and latch the status
(Suppose E5=K3)

Mnemonic Operands Function Program steps

Controllers
Y, M, S, T, C, D, E, Resets contacts, SA2
RST 3 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
F registers or coils SE

Explanations:
1. Device status when RST instruction is driven:
Device Status
S, Y, M Coil and contact are set to OFF.
T, C Current value is cleared. Associated contacts or coils are reset .
D, E, F The content is set to 0.

3-9
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Status of designated devices remains the same when RST instruction is not executed.
2. DVP-ES2/EX2 series PLCs whose version is 3.20/DVP-SS2 series PLCs whose version is
3.00/DVP-SA2 series PLCs whose version is 2.60/DVP-SE series PLCs whose version is
1.20/DVP-SX2 series PLCs whose version is 2.40 (and above) support the operands Y, M,
and S. These operands can be qualified by E or F. Users have to use WPLSoft version 2.31
(or above)/ISPSoft version 2.01 (or above).
Program example:
Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:
X0 LD X0 Load NO contact X0
RST Y5
RST Y5 Reset contact Y5

Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X0 LD X0 Load NO contact X0
RST Y5E0
RST Y5E0 Reset contact Y5
(Suppose E0=K0)

Mnemonic Operands Function Program steps Controllers

Master control SA2
MC/MCR N0~N7 3 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
Start/Reset SE

Explanations:
MC is the master-control start instruction. When MC instruction executes, the program execution
turns to the designated nest level and executes the instructions between MC and MCR. However,
MCR is the master-control reset instruction placed at the end of the designated nest level and no
drive contact is required before MCR. When MC/MCR is not active, devices and instructions
between MC/MCR will operate as the following table.
Instruction type Explanation
General purpose timer Present value = 0, Coil is OFF, No action on associated contact
Subroutine timer Present value = 0, Coil is OFF, No action on associated contact
Accumulative timer Coil is OFF, present value and contact status remains
Counter Coil is OFF, present value and contact status remains
Coils driven by OUT instruction All OFF
Devices driven by SET/RST
Stay intact
instructions
All disabled.
The FOR-NEXT nested loop will still execute back and forth for N
Application instructions
times. Instructions between FOR-NEXT will act as other
instructions between MC and MCR.

3-10
 3. Instruction Set

Note: MC-MCR master-control instruction supports max 8 layers of nest levels. Please use the
instructions in order from N0~ N7.
Program example:
Ladder diagram: Instruction: Operation:
X0 LD X0 Load NO contact X0
MC N0
MC N0 Enable N0 nest level
X1
Y0 LD X1 Load NO contact X1

X2 OUT Y0 Drive coil Y1

MC N1 :
X3 LD X2 Load NO contact X2
Y1
MC N1 Enable N1 nest level

MCR N1 LD X3 Load NO contact X3

OUT Y1 Drive coil Y1
MCR N0 :
X10 MCR N1 Reset N1 nest level
MC N0
:
X11
Y10 MCR N0 Reset N0 nest level
:
MCR N0 LD X10 Load NO contact X10
MC N0 Enable N0 nest level
LD X11 Load NO contact X11
OUT Y10 Drive coil Y10
:
MCR N0 Reset N0 nest level

Mnemonic Function Program steps Controllers

SA2
END Program End 1 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Explanations:
END instruction needs to be connected at the end of program. PLC will scan from address 0 to
END instruction and return to address 0 to scan again.

Mnemonic Function Program steps Controllers

SA2
NOP No operation 1 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Explanation:
NOP instruction does not conduct any operations in the program, i.e. the operation result remains
the same after NOP is executed. Generally NOP is used for replacing certain instruction without
altering original program length.

3 - 11
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Program example:
Ladder Diagram: Instruction: Operation:

NOP instruction will be LD X0 Load NO contact X0

omitted in the ladder diagram
NOP No operation
X0 OUT Y1 Drive coil Y1
NOP Y1

Mnemonic Function Program steps Controllers

SA2
NP Negative contact to Positive contact 1 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Explanation:
When the conditions preceding NP command change from false to true, NP command (works as
contact A) will be ON for a scan cycle. In the next scan cycle it turns OFF.
Program Example:
Ladder Diagram: Instruction: Operation:
LD M0 Load NO contact M0
M0 M1 AND M1 Connect NO contact M1 in series
P Y0
NP Negative contact to Positive contact
OUT Y0 Drive coil Y0
Timing Diagram:
M0

M1
A scan cycle A scan cycle
Y0

Mnemonic Function Program steps Controllers

SA2
PN Positive contact to Negative contact 1 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Explanation:
When the conditions preceding PN command change from true to false, PN command (works as
contact A) will be ON for a scan cycle. In the next scan cycle it turns OFF.
Program Example:
Ladder Diagram: Instruction: Operation:
LD M0 Load NO contact M0
M0 M1 AND M1 Connect NO contact M1 in series
P Y0
PN Negative contact to Positive contact
OUT Y0 Drive coil Y0

3-12
 3. Instruction Set

Timing Diagram:

M0

M1
A scan cycle A scan cycle
Y0

3.3 Pointers

Mnemonic Operands Function Program steps Controllers

SA2
P P0~P255 Pointer 1 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Explanation:
Pointer P is used with API 00 CJ and API 01 CALL instructions. The use of P does not need to start
from P0, and the No. of P cannot be repeated; otherwise, unexpected errors may occur. For other
information on P pointers, please refer to section 2.15 in this manual
Program example 1:
Ladder Diagram: Instruction: Operation:

X0 LD X0 Load NO contact X0
CJ P10
CJ P10 Jump to P10
X1 :
P10 Y1
P10 Pointer P10
LD X1 Load NO contact X1
OUT Y1 Drive coil Y1

3.4 Interrupt Pointers

Mnemonic Function Program steps Controllers

SA2
I Interrupt program pointer 1 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Explanations:
A interruption program has to start with a interruption pointer (I□□□) and ends with API 03 IRET. I
instruction has to be used with API 03 IRET, API 04 EI, and API 05 DI. For detailed information on
interrupt pointes, please refer to section 2.15 in this manual

3-13
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Program example:
Ladder diagram: Instruction Operation:
code:
EI Enable interruption
EI
Allowable range LD X1 Load NO contact X1
X1 for interruption
Y1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
:
DI
Pointer of DI Disable interruption
interruption :
program FEND
X2 FEND Main program ends
I 001 Y2 I001 Interruption pointer
Interruption
subroutine LD X2 Load NO contact X2
IRET
OUT Y2 Drive Y2 coil
:
IRET Interruption return
External interrupt:
ES2 supports 8 external input interrupts: (I000/I001, X0), (I100/I101, X1), (I200/I201, X2),
(I300/I301, X3), (I400/I401, X4), (I500/I501, X5), (I600/I601, X6) and (I700/I701, X7). (01,
rising-edge trigger , 00, falling-edge trigger )
Timer Interrupts:
ES2 supports 3 timer interrupts: I602~I699, I702~I799, (Timer resolution: 1ms), I805/I899, 1 point
(Timer resolution=0.1 ms), available for SE/ES2-E, for other series, firmware version should be
V2.00 or later.
Communication Interrupts:
ES2 supports 3 communication interrupts: I140, I150 and I160.
Counter Interrupts:
ES2 supports 8 high-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, I070 and I080.

3-14
 3. Instruction Set

3.5 Application Programming Instructions

1. PLC instructions are provided with a unique mnemonic name to make it easy to remember
instructions. In the example below the API number given to the instruction is 12, the
mnemonic name is MOV and the function description is Move.
API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers
SA2
12 D MOV P Move ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MOV, MOVP: 5 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * * DMOV, DMOVP: 9 steps
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SA2 SX2
SE SE
2. The area of ‘Operands’ lists the devices (operands) required for the instruction. Identification
letters are used to associate each operand with its function, e.g. D-destination, S-source, n,
m-number of devices. Additional numeric suffixes will be attached if there are more than one
operand with the same function, e.g. S1, S2.
3. When using WPLSoft for programming user program, it is not necessary to remember the
API number of an instruction since WPLSoft offers drop down list to select an instruction.
4. Applicable controllers are identified by the boxes at the right of the table. For individual
instruction properties of Pulse, 16-bit or 32-bit, please refer to the box down the table.
5. Pulse operation requires a ‘P’ to be added directly after the mnemonic while 32 bit operation
requires a ‘D’ to be added before the mnemonic, i.e. if an instruction was being used with
both pulse and 32 bit operation it appears as “D***P” where *** is the basic mnemonic.
Instruction Composition
The application instructions are specified by API numbers 0~--- and each has its mnemonic. When
designing the user program with ladder editing program (WPLSoft), users only need to key in the
mnemonic, e.g. MOV, and the instruction will be inserted. Instructions consist of either just the
instruction or the instruction followed by operands for parameter settings. Take MOV instruction for
example:

X0
MOV K10 D10

Instruction Operand

Mnemonic : Indicates the name and the function of the instruction

Operand : The parameter setting for the instruction

3-15
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Source: if there are more than one source is required, it will be indicated as S1, S2....etc.
Destination: if there are more than one destination is required, it will be indicated as D1,
D2....etc.
If the operand can only be constant K/H or a register, it will be represented as m, m1, m2, n, n1,
n2…etc.

Length of Operand (16-bit or 32-bit instruction)

The length of operand can be divided into two groups: 16-bit and 32-bit for processing data of
different length. A prefix ”D” indicates 32-bit instructions.
16-bit MOV instruction
X0 When X0 = ON, K10 will be sent to D10.
MOV K10 D10

32-bit DMOV instruction

When X1 = ON, the content in (D11, D10) will be
X1
DMOV D10 D20 sent to (D21, D20).

Explanation of the format of application instruction

1 2 3 4 5

A PI M nem o n ic Op er and s F un ctio n C on tr o ller s

10 D C MP P S1 S2 D C ompa re ES2/EX2 SS2 SA2 SX2

Typ e B it Device s Wo r d D evices Pr o gr am Ste ps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F CM P, C MPP: 7 steps

DC MP, DC MPP: 13s teps
6
{ S1
S2
D * * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
7

PU LSE 16 -b it 32 -b it
8 E S2 /E X2 S S2 S A2 S X2 E S2 /E X2 S S2 S A2 S X2 E S2 /E X2 S S2 S A2 S X2

API number for instruction

The core mnemonic code of instruction
A prefix “D” indicates a 32 bit instruction
A suffix “P“ in this box indicates a pulse instruction
Operand format of the instruction
Function of the instruction
Applicable PLC models for this instruction
A symbol “*” is the device can use the index register. For example, device D of operand S1
supports index E and F.
A symbol “*” is given to device which can be used for this operand

3-16
 3. Instruction Set

Steps occupied by the 16-bit/32-bit/pulse instruction

Applicable PLC models for 16-bit/32-bit/pulse execution instruction.

Continuous execution vs. Pulse execution

1. There are two execution types for instructions: continuous execution instruction and pulse
instruction. Program scan time is shorter when instructions are not executed. Therefore,
using the pulse execution instruction can reduce the scan time of the program.
2. The ‘pulse’ function allows the associated instruction to be activated on the rising edge of the
drive contact. The instruction is driven ON for the duration of one program scan.
3. In addition, while the control input remains ON, the associate instruction will not be executed
for the second time. To re-execute the instruction the control input must be turned from OFF
to ON again.
Pulse execution instruction When X0 goes from OFF to ON, MOVP
X0 instruction will be executed once and the
MOVP D10 D12
instruction will not be executed again in the scan
period
Continuous execution instruction When X1=ON, the MOV instruction can be
X1 re-executed again in every scan of program. This
MOV D10 D12
is called continuous execution instruction.

Operands
3. Bit devices X, Y, M, and S can be combined into word device, storing values and data for
operations in the form of KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS in an application instruction.
4. Data register D, timer T, counter C and index register E, F are designated by general
operands.
5. A data register D consists of 16 bits, i.e. a 32-bit data register consists of 2 consecutive D
registers.
6. If an operand of a 32-bit instruction designates D0, 2 consecutive registers D1 and D0 will be
occupied. D1 is thehigh word and D0 is the low word. This proncipal also applys to timer T
and 16-bit counters C0 ~ C199.
7. When the 32-bit counters C200 ~ C255 are used as data registers, they can only be
designataed by the operands of 32-bit instructions.
Operand Data format
8. X, Y, M, and S are defined as bit devices which indicate ON/OFF status.
9. 16-bit (or 32-bit) devices T, C, D, and registers E, F are defined as word devices.

3-17
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

10. “Kn” can be placed before bit devices X, Y, M and S to make it a word device for performing
word-device operations. (n = 1 refers to 4 bits. For 16-bit instruction, n = K1 ~ K4; for 32-bit
instruction, n = K1 ~ K8). For example, K2M0 refers to 8 bits, M0 ~ M7.

X0 When X0 = ON, the contents in M0 ~ M7 will be

MOV K2M0 D10 moved to b0 ~b7 in D10 and b8 ~b15 will be

set to “0”.

Kn values
16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction
Designated value: K-2,147,483,648 ~
Designated value: K-32,768 ~ K32,767
K2,147,483,647
16-bit instruction: (K1~K4) 32-bit instruction: (K1~K8)
K1 (4 bits) 0~15 K1 (4 bits) 0~15
K2 (8 bits) 0~255 K2 (8 bits) 0~255
K3 (12 bits) 0~4,095 K3 (12 bits) 0~4,095
K4 (16 bits) -32,768~+32,767 K4 (16 bits) 0~65,535
K5 (20 bits) 0~1,048,575
K6 (24 bits) 0~167,772,165
K7 (28 bits) 0~268,435,455
K8 (32 bits) -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647

Flags
1. General Flags
The flags listed below are used for indicating the operation result of the application
instruction:
M1020: Zero flag
M1021: Borrow flag
M1022: Carry flag
M1029: Execution of instruction is completed
All flags will turn ON or OFF according to the operation result of an instruction. For example,
the execution result of instructions ADD/SUB/MUL/DVI will affect the status of M1020 ~
M1022. When the instruction is not executed, the ON/OFF status of the flag will be held. The
status of the four flags relates to many instructions. See relevant instructions for more
details.

3-18
 3. Instruction Set

X0 When X0 = ON, DSW will be

SET M0
enabled.
M0
DSW X10 Y10 D0 K0 When X0 = OFF, M0 is
M1029 latched. M0 will be reset
RST M0 only when DSW instruction
is completed to activate
M1029.
2. Error Operation Flags
Errors occur during the execution of the instruction when the combination of application
instructions is incorrect or the devices designated by the operand exceed their range. Other
than errors, the flags listed in the table below will be On, and error codes will also appear.
3. Flags to Extend Functions
Some instructions can extend their function by using some special flags.
Example: instruction RS can switch transmission mode 8-bit and 16-bit by using M1161.
Device Explanation
M1067 When operational errors occur, M1067 = ON. D1067 displays the error code.
D1067 D1069 displays the address where the error occurs. Other errors occurring will
D1069 update the contents in D1067 and D1069. M1067 will be OFF when the error is
cleared.
When operational errors occur, M1068 = ON. D1068 displays the address
M1068
where the error occurs. Other errors occurring wil not update the content in
D1068
D1068. RST instruction is required to reset M1068 otherwise M1068 is latched.

Limitations for times of using instructions

Some instructions can only be used a certain number of times in a program. These instructions
can be modified by index registers to extend their functionality.
1. Instructions can be used once in a program:
API 60 (IST) API 155 (DABSR)

2. Instruction can be used twice in a program:

API 77 (PR)

3. Instruction can be used 8 times in a program:

API 64 (TTMR)

4. For counters C232~C242, the total max times for using DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ
instructions: 6. DHSZ can only be used less than 6 times.
5. For counters C243, C245~C248, C251, C252, the total max times for using DHSCS, DHSCR

3-19
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

and DHSZ instructions: 4. DHSZ takes up 2 times of the total available times.
6. For counters C244, C249, C250, C253, C254, the total max times for using DHSCS, DHSCR
and DHSZ instructions: 4. DHSZ takes up 2 times of the total available times.
Limitation of synchronized execution
Most instructions have no limitation on the times to be used in a program, but there are limitations
on the number of instruction to be executed in the same scan cycle.
1. Only 1 instruction can be executed at the same scan cycle: API 52 MTR, API 69 SORT, API
70 TKY, API 71 HKY, API 72 DSW, API 74 SEGL, API 75 ARWS.
2. Only 4 instruction can be executed at the same scan cycle: API 56 SPD, API 169 HOUR.
3. There is no limitation on the times of using the high-speed output instructions API 57 PLSY,
API 58 PWM, API 59 PLSR, API 156DZRN, API 158 DDRVI, API 159 DDRVA and API 195
DPTPO, but only one high-speed output instruction will be executed in the same scan time.
4. There is no limitation on the times of using the communication instructions API 80 RS, API
100 MODRD, API 101 MODWR, API 102 FWD, API 103 REV, API 104 STOP, API 105 RDST,
API 106 RSTEF , API 150 MODRW, but only one communication instruction will be executed
on single COM port during the same scan cycle.
Numeric Values
1. Devices indicates ON/OFF status are called bit devices, e.g. X, Y, M and S. Devices used for
storing values are called word devices, e.g. T, C, D, E and F. Although bit device can only be
ON/OFF for a single point, they can also be used as numeric values in the operands of
instructions if the data type declaration device Kn is added in front of the bit device.
2. For 16-bit data, K1~K4 are applicable. For 32-bit data, K1~K8 are applicable. For example,
K2M0 refers to a 8-bit value composed of M0 ~ M7.
Valid data

M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Low byte
Transmit to
Reset to 0

D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Equals
Low byte
D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

3. Transmit K1M0, K2M0, K3M0 to 16-bit registers. Only the valid bit data will be transmitted
and the upper bits in the 16-bit register will all be filled with 0. The same rule applies when
sending K1M0, K2M0, K3M0, K4M0, K5M0, K6M0, K7M0 to 32-bit registers.

3-20
 3. Instruction Set

4. When the Kn value is specified as K1~K3 (K4~K7) for a 16-bit (32-bit) operation, the empty
upper bits of the target register will be filled with “0.” Therefore, the operation result in this
case is positive since the MSB(Most significant bit) is 0.
M0 The BCD value combined by X0 to X7 will be
BIN K2X0 D0
converted to D0 as BIN value.

Assign Continuous Bit Numbers

As already explained, bit devices can be grouped into 4 bit units. The “n” in Kn defines the number
of groups of 4 bits to be combined for data operation. For data register D, consecutive D refers to
D0, D1, D2, D3, D4…; For bit devices with Kn, consecutive No. refers to:
K1X0 K1X4 K1X10 K1X14…
K2Y0 K2Y10 K2Y20 Y2X30…
K3M0 K3M12 K3M24 K3M36…
K4S0 K4S16 K4S32 K4S48…
Note: To avoid errors, please do not skip over the continuous numbers. In additoin, when K4Y0 is
used in 32-bit operation, the upper 16-bit is defined as 0. Therefore, it is recommended to use
K8Y0 in 32bit operation.

Floating Point Operation

The operations in DVP-PLC are conducted in BIN integers. When the integer performs division,
e.g. 40 ÷ 3 = 13, the remainder will be 1. When the integer performs square root operations, the
decimal point will be left out. To obtain the operation result with decimal point, please use floating
point instructions.
Application instructions revelant to floating point:
FLT DECMP DEZCP DMOVR DRAD
DDEG DEBCD DEBIN DEADD DESUB
DEMUL DEDIV DEXP DLN DLOG
DESQR DPOW INT DSIN DCOS
DTAN DASIN DACOS DATAN DADDR
DSUBR DMULR DDIVR FLD※ FAND ※
FOR ※

3-21
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Binary Floating Point

DVP-PLC represents floating point value in 32 bits, following the IEEE754 standard:

8-bit 23-bit
S exponent mantissa
b31 b0

Sign bit
0: positive
1: negative

Equation (− 1)S × 2 E − B ×1.M ; B = 127

Therefore, the range of 32-bit floating point value is from ±2-126 to ±2+128, i.e. from ±1.1755×10-38 to
±3.4028×10+38.
Example 1: Represent “23” in 32-bit floating point value
Step 1: Convert “23” into a binary value: 23.0 = 10111
Step 2: Normalize the binary value: 10111 = 1.0111 × 24, in which 0111 is mantissa and 4 is
exponent.
Step 3: Obtain the exponent: ∵ E – B = 4  E – 127 = 4 ∴
2 E = 131 = 10000011

Step 4: Combine the sign bit, exponent and mantissa into a floating point
0 10000011 011100000000000000000002 = 41B8000016
Example 2: Represent “-23.0” in 32-bit floating point value
The steps required are the same as those in Example 1 and only differs in modifying the sign bit
into “1”.
1 10000011 011100000000000000000002=C1B8000016
DVP-PLC uses registers of 2 continuous No. to store a 32-bit floating point value. For example, we
use registers (D1, D0) for storing a binary floating point value as below:
D1(b15~b0) D0(b15~b0)
7 6 5 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -17 -18 -19 -20 -21 -22 -23
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
S E7 E6 E5 E1 E0 A22 A21 A20 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
b31 b30 b29 b28 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

8 bits of exponent 23 bits of mantissa

Hidden decimal point

Sign bit (0: positive 1: negative)

When b0~b31 is 0, the content is 0.

Decimal Floating Point

 Since the binary floating point value is not very user-friendly, we can convert it into a decimal
floating point value for use. However, please note that the floating point operation in DVP-PLC
is still operated in binary floating point format.
 The decimal floating point is represented by 2 continuous registers. The register of smaller
number is for the constant while the register of bigger number is for the exponent.
Example: Store a decimal floating point in registers (D1, D0)

3-22
 3. Instruction Set

Decimal floating point = [constant D0] × 10 [exponent D1 ]

Constant D0 = ±1,000 ~ ±9,999
Exponent D1 = -41 ~ +35
The constant 100 does not exist in D0 because 100 is represented as 1,000 × 10-1. The range of
decimal floating point is ±1175 × 10-41 ~ ±3402×10+35.
 The decimal floating point can be used in the following instructions:
D EBCD: Convert binary floating point to decimal floating point
D EBIN: Convert decimal floating point to binary floating point
 Zero flag (M1020), borrow flag (M1021), carry flag (M1022) and the floating point operation
instruction
Zero flag: M1020 = On if the operational result is “0”.
Borrow flag: M1021 = On if the operational result exceeds the minimum unit.
Carry flag: M1022 = On if the absolute value of the operational result exceeds the range of
use.
Index register E, F
The index registers are 16-bit registers. There are 16 devices including E0 ~ E7 and F0 ~ F7.
 E and F index registers are 16-bit data registers
which can be read and written.
 If you need a 32-bit register, you have to designate
16-bit 16-bit E. In this case, F will be covered up by E and
F0 E0 cannot be used; otherwise, the contents in E may
32-bit become incorrect. (We recommend you use MOVP

F0 E0 instruction to reset the contents in D to 0 when the

High byte Low byte PLC is switched on.)
 Combination of E and F when you designate a
32-bit index register: (E0, F0), (E1, F1), (E2, F2), …
(E7, F7)

Devices modifiable: P, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D.

E and F can modify the devices listed above but cannot modify themselves and Kn., e.g. K4M0E0
is valid and K0E0M0 is invalid. Grey columns in the table of operand at the beginning page of each
application instruction indicate the operands modifiable by E and F.
If you need to modify device P, I, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C and D by applying E, F, you
have to select a 16-bit register, i.e. you can designate E or F.

3-23
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

3.6 Numerical List of Instructions (classified according to the function)

Loop Control
Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
00 CJ -  Conditional jump     3 -
01 CALL -  Call subroutine     3 -
02 SRET - - Subroutine return     1 -
03 IRET - - Interrupt return     1 -
04 EI - - Enable interrupt     1 -
05 DI - - Disable interrupt     1 -
The end of the main program
06 FEND - -     1 -
(First end)
07 WDT -  Watchdog timer refresh     1 -
08 FOR - - Start of a For-Next Loop     3 -
09 NEXT - - End of a For-Next Loop     1 -

Transmission Comparison
Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
10 CMP DCMP  Compare     7 13
11 ZCP DZCP  Zone compare     9 17
12 MOV DMOV  Move     5 9
13 SMOV -  Shift move     11 -
14 CML DCML  Complement     5 9
15 BMOV -  Block move     7 -
16 FMOV DFMOV  Fill move     7 13
17 XCH DXCH  Exchange     5 9
18 BCD DBCD  Convert BIN to BCD     5 9
19 BIN DBIN  Convert BCD to BIN     5 9

Four Arithmetic Operations

Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
20 ADD DADD  Addition     7 13
21 SUB DSUB  Subtraction     7 13
22 MUL DMUL  Multiplication     7 13
23 DIV DDIV  Division     7 13
24 INC DINC  Increment     3 5
25 DEC DDEC  Decrement     3 5
26 WAND DAND  Logical Word AND     7 13
27 WOR DOR  Logical Word OR     7 13
28 WXOR DXOR  Logical XOR     7 13
29 NEG DNEG  2’s Complement (Negation)     3 5
114 MUL16 MUL32  16-bit/32-bit Binary Multiplication     7 13
115 DIV16 DIV32  16-bit/32-bit Binary Division     7 13

3-24
 3. Instruction Set

Rotation and Displacement

Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
30 ROR DROR  Rotate right     5 9
31 ROL DROL  Rotate left     5 9
32 RCR DRCR  Rotate right with carry     5 9
33 RCL DRCL  Rotate left with carry     5 9
34 SFTR -  Bit shift right     9 -
35 SFTL -  Bit shift left     9 -
36 WSFR -  Word shift right     9 -
37 WSFL -  Word shift left     9 -
38 SFWR -  Shift register write     7 -
39 SFRD -  Shift register read     7 -

Data Processing
Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
40 ZRST -  Zone reset     5 -
41 DECO -  Decode     7 -
42 ENCO -  Encode     7 -
43 SUM DSUM  Sum of Active bits     5 9
44 BON DBON  Check specified bit status     7 13
45 MEAN DMEAN  Mean     7 13
46 ANS - - Timed Annunciator Set     7 -
47 ANR -  Annunciator Reset     1 -
48 SQR DSQR  Square Root     5 9
49 FLT DFLT  Floating point     5 9

High Speed Processing

Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
50 REF -  Refresh     5 -
51 REFF -  Refresh and filter adjust     3 -
52 MTR - - Input Matrix     9 -
53 - DHSCS - High speed counter SET     - 13
54 - DHSCR - High speed counter RESET     - 13
55 - DHSZ - High speed zone compare     - 17
56 SPD - - Speed detection     7 -
57 PLSY DPLSY - Pulse output     7 13
58 PWM - - Pulse width modulation     7 -
59 PLSR DPLSR - Pulse ramp     9 17

3-25
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Handy Instructions
Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
60 IST - - Initial state     7 -
61 SER DSER  Search a data stack     9 17
62 ABSD DABSD - Absolute drum sequencer     9 17
63 INCD - - Incremental drum sequencer     9 -
64 TTMR - - Teaching timer     5 -
65 STMR - - Special timer     7 -
66 ALT -  Alternate state     3 -
67 RAMP DRAMP - Ramp variable value     9 17
68 DTM -  Data transform and move     9 -
69 SORT DSORT - Data sort     11 21
Setting up to compare the inputs of
315 XCMP - - - -   11 -
multiple work stations
Comparing the outputs of multiple
316 YOUT - - - -   9 -
work stations

External I/O Display

Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
70 TKY DTKY - 10-key input     7 13
71 HKY DHKY - Hexadecimal key input     9 17
72 DSW - - DIP Switch     9 -
73 SEGD -  7-segment decoder     5 -
74 SEGL - - 7-segment with latch     7 -
75 ARWS - - Arrow switch     9 -
76 ASC - - ASCII code conversion     11 -
77 PR - - Print (ASCII code output)     5 -

Serial I/O
Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SA2 SX2 SE 16-bit 32-bit
EX2
Read CR data from special
78 FROM DFROM       9 17
modules
Write CR data into special
79 TO DTO       9 17
modules
80 RS - - Serial communication      9 -
81 PRUN DPRUN  Parallel run      5 9
82 ASCII -  Convert HEX to ASCII      7 -
83 HEX -  Convert ASCII to HEX      7 -
84 CCD -  Check code      7 -

3-26
 3. Instruction Set

Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS

API PULSE Function ES2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SA2 SX2 SE 16-bit 32-bit
EX2
85 VRRD -  Volume read - -   - 5 -
86 VRSC -  Volume scale read - -   - 5 -
87 ABS DABS  Absolute value      3 5
88 PID DPID - PID control      9 17

Basic Instructions
Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
89 PLS - - Rising-edge output     3 -
Rising–edge detection
90 LDP - -     3 -
operation
Falling–edge detection
91 LDF - -     3 -
operation
92 ANDP - - Rising-edge series connection     3 -
93 ANDF - - Falling-edge series connection     3 -
94 ORP - - Rising-edge parallel connection     3 -
95 ORF - - Falling-edge parallel connection     3 -
96 TMR - - Timer     4 -
97 CNT DCNT - Counter     4 6
98 INV - - Inverse operation     1 -
99 PLF - - Falling-edge output     3 -
258 ATMR - - Contact type timer     5 -

Communication Instructions
Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE 2
100 MODRD - - Read Modbus data     7 -
101 MODWR - - Write Modbus Data     7 -
102 FWD - - Forward Operation of VFD     7 -
103 REV - - Reverse Operation of VFD     7 -
104 STOP - - Stop VFD     7 -
105 RDST - - Read VFD Status     5 -
106 RSTEF - - Reset Abnormal VFD     5 -
107 LRC -  LRC checksum     7 -
108 CRC -  CRC checksum     7 -
150 MODRW - - MODBUS Read/ Write     11 -
206 ASDRW - - ASDA servo drive R/W -    7 -
ES2-
113 ETHRW - - Ethernet communication -   9 -
E
Self-defined Ethernet ES2-
337 ETHRS - - -   13 -
communication Command E
295 DMVRW - - DMV Communication Command -  - - 9 -

3-27
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Floating Point Operation

Mnemonics Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE 2
110 - DECMP  Floating point compare     - 13
111 - DEZCP  Floating point zone compare     - 17
112 DMOVR  Move floating point data     9
116 - DRAD  Degree  Radian     - 9
117 - DDEG  Radian  Degree     - 9
118 - DEBCD  Float to scientific conversion     - 9
119 - DEBIN  Scientific to float conversion     - 9
120 - DEADD  Floating point addition     - 13
121 - DESUB  Floating point subtraction     - 13
122 - DEMUL  Floating point multiplication     - 13
123 - DEDIV  Floating point division     - 13
124 - DEXP  Float exponent operation     - 9
125 - DLN  Float natural logarithm operation     - 9
126 - DLOG  Float logarithm operation     - 13
127 - DESQR  Floating point square root     - 9
128 - DPOW  Floating point power operation     - 13
129 INT DINT  Float to integer     5 9
130 - DSIN  Sine     - 9
131 - DCOS  Cosine     - 9
132 - DTAN  Tangent     - 9
133 - DASIN  Arc Sine     - 9
134 - DACOS  Arc Cosine     - 9
135 - DATAN  Arc Tangent     - 9
172 - DADDR  Floating point addition     - 13
173 - DSUBR  Floating point subtraction     - 13
174 - DMULR  Floating point multiplication     - 13
175 - DDIVR  Floating point division     - 13

Additional Instruction
Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SA2 SX2 SE 16-bit 32-bit
EX2
143 DELAY -  Delay      3 -
144 GPWM - - General PWM output      7 -
145 FTC - Fuzzy Temperature Control V3.22 V2.66 V2.66 7 -
147 SWAP DSWAP  Byte swap      3 5
Reading the data from the
148 MEMR -   -   - 7 -
file register
Writing the data into the file
149 MEMW -   -   - 7 -
register
154 RAND DRAND  Random number      7 13

3-28
 3. Instruction Set

Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS

API PULSE Function ES2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SA2 SX2 SE 16-bit 32-bit
EX2
Mask and combine
168 MVM DMVM       7 13
designated Bits
176 MMOV –  16-bit→32-bit Conversion      5 –
177 GPS - - GPS data receiving     - 5 -
178 - DSPA - Solar cell positioning     - – 9
179 WSUM DWSUM  Sum of multiple devices      7 13
Proportional value
202 SCAL -       9 -
calculation
Parameter proportional value
203 SCLP DSCLP       9 13
calculation
205 CMPT DCMPT  Compare table      9 17
Catch speed and
207 CSFO - -     - 7 -
proportional output

Positioning Control
Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
155 - DABSR - Absolute position read     - 13
156 - DZRN - Zero return     - 17
157 - DPLSV Adjustable speed pulse output     - 13
158 - DDRVI - Relative position control     - 17
159 - DDRVA - Absolute position control     - 17
2-Axis Relative Point to Point
191 - DPPMR -  -   - 17
Motion
2-Axis Absolute Point to Point
192 - DPPMA -  -   - 17
Motion
2-Axis Relative Position Arc
193 - DCIMR -  -   - 17
Interpolation
2-Axis Absolute Position Arc
194 - DCIMA -  -   - 17
Interpolation
Single-Axis pulse output by
195 - DPTPO -     - 13
table
197 - DCLLM - Close loop position control     - 17
198 - DVSPO - Variable speed pulse output     - 17
199 - DICF  Immediately change frequency     - 13

Real Time Calendar

Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
160 TCMP -  Time compare     11 -
161 TZCP -  Time Zone Compare     9 -
162 TADD -  Time addition     7 -
163 TSUB -  Time subtraction     7 -

3-29
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS

API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
166 TRD -  Time read     3 -
167 TWR -  Time write     3 -
169 HOUR DHOUR - Hour meter     7 13

Gray Code
Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
170 GRY DGRY  BIN → Gray Code     5 9
171 GBIN DGBIN  Gray Code → BIN     5 9

Matrix Operation
Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
180 MAND -  Matrix AND     9 -
181 MOR -  Matrix OR     9 -
182 MXOR -  Matrix XOR     9 -
183 MXNR -  Matrix XNR     9 -
184 MINV -  Matrix inverse     7 -
185 MCMP -  Matrix compare     9 -
186 MBRD -  Matrix bit read     7 -
187 MBWR -  Matrix bit write     7 -
188 MBS -  Matrix bit shift     7 -
189 MBR -  Matrix bit rotate     7 -
190 MBC -  Matrix bit status count     7 -

Contact Type Logic Operation

Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
215 LD& DLD& - S1 & S2     5 9
216 LD| DLD| - S1 | S2     5 9
217 LD^ DLD^ - S1 ^ S2     5 9
218 AND& DAND& - S1 & S2     5 9
219 AND| DAND| - S1 | S2     5 9
220 AND^ DAND^ - S1 ^ S2     5 9
221 OR& DOR& - S1 & S2     5 9
222 OR| DOR| - S1 | S2     5 9
223 OR^ DOR^ - S1 ^ S2     5 9

3-30
 3. Instruction Set

Contact Type Comparison

Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
224 LD= DLD= - S1 = S2     5 9
225 LD> DLD> - S1 > S2     5 9
226 LD< DLD< - S1 < S2     5 9
228 LD<> DLD<> - S1 ≠ S2     5 9
229 LD<= DLD<= - S1 ≦ S2     5 9
230 LD>= DLD>= - S1 ≧ S2     5 9
232 AND= DAND= - S1 = S2     5 9
233 AND> DAND> - S1 > S2     5 9
234 AND< DAND< - S1 < S2     5 9
236 AND<> DAND<> - S1 ≠ S2     5 9
237 AND<= DAND<= - S1 ≦ S2     5 9
238 AND>= DAND>= - S1 ≧ S2     5 9
240 OR= DOR= - S1 = S2     5 9
241 OR> DOR> - S1 > S2     5 9
242 OR< DOR< - S1 < S2     5 9
244 OR<> DOR<> - S1 ≠ S2     5 9
245 OR<= DOR<= - S1 ≦ S2     5 9
246 OR>= DOR>= - S1 ≧ S2     5 9
296 LDZ> DLDZ> - | S1 - S2 | > | S3 |     7 13
297 LDZ>= DLDZ>= - | S1 - S2 | ≧ | S3 |     7 13
298 LDZ< DLDZ< - | S1 - S2 | < | S3 |     7 13
299 LDZ<= DLDZ<= - | S1 - S2 | ≦ | S3 |     7 13
300 LDZ= DLDZ= - | S1 - S2 | = | S3 |     7 13
301 LDZ<> DLDZ<> - | S1 - S2 | ≠ | S3 |     7 13
302 ANDZ> DANDZ> - | S1 - S2 | > | S3 |     7 13
303 ANDZ>= DANDZ>= - | S1 - S2 | ≧ | S3 |     7 13
304 ANDZ< DANDZ< - | S1 - S2 | < | S3 |     7 13
305 ANDZ<= DANDZ<= - | S1 - S2 | ≦ | S3 |     7 13
306 ANDZ= DANDZ= - | S1 - S2 | = | S3 |     7 13
307 ANDZ<> DANDZ<> - | S1 - S2 | ≠ | S3 |     7 13
308 ORZ> DORZ> - | S1 - S2 | > | S3 |     7 13
309 ORZ>= DORZ>= - | S1 - S2 | ≧ | S3 |     7 13
310 ORZ< DORZ< - | S1 - S2 | < | S3 |     7 13
311 ORZ<= DORZ<= - | S1 - S2 | ≦ | S3 |     7 13
312 ORZ= DORZ= - | S1 - S2 | = | S3 |     7 13
313 ORZ<> DORZ<> - | S1 - S2 | ≠ | S3 |     7 13

Specific Bit Control

Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
266 BOUT DBOUT - Output specified bit of a word     5 9

3-31
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS

API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
267 BSET DBSET - Set ON specified bit of a word     5 9
268 BRST DBRST - Reset specified bit of a word     5 9
269 BLD DBLD - Load NO contact by specified bit     5 9
270 BLDI DBLDI - Load NC contact by specified bit     5 9
Connect NO contact in series by
271 BAND DBAND -     5 9
specified bit
Connect NC contact in series by
272 BANI DBANI -     5 9
specified bit
Connect NO contact in parallel
273 BOR DBOR -     5 9
by specified bit
Connect NC contact in parallel
274 BORI DBORI -     5 9
by specified bit

Floating-Point Contact Type Comparison

Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function ES2 SA2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
EX2 SE
275 - FLD= - S1 = S2     - 9
276 - FLD> - S1 > S2     - 9
277 - FLD< - S1 < S2     - 9
278 - FLD<> - S1 ≠ S2     - 9
279 - FLD<= - S1 ≦ S2     - 9
280 - FLD>= - S1 ≧ S2     - 9
280 - FAND= - S1 = S2     - 9
282 - FAND> - S1 > S2     - 9
283 - FAND< - S1 < S2     - 9
284 - FAND<> - S1 ≠ S2     - 9
285 - FAND<= - S1 ≦ S2     - 9
286 - FAND>= - S1 ≧ S2     - 9
287 - FOR= - S1 = S2     - 9
288 - FOR> - S1 > S2     - 9
289 - FOR< - S1 < S2     - 9
290 - FOR<> - S1 ≠ S2     - 9
291 - FOR<= - S1 ≦ S2     - 9
292 - FOR>= - S1 ≧ S2     - 9

Delta Special CANopen Communication Instructions

Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS
API PULSE Function SA2
16 bits 32 bits ES2-C SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
SE
Initializing the servos for CANopen
328 INITC - -  - - - 3 -
communication

329 ASDON - - Servo-ON and servo-OFF  - - - 5 -

3-32
 3. Instruction Set

Mnemonic Applicable to STEPS

API PULSE Function SA2
16 bits 32 bits ES2-C SS2 SX2 16-bit 32-bit
SE
Setting the acceleration time and
330 CASD - -  - - - 7 -
deceleration time for a servo

331 - DDRVIC - Servo relative position control  - - - - 13

332 - DDRVAC - Servo absolute position control  - - - - 13

333 PLSVC DPLSVC - Servo speed control  - - - 5 9

334 ZRNC DZRNC - Homing  - - - 7 13

Writing and reading CANopen

335 COPWL DCOPWL -  - - - 9 17
communication data

336 RSTD - - Sending Reset or NMT command  - - - 9 -

338 EMER - - Reading Emergency message  - - - 11 -

Setting the homing mode for Delta
339 ZRNM - -  - - - 9 -
servo drive
User-defined CAN communication
340 CANRS - -  - - - 11 -
sending and receiving
Writing and reading CANopen
342 COPRW - -  - - - 13 -
communication data

3.7 Numerical List of Instructions (in alphabetic order)

Mnemonic PULSE Function Applicable to STEPS

API ES2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SA2 SX2 SE 16-bit 32-bit
EX2
87 ABS DABS  Absolute value      3 5
62 ABSD DABSD - Absolute drum sequencer      9 17
20 ADD DADD  Addition      7 13
66 ALT -  Alternate state      3 -
218 AND& DAND& - S1 & S2      5 9
220 AND^ DAND^ - S1 ^ S2      5 9
219 AND| DAND| - S1 | S2      5 9
234 AND< DAND< - S1 < S2      5 9
237 AND<= DAND<= - S1 ≦ S2      5 9
236 AND<> DAND<> - S1 ≠ S2      5 9
232 AND= DAND= - S1 = S2      5 9
233 AND> DAND> - S1 > S2      5 9
238 AND>= DAND>= - S1 ≧ S2      5 9
Falling-edge series
93 ANDF - -      3 -
connection
Rising-edge series
92 ANDP - -      3 -
connection
302 ANDZ> DANDZ> - | S1 - S2 | > | S3 |      7 13
303 ANDZ>= DANDZ>= - | S1 - S2 | ≧ | S3 |      7 13
304 ANDZ< DANDZ< - | S1 - S2 | < | S3 |      7 13
305 ANDZ<= DANDZ<= - | S1 - S2 | ≦ | S3 |      7 13

3-33
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Mnemonic PULSE Function Applicable to STEPS

API ES2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SA2 SX2 SE 16-bit 32-bit
EX2
306 ANDZ= DANDZ= - | S1 - S2 | = | S3 |      7 13
307 ANDZ<> DANDZ<> - | S1 - S2 | ≠ | S3 |      7 13
47 ANR -  Annunciator Reset      1 -
46 ANS - - Timed Annunciator Set      7 -
75 ARWS - - Arrow switch -     9 -
76 ASC - - ASCII code conversion -     11 -
82 ASCII -  Convert HEX to ASCII      7 -
329 ASDON - - Servo-ON and servo-OFF ES2-C - - - - 5 -
206 ASDRW - - ASDA servo drive R/W      7 -
258 ATMR - - Contact type timer      5 -
Connect NO contact in
271 BAND DBAND -      5 9
series by specified bit
Connect NC contact in
272 BANI DBANI -      5 9
series by specified bit
18 BCD DBCD  Convert BIN to BCD      5 9
19 BIN DBIN  Convert BCD to BIN      5 9
Load NO contact by
269 BLD DBLD -      5 9
specified bit
Load NC contact by
270 BLDI DBLDI -      5 9
specified bit
15 BMOV -  Block move      7 -
44 BON DBON  Check specified bit status      7 13
Connect NO contact in
273 BOR DBOR -      5 9
parallel by specified bit
Connect NC contact in
274 BORI DBORI -      5 9
parallel by specified bit
Output specified bit of a
266 BOUT DBOUT -      5 9
word
268 BRST DBRST - Reset specified bit of a word      5 9
Set ON specified bit of a
267 BSET DBSET -      5 9
word
01 CALL -  Call subroutine      3 -
User-defined CAN - - -
340 CANRS - - communication sending and ES2-C - 11 -
receiving
Setting the acceleration time - - -
330 CASD - - and deceleration time for a ES2-C - 7 -
servo
84 CCD -  Check code      7 -
00 CJ -  Conditional jump      3 -
14 CML DCML  Complement      5 9
10 CMP DCMP  Compare      7 13
205 CMPT DCMPT  Compare table      9 -
97 CNT DCNT - Counter      4 6
Writing and reading - - -
342 COPRW - - CANopen communication ES2-C - 13 -
data
Writing multiple CANopen - - -
335 COPWL DCOPWL - ES2-C - 9 17
parameter values
108 CRC -  CRC checksum      7 -
207 CSFO - - Catch speed and     - 7 -

3-34
 3. Instruction Set

Mnemonic PULSE Function Applicable to STEPS

API ES2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SA2 SX2 SE 16-bit 32-bit
EX2
proportional output
25 DEC DDEC  Decrement      3 5
41 DECO -  Decode      7 -
143 DELAY -  Delay      3 -
05 DI - - Disable interrupt      1 -
23 DIV DDIV  Division      7 13
115 DIV16 DIV32  16-bit/32-bit Binary Division      7 13
DMV Communication - - -
295 DMVRW - - -  9 -
Command
72 DSW - - DIP Switch      9 -
68 DTM -  Data transform and move      9 -
04 EI - - Enable interrupt      1 -
Reading Emergency - - -
338 EMER - - ES2-C - 11 -
message
42 ENCO -  Encode      7 -
113 ETHRW - Ethernet communication ES2-E -    9 -
Self-defined Ethernet
337 ETHRS - - ES2-E -    13 -
communication Command
The end of the main
06 FEND - - program      1 -
(First end)
49 FLT DFLT  Floating point      5 9
16 FMOV DFMOV  Fill move      7 13
08 FOR - - Start of a For-Next Loop      3 -
Read CR data from special
78 FROM DFROM       9 17
modules
145 FTC - - Fuzzy Temperature Control V3.22 - V2.66 V2.66 - 7 -
102 FWD - - Forward Operation of VFD      7 –
171 GBIN DGBIN  Gray Code → BIN      5 9
177 GPS - - GPS data receiving     - 5 -
144 GPWM - - General PWM output      7 -
170 GRY DGRY  BIN → Gray Code      5 9
83 HEX -  Convert ASCII to HEX      7 -
71 HKY DHKY - Hexadecimal key input      9 17
169 HOUR DHOUR - Hour meter      7 13
24 INC DINC  Increment      3 5
Incremental drum
63 INCD - -      9 -
sequencer
Initializing the servos for - - -
328 INITC - - ES2-C - 3 -
CANopen communication
129 INT DINT  Float to integer      5 9
98 INV - - Inverse operation      1 -
03 IRET - - Interrupt return      1 -
60 IST - - Initial state      7 -
215 LD& DLD& - S1 & S2      5 9
217 LD^ DLD^ - S1 ^ S2      5 9
216 LD| DLD| - S1 | S2      5 9

3-35
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Mnemonic PULSE Function Applicable to STEPS

API ES2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SA2 SX2 SE 16-bit 32-bit
EX2
226 LD< DLD< - S1 < S2      5 9
229 LD<= DLD<= - S1 ≦ S2      5 9
228 LD<> DLD<> - S1 ≠ S2      5 9
224 LD= DLD= - S1 = S2      5 9
225 LD> DLD> - S1 > S2      5 9
230 LD>= DLD>= - S1 ≧ S2      5 9
Falling–edge detection
91 LDF - -      3 -
operation
Rising–edge detection
90 LDP - -      3 -
operation
296 LDZ> DLDZ> - | S1 - S2 | ＞ | S3 |      7 13
297 LDZ>= DLDZ>= - | S1 - S2 | ≧ | S3 |      7 13
298 LDZ< DLDZ< - | S1 - S2 | ＜ | S3 |      7 13
299 LDZ<= DLDZ<= - | S1 - S2 | ≦ | S3 |      7 13
300 LDZ= DLDZ= - | S1 - S2 | ＝ | S3 |      7 13
301 LDZ<> DLDZ<> - | S1 - S2 | ≠ | S3 |      7 13
107 LRC -  LRC checksum      7 -
180 MAND -  Matrix AND      9 -
190 MBC -  Matrix bit status count      7 -
189 MBR -  Matrix bit rotate      7 -
186 MBRD -  Matrix bit read      7 -
188 MBS -  Matrix bit shift      7 -
187 MBWR -  Matrix bit write      7 -
185 MCMP -  Matrix compare      9 -
45 MEAN DMEAN  Mean      7 13
Reading the data from the
148 MEMR   -   - 7 -
file register
Writing the data into the file
149 MEMW   -   - 7 -
register
184 MINV -  Matrix inverse      7 -
176 MMOV -  16-bit→32-bit Conversion      5 -
100 MODRD - - Read Modbus data      7 -
150 MODRW - - MODBUS Read/ Write      11 -
101 MODWR - - Write Modbus Data      7 -
181 MOR -  Matrix OR      9 -
12 MOV DMOV  Move      5 9
52 MTR - - Input Matrix      9 -
22 MUL DMUL  Multiplication      7 13
16-bit/32-bit Binary
114 MUL16 MUL32       7 13
Multiplication
Mask and combine
168 MVM DMVM       7 13
designated Bits
183 MXNR -  Matrix XNR      9 -
182 MXOR -  Matrix XOR      9 -
29 NEG DNEG  2’s Complement (Negation)      3 5

3-36
 3. Instruction Set

Mnemonic PULSE Function Applicable to STEPS

API ES2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SA2 SX2 SE 16-bit 32-bit
EX2
09 NEXT - - End of a For-Next Loop      1 -
221 OR& DOR& - S1 & S2      5 9
223 OR^ DOR^ - S1 ^ S2      5 9
222 OR| DOR| - S1 | S2      5 9
242 OR< DOR< - S1 < S2      5 9
245 OR<= DOR<= - S1 ≦ S2      5 9
244 OR<> DOR<> - S1 ≠ S2      5 9
240 OR= DOR= - S1 = S2      5 9
241 OR> DOR> - S1 > S2      5 9
246 OR>= DOR>= - S1 ≧ S2      5 9
Falling-edge parallel
95 ORF - -      3 -
connection
Rising-edge parallel
94 ORP - -      3 -
connection
308 ORZ> DORZ> - | S1 - S2 | ＞ | S3 |      7 13
309 ORZ>= DORZ>= - | S1 - S2 | ≧ | S3 |      7 13
310 ORZ< DORZ< - | S1 - S2 | ＜ | S3 |      7 13
311 ORZ<= DORZ<= - | S1 - S2 | ≦ | S3 |      7 13
312 ORZ= DORZ= - | S1 - S2 | ＝ | S3 |      7 13
313 ORZ<> DORZ<> - | S1 - S2 | ≠ | S3 |      7 13
88 PID DPID - PID control      9 17
99 PLF - - Falling-edge output      3 -
89 PLS - - Rising-edge output      3 -
59 PLSR DPLSR - Pulse ramp      9 17
333 PLSVC DPLSVC - Servo speed control ES2-C - - - - 5 9
57 PLSY DPLSY - Pulse output      7 13
77 PR - - Print (ASCII code output)      5 -
81 PRUN DPRUN  Parallel run      5 9
58 PWM - - Pulse width modulation      7 -
67 RAMP DRAMP - Ramp variable value      9 17
154 RAND DRAND  Random number      7 13
33 RCL DRCL  Rotate left with carry      5 9
32 RCR DRCR  Rotate right with carry      5 9
105 RDST - - Read VFD Status      5 –
50 REF -  Refresh      5 -
51 REFF -  Refresh and filter adjust      3 -
103 REV - - Reverse Operation of VFD      7 –
31 ROL DROL  Rotate left      5 9
30 ROR DROR  Rotate right      5 9
80 RS - - Serial communication      9 -
Sending Reset or NMT
336 RSTD - - ES2-C - - - - 9 -
command
106 RSTEF - - Reset Abnormal VFD      5 –
Proportional value
202 SCAL -       9 -
calculation

3-37
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Mnemonic PULSE Function Applicable to STEPS

API ES2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SA2 SX2 SE 16-bit 32-bit
EX2
Parameter proportional
203 SCLP DSCLP       7 13
value calculation
73 SEGD -  7-segment decoder      5 -
74 SEGL - - 7-segment with latch      7 -
61 SER DSER  Search a data stack      9 17
39 SFRD -  Shift register read      7 -
35 SFTL -  Bit shift left      9 -
34 SFTR -  Bit shift right      9 -
38 SFWR -  Shift register write      7 -
13 SMOV -  Shift move      11 -
69 SORT DSORT - Data sort      11 21
56 SPD - - Speed detection      7 -
48 SQR DSQR  Square Root      5 9
02 SRET - - Subroutine return      1 -
65 STMR - - Special timer      7 -
104 STOP - - Stop VFD      7 –
21 SUB DSUB  Subtraction      7 13
43 SUM DSUM  Sum of Active bits      5 9
147 SWAP DSWAP  Byte swap      3 5
162 TADD -  Time addition      7 -
160 TCMP -  Time compare      11 -
70 TKY DTKY - 10-key input      7 13
96 TMR - - Timer      4 -
Write CR data into special
79 TO DTO       9 17
modules
166 TRD -  Time read      3 -
163 TSUB -  Time subtraction      7 -
64 TTMR - - Teaching timer      5 -
167 TWR -  Time write      3 -
161 TZCP -  Time Zone Compare      9 -
85 VRRD -  Volume read - -   - 5 -
86 VRSC -  Volume scale read - -   - 5 -
26 WAND DAND  Logical Word AND      7 13
07 WDT -  Watchdog timer refresh      1 -
27 WOR DOR  Logical Word OR      7 13
37 WSFL -  Word shift left      9 -
36 WSFR -  Word shift right      9 -
179 WSUM DWSUM  Sum of multiple devices      7 13
28 WXOR DXOR  Logical XOR      7 13
17 XCH DXCH  Exchange      5 9
Setup for comparing the
315 XCMP - - inputs of multiple work ES2-C - - - - 11 -
stations
Comparing the outputs of
316 YOUT - - ES2-C - - - - 9 -
multiple work stations

3-38
 3. Instruction Set

Mnemonic PULSE Function Applicable to STEPS

API ES2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SA2 SX2 SE 16-bit 32-bit
EX2
11 ZCP DZCP  Zone compare      9 17
334 ZRNC DZRNC - Homing ES2-C - - - - 7 13
Setting the homing mode for
339 ZRNM - - ES2-C - - - - 9 -
Delta servo drive
40 ZRST -  Zone reset      5 -
155 - DABSR - Absolute position read      - 13
134 - DACOS  Arc Cosine      - 9
172 - DADDR  Floating point addition      - 13
133 - DASIN  Arc Cosine      - 9
135 - DATAN  Arc Tangent      - 9
2-Axis Absolute Position Arc
194 - DCIMA -  -    - 17
Interpolation
2-Axis Relative Position Arc
193 - DCIMR -  -    - 17
Interpolation
197 - DCLLM - Close loop position control      - 17
131 - DCOS  Cosine      - 9
117 - DDEG  Radian → Degree      - 9
175 - DDIVR  Floating point division      - 13
159 - DDRVA - Absolute position control      - 17
Servo absolute position
332 - DDRVAC - ES2-C - - - - - 13
control
158 - DDRVI - Relative position control      - 17
Servo relative position - - -
331 - DDRVIC - ES2-C - - 13
control
120 - DEADD  Floating point addition      - 13
118 - DEBCD  Float to scientific conversion      - 9
119 - DEBIN  Scientific to float conversion      - 9
110 - DECMP  Floating point compare      - 13
123 - DEDIV  Floating point division      - 13
122 - DEMUL  Floating point multiplication      - 13
127 - DESQR  Floating point square root      - 9
121 - DESUB  Floating point subtraction      - 13
124 - DEXP  Float exponent operation      - 9
111 - DEZCP  Floating point zone compare      - 17
54 - DHSCR - High speed counter RESET      - 13
53 - DHSCS - High speed counter SET      - 13
55 - DHSZ - High speed zone compare      - 17
Immediately change
199 - DICF       - 13
frequency
Float natural logarithm
125 - DLN       - 9
operation
126 - DLOG  Float logarithm operation      - 13
112 - DMOVR  Move floating point data      - 9
174 - DMULR  Floating point multiplication      - 13
Adjustable speed pulse
157 - DPLSV -      - 13
output

3-39
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Mnemonic PULSE Function Applicable to STEPS

API ES2
16 bits 32 bits SS2 SA2 SX2 SE 16-bit 32-bit
EX2
Floating point power
128 - DPOW       - 13
operation
2-Axis Absolute Point to
192 - DPPMA -  -    - 17
Point Motion
2-Axis Relative Point to
191 - DPPMR -  -    - 17
Point Motion
Single-Axis pulse output by
195 - DPTPO -      - 13
table
116 - DRAD  Degree → Radian      - 9
130 - DSIN  Sine      - 9
178 - DSPA - Solar cell positioning     - – 9
Floating point
173 - DSUBR       - 13
subtraction
132 - DTAN  Tangent      - 9
198 - DVSPO - Variable speed pulse output      - 17
156 - DZRN - Zero return      - 17
283 - FAND< - S1 < S2      - 9
285 - FAND<= - S1 ≦ S2      - 9
284 - FAND<> - S1 ≠ S2      - 9
280 - FAND= - S1 = S2      - 9
282 - FAND> - S1 > S2      - 9
286 - FAND>= - S1 ≧ S2      - 9
277 - FLD< - S1 < S2      - 9
279 - FLD<= - S1 ≦ S2      - 9
278 - FLD<> - S1 ≠ S2      - 9
275 - FLD= - S1 = S2      - 9
276 - FLD> - S1 > S2      - 9
280 - FLD>= - S1 ≧ S2      - 9
289 - FOR< - S1 < S2      - 9
291 - FOR<= - S1 ≦ S2      - 9
290 - FOR<> - S1 ≠ S2      - 9
287 - FOR= - S1 = S2      - 9
288 - FOR> - S1 > S2      - 9
292 - FOR>= - S1 ≧ S2      - 9

3-40
 3. Instruction Set

3.8 Detailed Instruction Explanation

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
00 CJ P Conditional Jump ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

OP Range Program Steps

P0~P255 CJ, CJP: 3 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: The destination pointer P of the conditional jump.
Explanations:
1. If users need to skip a particular part of PLC program in order to shorten the scan time and
execute dual outputs, CJ instruction or CJP instruction can be adopted.
2. When the program designated by pointer P is prior to CJ instruction, WDT timeout will occur
and PLC will stop running. Please use it carefully.
3. CJ instruction can designate the same pointer P repeatedly. However, CJ and CALL cannot
designate the same pointer P; otherwise operation error will occur
4. Actions of all devices while conditional jump is being executed:
a) Y, M and S remain their previous status before the conditional jump takes place.
b) 10ms and 100ms timer that is executing stops.
c) Timer T192 ~ T199 that execute the subroutine program will continue and the output
contact executes normally.
d) The high-speed counter that is executing the counting continues counting and the output
contact executes normally.
e) General counters stop executing.
f) If timer is reset before CJ instruction executes, the timer will still be in the reset status
while CJ instruction is being executed.
g) The application instructions that are being executed, i.e. DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ, SPD,
PLSY, PWM, PLSR, PLSV, DRVI, DRVA, continue being executed.

3-41
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Program example 1:
When X0 = ON, the program will skip from address 0 to N (Pointer P1) automatically and keep on
executing. Instructions between address 0 and N will be skipped..
When X0 = OFF, program flow will proceed with the row immediately after the CJ instruction.
(CJ instruction)
P***
X0
0 CJ P1

X1
Y1
X2
N P1 Y2

Program example 2:
1. The instruction CJ between the instruction MC and the instruction MCR can be used in the five
conditions below.
a). The execution of the program jumps from the part of the program outside one MC/MCR
loop to the part of the program outside another MC/MCR loop.
b). The execution of the program jumps from the part of the program outside the MC/MCR
loop to the part of the program inside the MC/MCR loop.
c). The execution of the program jumps from the part of the program inside the MC/MCR loop
to the part of the program inside the MC/MCR loop.
d). The execution of the program jumps from the part of the program inside the MC/MCR loop
to the part of the program outside the MC/MCR loop.
e). The execution of the program jumps from the part of the program inside one the MC/MCR
loop to the part of the program inside another the MC/MCR loop.
X0
MC N0
X2
CJ P0
X3
CJ P1
X1
MC N1
M1000
P1 Y1

MCR N1
M1000
P0 Y0

MCR N0

3-42
 3. Instruction Set

2. When the instruction MC is executed, the previous state of the switch contact is put onto the
top of the stack inside the PLC. The stack is controlled by the PLC, and can not be changed by
users. When the instruction MCR is executed, the previous state of the switch contact is
popped from the top of the stack. Under the conditions listed in (b), (d), and (e) above, the
number of times the items are pushed onto the stack may be different from the number of
times the items are popped from the stack. When this situation occurs, at most 32 items can
be pushed onto the stack, and the items can be popped form the stack until the stack is empty.
Therefore, when CJ or CJP is used with MC and MCR, users have to be careful of the pushing
of the item onto the stack and the popping of the item from the stack.
Program example 3:
The table explains the device status in the ladder diagram below.
Contact state Contact state Output coil state
Device
before CJ execution during CJ execution during CJ execution
M1, M2, M3
M1, M2, M3 OFF Y1 *1, M20, S1 OFF
OFF→ON
Y, M, S
M1, M2, M3
M1, M2, M3 ON Y1 *1, M20, S1 ON
ON→OFF
M4 OFF M4 OFF→ON Timer is not activated
10ms,
Timer T0 immediately stops and
100ms
M4 ON M4 ON→OFF is latched. When M0 ON  OFF,
Timer*2
T0 will be reset.
1ms,10ms, M6 OFF M6 OFF→ON Timer T240 is not activated
100ms Timer T240 immediately stops
accumulative M6 ON M6 ON→OFF and is latched. When M0 ON 
Timer OFF, T240 will still be latched.
M10 is ON/OFF
M7, M10 OFF Counter C0 stops
triggered
C0~C234 *3 Counter C0 stops and latched.
M7 OFF, M10 is M10 is ON/OFF
When M0 is OFF, C0 resumes
ON/OFF triggered triggered
counting.
Application instructions will not
M11 OFF M11 OFF→ON
be executed.
Application The skipped application
instruction instruction will not be executed
M11 ON M11 ON→OFF
but API 53~59, API 157~159
keep executing.
*1: Y1 is dual output. When M0 is OFF, it is controlled by M1. When M0 is ON, M12 will control Y1
*2: When timer that subroutine used (T184~T199) executes first and then CJ instruction is
executed, the timer will keep counting. After the timer reaches the set value, output contact of
timer will be ON.
*3: When high-speed counters (C235~C254) executes first and then CJ instruction is executed,
the counter will keep counting and its associated output status remains.

3-43
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Y1 is a dual output. When M0 = OFF, Y1 is controlled by M1. M0 = ON, Y1 is controlled by M12.

M0
CJ P0
M1
Y1
M2
M20
M3
S1
M4
TMR T0 K10
M5
RST T240
M6
TMR T240 K1000
M7
RST C0
M10
CNT C0 K20
M11
MOV K3 D0
M0
P0 CJ P63
M12
Y1
M13
P63 RST T240

RST C0

RST D0

END

3-44
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
01 CALL P Call Subroutine ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

OP Valid Range Program Steps

P0~P255 CALL, CALLP: 3 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: The destination pointer P of the call subroutine.
Explanations:
1. When the CALL instruction is active it forces the program to run the subroutine associated with
the called pointer.
2. A CALL instruction must be used in conjunction with FEND (API 06) and SRET (API 02)
instructions.
3. The program jumps to the subroutine pointer (located after an FEND instruction) and
processes the contents until an SRET instruction is encountered. This forces the program
flow back to the line of ladder immediately following the original CALL instruction.
Points to note:
1. Subroutines must be placed after FEND instruction.
2. Subroutines must end with SRET instruction.
3. CALL pointers and CJ instruction pointers are not allowed to coincide.
4. CALL instructions can call the same CALL subroutine any number of times.
5. Subroutines can be nested 5 levels including the initial CALL instruction. (If entering the six
levels, the subroutine won’t be executed.)

3-45
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Function Controllers

SA2
02 SRET Subroutine Return ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

OP Descriptions Program Steps

No contact to drive the instruction is required SRET: 1 step
N/A Automatically returns program execution to the address
after CALL instruction in O100.
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Explanations:
SRET indicates the end of subroutine program. The subroutine will return to main program and
begin execution with the instruction after the CALL instruction.
Program example 1:
When X0 = ON, the CALL instruction will jump to P2 and run the subroutine. With the execution of
the SRET instruction, it will jump back to address 24 and continue the execution.

X0
20 CALL P2 Call subroutine P2
X1
24
Y0

FEND
M1
P2 Y1

Subroutine
M2
Y2

SRET Subroutine return

Program example 2:
1. When the rising-edge of X20 is triggered, CALL P10 instruction will transfer execution to
subroutine P10.
2. When X21 is ON, execute CALL P11, jump to and run subroutine P11.
3. When X22 is ON, execute CALL P12, jump to and run subroutine P12.
4. When X23 is ON, execute CALL P13, jump to and run subroutine P13.
5. When X24 is ON, execute CALL P14, jump to and run subroutine P14. When the SRET
instruction is reached, jump back to the last P subroutine to finish the remaining instructions.
6. The execution of subroutines will go backwards to the subroutine of upper level until SRET
instruction in P10 subroutine is executed. After this program execution will return to the main
program.

3-46
 3. Instruction Set

X0 X2
INC D0 P12 INC D30

Y0 Y20
X20 X23
CALL P10 CALL P13
Main Subroutine
X0 Program X2
INC D1 INC D31

Y1 Y21

FEND SRET
X2 X2
P10 INC D10 P13 INC D40

Y2 Y22
X21 X24
CALL P11 CALL P14
Subroutine Subroutine
X2 X2
INC D11 INC D41

Y3 Y23

SRET SRET
X2 X2
P11 INC D20 P14 INC D50

Y4 Y24
X22 Subroutine
CALL P12 SRET
Subroutine
X2
INC D21 END

Y5

SRET

3-47
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Function Controllers

SA2
03 IRET Interrupt Return ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

OP Descriptions Program Steps

No contact to drive the instruction is required. IRET: 1 step
N/A IRET ends the processing of an interrupt subroutine and
returns execution back to the main program
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE

API Mnemonic Function Controllers

SA2
04 EI Enable Interrupt ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

OP Descriptions Program Steps

No contact to drive the instruction is required. EI: 1 step
Enables Interrupts, explanation of this instruction also
N/A coincides with the explanation of the DI (disable interrupts
instruction), see the DI instruction for more information.
M1050~M1059
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE

API Mnemonic Function Controllers

SA2
05 DI Disable Interrupt ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

OP Descriptions Program Steps

No contact to drive the instruction is required. DI: 1 step
DI instruction disables PLC to accept interrupts.
When the special auxiliary relay M1050 ~ M1059 for
N/A
disabling interruption is driven, the corresponding
interruption request will not be executed even in the range
allowed for interruptions.
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Explanations:
1. EI instruction allows interrupting subroutine in the program, e.g. external interruption, timer
interruption, and high-speed counter interruption.
2. In the program, interruption subroutines are enabled between EI and DI instructions. If there is
no section requires to be interrupt-disabled, DI instruction can be omitted.

3-48
 3. Instruction Set

3. Interrupt subroutines must be placed after the FEND instruction.

4. Other interrupts are not allowed during execution of a current interrupt routine.
5. When many interruptions occur, the priority is given to the firstly executed interruption. If
several interruptions occur at the same time, the priority is given to the interruption with the
smaller pointer No.
6. Any interrupt request occurring between DI and EI instructions will not be executed
immediately. The interrupt will be memorized and executed when the next EI occurs.
7. When using the interruption pointer, DO NOT repeatedly use the high-speed counter driven by
the same X input contact.
8. When immediate I/O is required during the interruption, write REF instruction in the program to
update the status of I/O
Points to note:
Interrupt pointers (I):
a) External interrupts: 8 points including (I000/I001, X0), (I100/I101, X1), (I200/I201, X2),
(I300/I301, X3), (I400/I401, X4), (I500/I501, X5), (I600/I601, X6) and (I700/I701, X7) (00
designates interruption in falling-edge, 01 designates interruption in rising-edge)
Timer interrupts: 2 points including I605~I699 and I705~I799 (Timer resolution = 1ms), Timer
interrupts: 1 point including I805~I899 (Timer resolution = 0.1ms), available for SE, ES2-E, for
other modules, this function is available for modules with firmware V2.00 or later.
b) High-speed counter interrupts: 8 points including I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, I070, and
I080. (used with API 53 DHSCS instruction to generate interrupt signals)
c) Communication interrupts: 3 points including I140, I150 and I160
d) Associated flags:
Flag Function
M1050 Disable external interruption I000 / I001
M1051 Disable external interruption I100 / I101
M1052 Disable external interruption I200 / I201
M1053 Disable external interruption I300 / I301
M1054 Disable external interruption I400 / I401
M1055 Disable external interruption I500 / I501, I600 / I601, I700 / I701
M1056 Disable timer interrupts I605~I699
M1057 Disable timer interrupts I705~I799 and I805~I899
M1059 Disable high-speed counter interruptions I010~I080
M1280 I000/I001 Reverse interrupt trigger pulse direction (Rising/Falling)
M1284 I400/I401 Reverse interrupt trigger pulse direction (Rising/Falling)
M1286 I600/I601 Reverse interrupt trigger pulse direction (Rising/Falling)
Note: Default setting of I000(X0) is falling-edge triggered. When M1280=ON and EI is enabled,
PLC will reverse X0 as rising-edge triggered. To reset X0 as falling-edge, reset M1280 first
and execute DI instruction. After this, X0 will be reset as falling-edge when EI is executed
again.

3-49
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Program example:
During the PLC operation, the program scans the instructions between EI and DI, if X1 or X2 are
ON, the subroutine A or B will be interruptted. When IRET is reached, the main program will
resume.

EI

X1
Y0 Enabled interrupt

DI

Disabled interrupt

EI
Enabled interrupt
FEND
M0
I 101 Y1
Interrupt subroutine A

IRET
M1
I 201 Y2
Interrupt subroutine B

IRET

3-50
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Function Controllers

SA2
06 FEND The End of The Main Program (First End) ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

OP Descriptions Program Steps

N/A No contact to drive the instruction is required. FEND: 1 step
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Explanations:
1. Use FEND instruction when the program uses either CALL instructions or interrupts. If no
CALL instruction or interrupts are used, use END instruction to end the main program.
2. The instruction functions same as END instruction in PLC operation process.
3. CALL subroutines must be placed after the FEND instruction. Each CALL subroutine must end
with the SRET instruction.
4. Interrupt subroutines must be placed after the FEND instruction. Each interrupt subroutine
must end with the IRET instruction.
5. When using the FEND instruction, an END instruction is still required, but should be placed as
the last instruction after the main program and all subroutines.
6. If several FEND instructions are in use, place the subroutine and interruption service
programs between the final FEND and END instruction.
7. When CALL instruction is executed, executing FEND before SRET will result in errors.
8. When FOR instruction is executed, executing FEND before NEXT will result in errors.

3-51
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

CJ Instruction Program Flow

The program flow The program flow when X0=On

0 EI
when X0=off, program jumps to P0
X1=off
Main program
X0
CJ P0
X1
CALL P63

Main program

DI

FEND

P0 Main program

FEND

P63 Command CALL subroutine

SRET

I301 Interrupt subroutine

IRET

END

3-52
 3. Instruction Set

CALL Instruction Program Flow

The program flow
when X0=off, 0 EI
The program flow
X1=off when X0=Off,
Main program X1=On.
X0
CJ P0
X1
CALL P63

Main program

DI

FEND

P0 Main program

FEND

P63 Command CALL subroutine

SRET

I301 Interrupt subroutine

IRET

END

3-53
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Function Controllers

SA2
07 WDT P Watchdog Timer Refresh ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

OP Descriptions Program Steps

N/A WDT, WDTP: 1 step
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Explanations:
1. WDT instruction can be used to reset the Watch Dog Timer. If the PLC scan time (from
address 0 to END or FEND instruction) is more than 200ms, the ERROR LED will flash. In this
case, users have to turn the power OFF and then ON to clear the fault. PLC will determine the
status of RUN/STOP according to RUN/STOP switch. If there is no RUN/STOP switch, PLC
will return to STOP status automatically.
2. Time to use WDT:
a) When an error occurs in the PLC system.
b) When the scan time of the program exceeds the WDT value in D1000. It can be modified
by using the following two methods.
i. Use WDT instruction
STEP0 END(FEND)
WDT

T1 T2

ii. Use the set value in D1000 (Default: 200ms) to change the time for watchdog.
Points to note:
1. When the WDT instruction is used it will operate on every program scan as long as its input
condition has been made. To force the WDT instruction to operate for only ONE scan, users
have to use the pulse (P) format of the WDT instruction, i.e. WDTP.
2. The watchdog timer has a default setting of 200ms. This time limit can be customized to users
requirement by editing the content in D1000, the wathdog timer register.

3-54
 3. Instruction Set

Program example:
If the program scan time is over 300ms, users can divide the program into 2 parts. Insert the WDT
instruction in between, making scan time of the first half and second half of the program being less
than 200ms.

300ms program

END
Dividing the program to two parts
so that both parts scan time are
less than 200ms.
150ms program

X0
WDT Watchdog timer reset

150ms program

END

3-55
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
08 FOR Start of a FOR-NEXT Loop ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F FOR: 3 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: The number of times for the loop to be repeated.

API Mnemonic Function Controllers

SA2
09 NEXT End of a FOR-NEXT Loop ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

OP Descriptions Program Steps

N/A No contact to drive the instruction is required. NEXT: 1 step
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Explanations:
1. FOR and NEXT instructions are used when loops are needed. No contact to drive the
instruction is required.
2. “N” (number of times loop is repeated) may be within the range of K1 to K32767. If the range
N ≦K1,
is N
regarded as K1.
3. An error will occur in the following conditions:
• NEXT instruction is before FOR instruction.
• FOR instruction exists but NEXT instruction does not exist..
• There is a NEXT instruction after the FEND or END instruction.
• Number of FOR instructions differs from that of NEXT instructinos.
4. FOR~NEXT loops can be nested for maximum five levels. Be careful that if there are too many
loops, the increased PLC scan time may cause timeout of watchdog timer and error. Users
can use WDT instruction to modify this problem.

3-56
 3. Instruction Set

Program example 1:
After program A has been executed for 3 times, it will resume its execution after NEXT instruction.
Program B will be executed for 4 times whenever program A is executed once. Therefore, program
B will be executed 3 × 4 = 12 times in total.

FOR K3

FOR K4
B A
NEXT

NEXT

Program example 2:
When X7 = OFF, PLC will execute the program between FOR ~ NEXT. When X7 = ON, CJ
instruction jumps to P6 and avoids executing the instructions between FOR ~ NEXT.

X7
CJ P6
M0
MOV K0 D0

FOR K3
M0
MOV D0 D1

INC D0

MEXT
X10
P6 Y10

3-57
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Program example 3:
Users can adopt CJ instruction to skip a specified FOR ~ NEXT loop. When X1 = ON, CJ
instruction executes to skip the most inner FOR ~ NEXT loop.

X0
TMR T0 K10

FOR K4X100
X0
INC D0

FOR K2
X0
INC D1

FOR K3
X0
INC D2

FOR K4
X0
WDT

INC D3
X1
CJ P0

FOR K5
X0
INC D4

NEXT

P0 NEXT

NEXT

NEXT

NEXT

END

3-58
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
10 D CMP P Compare ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F CMP, CMPP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DCMP, DCMPP: 13 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Comparison Value 1 S2: Comparison Value 2 D: Comparison result
Explanations:
1. The contents of S1 and S2 are compared and D stores the comparison result.
2. The comparison values are signed binary values. If b15=1 in 16-bit instruction or b31=1 in
32-bit instruction, the comparison will regard the value as a negative binary value.
3. Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. D, D +1, D +2 hold the comparison results,
D = ON if S1 > S2, D +1 = ON if S1 = S2, D +2 = ON if S1 < S2
4. If operand S1, S2 use index register F, only 16-bit instruction is available.
Program example:
1. If D is set as Y0, then Y0, Y1, Y2 will display the comparison results as shown below.
2. When X20 = ON, CMP instruction is executed and one of Y0, Y1, Y2 will be ON. When X20 =
OFF, CMP instruction is not executed and Y0, Y1, Y2 remain in their previous condition.

X20
CMP K10 D10 Y0
Y0
If K10>D10, Y0 = On
Y1
If K10=D10, Y1 = On

Y2
If K10<D10, Y2= On

3. Use RST or ZRST instruction to reset the comparison result.

X10 X10
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2

RST M1

RST M2

3-59
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
11 D ZCP P Zone Compare ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ZCP, ZCPP: 9 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DZCP, DZCPP: 17 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
S * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Lower bound of zone comparison S2: Upper bound of zone comparison S: Comparison
value D: Comparison result
Explanations:
1. S is compared with its lower bound S1 and upper bound S2. D stores the comparison results.
2. The comparison values are signed binary values. If b15=1 in 16-bit instruction or b31=1 in
32-bit instruction, the comparison will regard the value as a negative binary value.
3. Operand S1 should be smaller than operand S2. When S1 > S2, the instruction takes S1 as the
1st comparison value and performs normal comparison similar to CMP instruction.
4. If operand S1, S2 , and S use index register F, only 16-bit instruction is available.
5. Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. D, D +1, D +2 hold the comparison results,
D = ON if S1 > S, D +1 = ON if S1 ≦ S ≦ S2, D +2 = ON if S2 < S
Program example:
1. If D is set as M0, then M0, M1, M2 will work as the program example below.
2. When X0 = ON, ZCP instruction is driven and one of M0, M1, M2 is ON. When X0 = OFF, ZCP
instruction is not driven and M0, M1, M2 remain in the previous status.
X0
ZCP K10 K100 C10 M0
M0
If C10 < K10, M0 = On
M1
If K10 <
= C10 <
= K100, M1 = On
M2
If C10 > K100, M2 = On

3. Use RST or ZRST instruction to reset the comparison result.

X0 X0
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2

RST M1

RST M2

3-60
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
12 D MOV P Move ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MOV, MOVP: 5 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * * DMOV, DMOVP: 9 steps
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Source of data D: Destination of data
Explanations:
1. When this instruction is executed, the content of S will be moved directly to D. When this
instruction is not executed, the content of D remains unchanged
2. If operand S and D use index register F, only 16-bit instruction is applicable
Program example:
1. MOV will move a 16-bit value from the source location to the destination.
a) When X0 = OFF, the content of D0 remains unchanged. If X0 = ON, the data in K10 is
moved to D0.
b) When X1 = OFF, the content of D10 remains unchanged. If X1 = ON, the data of T0 is
moved to D10 data register.
2. DMOV will move a 32-bit value from the source location to the destination.
a) When X2 = OFF, the content of (D31, D30) and (D41, D40) remain unchanged.
b) When X2 = ON, the data of (D21, D20) is moved to (D31, D30) data register. Meanwhile,
the data of C235 is moved to (D41, D40) data register.

X0
MOV K10 D0

X1
MOV T0 D10

X2
DMOV D20 D30

DMOV C235 D40

3-61
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

Shift SA2
13 SMOV P ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
Move SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SMOV, SMOVP: 11 step
S * * * * * * * * *
m1 * *
m2 * *
D * * * * * * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Source device m1: Start digit to be moved from source device m2: Number of digits to be
moved D: Destination device n: Start digit of the destination device for the moved digits
Explanation:
1. This instruction is able to re-allocate or combine data. When the instruction is executed, m2
digits of contents starting from digit m1 (from high digit to low digit) of S will be sent to m2 digits
starting from digit n (from high digit to low digit) of D.
2. M1168 is used for designating SMOV working mode. When M1168 = ON, the instruction is in
BIN mode. When M1168 = OFF, the instruction is in BCD mode.
Points to note:
1. The range of m1: 1 – 4
2. The range of m2: 1 – m1
3. The range of n: m2 – 4

3-62
 3. Instruction Set

Program example 1:
1. When M1168 = OFF (in BCD mode) and X0 = ON, the 4th (thousand) and 3rd (hundred) digit of
the decimal value in D10 start to move to the 3rd (hundred) and 2nd (ten) digit of the decimal
value in D20. 103 and 100 of D20 remain unchanged after this instruction is executed.
2. When the BCD value exceeds the range of 0 ~ 9,999, PLC detects an operation error and will
not execute the instruction. M1067, M1068 = ON and D1067 stores the error code OE18
(hex).
M1001
M1168
X0
SMOV D10 K4 K2 D20 K3

D10(BIN 16bit)
Auto conversion
3 2 1 0
10 10 10 10 D10(BCD 4 digits)
Shift move
No variation No variation
3 2 1 0
10 10 10 10 D20(BCD 4 digits)
Auto conversion
D20(BIN 16bit)

If D10 = K1234, D20 = K5678 before execution, D10 remains unchanged and D20 = K5128
after execution.
Program example 2:
When M1168 = ON (in BIN mode) and SMOV instruction is in use, D10 and D20 will not be
converted in BCD format but be moved in BIN format (4 digits as a unit).
M1000
M1168
X0
SMOV D10 K4 K2 D20 K3

Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1

D10(BIN 16bit)

Shift move

D20(BIN 16bit)
Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1
No variation No variation

If D10 = H1234, D20 = H5678 before execution, D10 remains unchanged and D20 = H5128 after
execution.

3-63
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Program example 3:
1. This instruction can be used to combine the DIP switches connected to the input terminals
without continuous numbers.
2. Move the 2 digits of the right DIP switch (X27~X20) to the 2 digits of D2, and the 1 digit of the
DIP switch (X33~X30) to the 1st digit of D1.
3. Use SMOV instruction to move the 1st digit of D1 to the 3rd digit of D2 and combine the values
from two DIP switches into one set of value.
2 1 0
10 10 10

6 4 2

8 8 8

X33~X30 X27~X20

PLC
M1001
M1168
M1000
BIN K2X20 D2 (X20~X27)BCD, 2 digits D2(BIN)

BIN K1X30 D1 (X30~X33)BCD, 1 digit D1(BIN)

SMOV D1 K1 K1 D2 K3

3-64
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
14 D CML P Compliment ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F CML, CMLP: 5 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * * DCML, DCMLP: 9 steps
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Source of data D: Destination device
Explanations:
1. The instruction reverses the bit pattern (0→1, 1→0) of all the contents in S and sends the
contents to D.
2. If operand S and D use index register F, only 16-bit instruction is available
Program example 1:
When X10 = ON, b0 ~ b3 in D1 will be inverted and sent to Y0 ~ Y3
X20
CML D1 K1Y0

b15 b3 b2 b1 b0

D1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Symbol bit ( 0=positive, 1=negative)

0 1 0 1

No variation Transfer data

Program example 2:
The diagram below can be substituted by the instruction on the right.

X000
M0
X001
M1
X002
M2
X003 Normally ON contact
M3 M1000
CML K1X0 K1M0
X000
M0
X001
M1
X002
M2
X003
M3

3-65
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
15 BMOV P Block Move ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F BMOV, BMOVP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Start of source devices D: Start of destination devices n: Number of data to be moved
Explanations:
1. The program copies a specified block of devices to another destination. Contents in n
registers starting from S will be moved to n registers starting from D. If n exceeds the actual
number of available source devices, only the devices that fall within the valid range will be
used
2. Range of n: 1 ~ 512.
Program example 1:
When X20 = ON, the contents in registers D0 ~ D3 will be moved to the 4 registers D20 ~ D23
X20
BMOV D0 D20 K4 D0 D20
D1 D21
n=4
D2 D22
D3 D23

3-66
 3. Instruction Set

Program example 2:
Assume the bit devices KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS are designated for moving, the number of digits
of S and D has to be the same, i.e. their n has to be the same.
M1000
BMOV K1M0 K1Y0 K3 M0 Y0
M1 Y1
M2 Y2
M3 Y3

M4 Y4
M5 Y5
n=3
M6 Y6
M7 Y7

M8 Y10
M9 Y11
M10 Y12
M11 Y13

Program example 3:
In order to prevent the error which results from the overlap between the source devices and the destination

devices, the data is transferred in the following way.

1. When S > D, the BMOV instruction is processed in the order →→.

X20 1
BMOV D20 D19 K3 D20 D19
2
D21 D20
3
D22 D21

2. When S < D, it is recommended to us the API37 WSFL instruction instead of BMOV.

3-67
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
16 D FMOV P Fill Move ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F FMOV, FMOVP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * * DFMOV, DFMOVP: 13
D * * * * * *
n * * steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Source of data D: Destination of data n: Number of data to be moved
Explanations:
1. The contents in n registers starting from the device designated by S will be moved to n
registers starting from the device designated by D. If n exceeds the actual number of available
source devices, only the devices that fall within the valid range will be used
2. If operand S use index register F, only 16-bit instruction is available
3. The range of n: 1~ 512
Program example:
When X20 = ON, K10 will be moved to the 5 consecutive registers starting from D10
X20
FMOV K10 D10 K5

K10 K10 D10

K10 D11

K10 D12 n=5

K10 D13

K10 D14

3-68
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
17 D XCH P Exchange ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F XCH, XCHP: 5 steps
D1 * * * * * * * * DXCH, DXCHP: 9 steps
D2 * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
D1: Device to be exchanged 1 D2: Device to be exchanged 2
Explanations:
1. The contents in the devices designated by D1 and D2 will exchange
2. It is better to apply a pulse execution for this instruction (XCHP).
3. If operand D1 and D2 use index register F, only 16-bit instruction is available.
Program example:
When X0=OFF→ON, the contents of D20 and D40 exchange with each other.

X0
XCHP D20 D40

Before After
execution execution
D20 120 40 D20

D40 40 120 D40

Points to note:
1. As a 16-bit instruction, when the devices designated by D1 and D2 are the same and M1303 =
ON, the upper and lower 8 bits of the designated devices exchange with each other.
2. As a 32-bit instruction, when the devices designated by D1 and D2 are the same and M1303 =
ON, the upper and lower 16 bits in the designated device exchange with each other.
3. When X0 = ON and M1303 = ON, 16-bit contents in D100 and those in D101 will exchange
with each other.
Before After
X0 execution execution
M 1303
D 100 1234 5678 D 100

D XC HP D 100 D 100 D 101 5678 1234 D 101

4. When X0 = ON and M1303 = ON, the high 8 bits and the low 8 bits in D0 are exchanged, the
high 8 bits and the low 8 bits in D1 are exchanged., and the high 8 bits and the low 8 bits in D2
are exchanged.

3-69
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Before After
execution execution
X0
M 1303 E0=0, D0 L 09 20 D 0 L

D0 H 20 09 D0 H
R ST E

FOR K3 E0=1, D1 L 08 40 D1 L
X0 D1 H 40 08 D1 H
XCH D 0E D 0E

INC E E0=2, D2 L 03 60 D2 L

D2 H 60 03 D2 H
N EXT

3-70
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
18 D BCD P Convert BIN to BCD ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F BCD, BCDP: 5 steps
S * * * * * * * * * DBCD, DBCDP: 9 steps
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Source of data D: Conversion result
Explanations:
1. The content in S (BIN value) is converted into BCD value and stored in D
2. As a 16-bit (32-bit) instruction, when the conversion result exceeds the range of 0 ~ 9,999 (0 ~
99,999,999), and M1067, M1068 = ON, D1067 will record the error code 0E18 (hex)
3. If operand S and D use index register F, only 16-bit instruction is available.
4. Flags: M1067 (Program execution error), M1068 (Execution error locked), D1067 (error code)
Program example:
1. When X0 = ON, the binary value of D10 will be converted into BCD value, and the 1s digit of
the conversion result will be stored in K1Y0 (Y0 ~ Y3, the 4 bit devices).
X0
BCD D10 K1Y0

2. If D10=001E (Hex) = 0030 (decimal), the result will be Y0~Y3 = 0000(BIN).

3-71
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
19 D BIN P Convert BCD to BIN ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F BIN, BINP: 5 steps
S * * * * * * * * * DBIN, DBINP: 9 steps
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Source of data D: Conversion result
Explanations:
1. The content in S (BCD value) is converted into BIN value and stored in D.
2. The valid range of source S: BCD (0 to 9,999), DBCD (0 to 99,999,999)
3. If the content of S is not a valid BCD value, an operation error will occur, error flags M1067
and M1068 = ON, and D1067 holds error code H0E18.
4. If operand S and D use index register F, only 16-bit instruction is available.
5. Flags: M1067 (Program execution error), M1068 (Execution error locked), D1067 (error code)
Program example:
When X0 = ON, the BCD value of K1M0 will be converted to BIN value and stored in D10.
X0
BIN K1X20 D10

Points to note:
1. When PLC needs to read an external DIP switch in BCD format, BIN instruction has to be first
adopted to convert the read data into BIN value and store the data in PLC.
2. On the contrary when PLC needs to display a value on a BCD format 7-segment displayer,
BCD instruction is required to convert the internal data into BCD value then sent the value to
the displayer.
3. When X0 = ON, the BCD value of K4X20 is converted into BIN value and sent to D100. The
BIN value of D100 will then be converted into BCD value and sent to K4Y20.

X0
BIN K4X20 D100

BCD D100 K4Y20

3-72
 3. Instruction Set

3 2 1 0
10 10 10 10

6 6 4 2 4-digit DIP switch in BCD format

8 8 8 8

X37 X20
4-digit BCD value

Using BIN instruction to store

the BIN value into D100

Using BCD instruction to convert the

content in D100 into a 4-digit BCD value.

Y37 Y20

4-digit 7-segment display in BCD format

3-73
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
20 D ADD P Addition ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ADD, ADDP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DADD, DADDP: 13 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Summand S2: Addend D: Sum
Explanations:
1. This instruction adds S1 and S2 in BIN format and store the result in D.
2. The most significant bit (MSB) is the sign bit of the data. 0 indicates positive and 1 indicates
negative. All calculations is algebraically processed, e.g. 3 + (-9) = -6.
3. If S1, S2 and D use device F, only 16-bit instruction is applicable.
4. Flags: M1020 (Zero flag), M1021 (Borrow flag), M1022 (Carry flag)
Program Example 1:
In 16-bit BIN addition:
When X0 = ON, the content in D0 will plus the content in D10 and the sum will be stored in D20.
X0
ADD D0 D10 D20

Program Example 2:
In 32-bit BIN addition:
When X0 = ON, the content in (D31, D30) will plus the content in (D41, D40) and the sum will be
stored in (D51, D50). D30, D40 and D50 are low word; D31, D41 and D51 are high word
X0
DADD D30 D40 D50

(D31, D30) + (D41, D40) = (D51, D50)

Operation of flags:
16-bit instruction:
1. If the operation result is “0”, the zero flag M1020 will be ON.
2. If the operation result exceeds -32,768, the borrow flag M1021 will be ON.
3. If the operation result exceeds 32,767, the carry flag M1022 will be ON.
32-bit instruction:
1. If the operation result is “0”, the zero flag, M1020 will be ON.

3-74
 3. Instruction Set

2. If the operation result exceeds -2,147,483,648, the borrow flag M1021 will be ON.
3. If the operation result exceeds 2,147,483,647, the carry flag M1022 will be ON
16-bit instruction:

Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag

-2、 -1、 0、 -32,768 -1、 0、 1 32,767、0、1、2

Borrow flag the most significant bit the most significant bit Carry flag
becomes 1 (negative) becomes 0 (positive)

32-bit instruction:

Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag

-2、 -1、 0、 -2,147,483,648 -1、 0、 1 2,147,483,647、 0、 1、 2

Borrow flag the most significant bit the most significant bit Carry flag
becomes 1 (negative) becomes 0 (positive)

3-75
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
21 D SUB P Subtraction ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SUB, SUBP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DSUB, DSUBP: 13 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Minuend S2: Subtrahend D: Remainder
Explanations:
1. This instruction subtracts S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D
2. The MSB is the sign bit. 0 indicates positive and 1 indicates negative. All calculation is
algebraically processed.
3. If S1, S2 and D use device F, only 16-bit instruction is applicable.
4. Flags: M1020 (Zero flag), M1021 (Borrow flag), M1022 (Carry flag). The flag operations of
ADD instruction can also be applied to the subtract instruction.
Program Example 1:
In 16-bit BIN subtraction:
When X0 = ON, the content in D0 will minus the content in D10 and the results will be stored in
D20
X0
SUB D0 D10 D20

Program Example 2:
In 32-bit BIN subtraction:
When X10 = ON, the content in (D31, D30) will minus the content in (D41, D40) and the results will
be stored in (D51, D50). D30, D40 and D50 are low word; D31, D41 and D51 are high word
X20
DSUB D30 D40 D50

(D31, D30) − (D41, D40) = (D51, D50)

3-76
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
22 D MUL P Multiplication ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MUL, MULP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * DMUL, DMULP: 13 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Multiplicand S2: Multiplicator D: Product
Explanations:
1. This instruction multiplies S1 by S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D. Care should be
taken on positive/negative signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit and 32-bit operations.
2. MSB = 0, positive; MSB = 1, negative.
3. If operands S1, S2 use index F, then only 16-bit instruction is available.
4. If operand D use index E, then only 16-bit instruction is available.
5. 16-bit BIN multiplication

S1 S2 D +1 D

b15................ b00 b15................ b00 b31............ b16 b15............. b00

X =
b15 is the sign bit b15 is the sign bit b31 is the sign bit(b15 of D+1)

b15=0,S1 is a positive value b15=0,S2 is a positive value b31=0,D(D+1) is a positive value

B15=1,S1 is a negative value b15=1,S2 is a negative value b31=1, D(D+1) is a negative value

16-bit value x 16-bit value = 32-bit value

If D is specified with a bit device, it can designate K1 ~ K4 to store a 16-bit result. Users can
use consecutive 2 16-bit registers to store 32-bit data.
If the product of a 16-bit multiplication must be a 16-bit value (16-bit value x 16-bit value =
16-bit value), users have to use API 114 MUL16/MUL16P. Please refer to the explanation of
API 114 MUL16/MUL16P for more information.
6. 32-bit BIN multiplication
+1 +1 +3 +2 +1

b31.. b16 b15.. b00 b31.. b16 b15.. b00 b63. b48 b47. b32 b31. b16 b15. b00
X =
b31 is the sign bit b31 is the sign bit b63 is the sign bit(b15 of D+3)

B31=0,S1(S1+1) is a positive value b31=0,S2(S2+1) is a positive value b63=0, D~(D+3) is a positive value
b31=1,S1(S1+1) is a negative value b31=1,S2(S2+1) is a negative value b63=1, D~(D+3) is a negative value

32-bit value x 32-bit value = 64-bit value

3-77
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

If D is specified with a word device, it can specify K1~K8 to store a 32-bit result. Users can use
2 consecutive 32-bit registers to store 64-bit data.
If the product of a 32-bit multiplication must be a 32-bit value (32-bit value x 32-bit value =
32-bit value), users have to use API 114 MUL32/MUL32P. Please refer to the explanation of
API 114 MUL32/MUL32P for more information.
Program Example:
The 16-bit D0 is multiplied by the 16-bit D10 and brings forth a 32-bit product. The higher 16 bits
are stored in D21 and the lower 16-bit are stored in D20. ON/OFF of MSB indicates the
positive/negative status of the operation result.
X0
MUL D0 D10 D20

(D0) × (D10) = (D21, D20)

16-bit × 16-bit = 32-bit

3-78
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
23 D DIV P Division ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DIV, DIVP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * DDIV, DDIVP: 13 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Dividend S2: Divisor D: Quotient and remainder
Explanation:
1. This instruction divides S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D. Care should be
taken on positive/negative signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit and 32-bit operations.
2. This instruction will not be executed when the divisor is 0. M1067 and M1068 will be ON and
D1067 records the error code 0E19 (hex).
3. If operands S1, S2 use index F, then only 16-bit instruction is available.
4. If operand D use index E, then only 16-bit instruction is available.
5. 16-bit BIN division:
Quotient Remainder
S1 S2 D D +1

b15.............b00 b15.............b00 b15.............b00 b15.............b00

/ =

If D is specified with a bit device, it can designate K1 ~ K4 to store a 16-bit result. Users can
use consecutive 2 16-bit registers to store 32-bit data of the quotient and remainder.
If users want to store the quotient of a 16-bit division (leave out the remainder), they have to
use AP I115 DIV16/DIV16P. Please refer to the explanation of API 115 DIV16/DIV16P for more
information.
6. 32-bit BIN division:
Quotient Remainder

S 1 +1 S1 S 2 +1 S2 D +1 D D +3 D +2
b15..b00 b15..b00 b15..b00 b15..b00 b31..b16 b15..b00 b31..b16 b15..b00
/ =

If D is specified with a bit device, it can designate K1 ~ K8 to store a 32-bit result. Users can
use consecutive 2 32-bit registers to store the quotient and remainder.
If users want to store the quotient of a 32-bit division (leave out the remainder), they have to
use AP I115 DIV32/DIV32P. Please refer to the explanation of API 115 DIV32/DIV32P for more
information.

3-79
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Program Example:
When X0 = ON, D0 will be divided by D10 and the quotient will be stored in D20 and remainder in
D21. ON/OFF of the MSB indicates the positive/negative status of the result value..
X0
DIV D0 D10 D20

3-80
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
24 D INC P Increment ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F INC, INCP: 3 steps
D * * * * * * * * DINC, DINCP: 5 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
D: Destination device
Explanations:
1. If the instruction is not used in pulse execution mode, the content in the designated device D
will plus “1” in every scan period
2. When INC is executed, the content in D will be incremented. However, in 16-bit instruction, if
+32,767 is reached and “1” is added, it will write a value of –32,768 to the destination. In 32-bit
instruction, if +2,147,483,647 is reached and “1” is added, it will write a value of
-2,147,483,648 to the destination.
3. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (INCP, DINCP).
4. If operand D uses index F, only a 16-bit instruction is applicable..
5. The operation results will not affect M1020 ~ M1022.
Program Example:
When X0 is triggered, the content of D0 will be incremented by 1.
X0
INCP D0

3-81
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
25 D DEC P Decrement ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DEC, DECP: 3 steps
D * * * * * * * * DDEC, DDECP: 5 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
D: Destination device
Explanation:
1. If the instruction is not used in pulse execution mode, the content in the designated device D
will minus “1” in every scan whenever the instruction is executed.
2. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (DECP, DDECP).
3. In 16-bit instruction, if –32,768 is reached and “1” is minused, it will write a value of +32,767 to
the destination. In 32-bit instruction, if -2,147,483,648 is reached and “1” is minused, it will
write a value of +2,147,483,647 to the destination.
4. If operand D uses index F, only a 16-bit instruction is applicable.
5. The operation results will not affect M1020 ~ M1022
Program Example:
When X0 is triggered, the value in D0 will be decremented by 1.
X0
DECP D0

3-82
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
26 WAND P Logical Word AND ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F WAND, WANDP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Source data device 1 S2: Source data device 2 D: Operation result
Explanations:
1. This instruction conducts logical AND operation of S1 and S2 in 16-bit mode and stores the
result in D
2. For 32-bit operation please refer to DAND instruction..
Program Example:
When X0 = ON, the 16-bit source D0 and D2 are analyzed and the operation result of the logical
AND operation is stored in D4.
X0
WAND D0 D2 D4

b15 b00
D0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Before
WAND
execution
D2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

After
execution D4 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

3-83
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
26 DAND P Logical DWord AND ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DAND, DANDP: 13 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Source data device 1 S2: Source data device 2 D: Operation result
Explanations:
1. Logical double word (32-bit) AND operation.
2. This instruction conducts logical AND operation of S1 and S2 in 32-bit mode and stores the
result in D.
3. If operands S1, S2, D use index F, only a 16-bit instruction is available.
Program Example:
When X1 = ON, the 32-bit source (D11, D10) and (D21, D20) are analyzed and the result of the
logical AND is stored in (D41, D40).
X1
DAND D10 D20 D40

b31 b15 b0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Before D11 D10 DAND
execution
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
D21 D20
After
execution 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
D41 D40

3-84
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
27 WOR P Logical Word OR ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F WOR, WORP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Source data device 1 S2: Source data device 2 D: Operation result
Explanations:
1. This instruction conducts logical OR operation of S1 and S2 in 16-bit mode and stores the
result in D.
2. For 32-bit operation please refer to DOR instruction.
Program Example:
When X0 = ON, the 16-bit data source D0 and D2 are analyzed and the result of the logical OR is
stored in D4.
X0
WOR D0 D2 D4

b15 b00
D0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before
WOR
execution
D2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

After
execution D4 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

3-85
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
27 DOR P Logical DWord OR ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DOR, DORP: 13 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Source data device 1 S2: Source data device 2 D: Operation result
Explanations:
1. Logical double word (32-bit) OR operation.
2. This instruction conducts logical OR operation of S1 and S2 in 32-bit mode and stores the
result in D.
3. If operands S1, S2, D use index F, then only a 16-bit instruction is available.
Program Example:
When X1 is ON, the 32-bit data source (D11, D10) and (D21, D20) are analyzed and the operation
result of the logical OR is stored in (D41, D40).
X1
DOR D10 D20 D40

b31
b b15 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before
D11 D10 DOR
execution
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
D21 D20
After
execution 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
D41 D40

3-86
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
28 WXOR P Logical Word XOR ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F WXOR, WXORP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Source data device 1 S2: Source data device 2 D: Operation result
Explanations:
1. This instruction conducts logical XOR operation of S1 and S2 in 16-bit mode and stores the
result in D
2. For 32-bit operation please refer to DXOR instruction.
Program Example:
When X0 = ON, the 16-bit data source D0 and D2 are analyzed and the operation result of the
logical XOR is stored in D4.
X0
WXOR D0 D2 D4

b15 b00
D0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before
WOR
execution
D2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

After
execution D4 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

3-87
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
28 DXOR P Logical DWord XOR ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DXOR, DXORP: 13 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Source data device 1 S2: Source data device 2 D: Operation result
Explanations:
1. Logical double word (32-bit) XOR operation.
2. This instruction conducts logical XOR operation of S1 and S2 in 32-bit mode and stores the
result in D
3. If operands S1, S2, D use index F, only a 16-bit instruction is available.
Program Example:
When X1 = ON, the 32-bit data source (D11, D10) and (D21, D20) are analyzed and the operation
result of the logical XOR is stored in (D41, D40).
X1
DXOR D10 D20 D40

b
b31 b15 b0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Before
D11 D10 DXOR
execution
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
D21 D20
After
execution 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
D41 D40

3-88
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

2’s Complement SA2
29 D NEG P ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
(Negation) SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F NEG, NEGP: 3 steps
D * * * * * * * * DNEG, DNEGP: 5 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
D: Device to store the operation result of 2’s Compliment
Explanations:
1. This instruction conducts operation of 2’s complement and can be used for converting a
negative BIN value into an absolute value.
2. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (NEGP, DNEGP).
3. If operand D uses index F, only a 16-bit instruction is available.
Program Example 1:
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the phase of each bit in D10 will be reversed (0→1, 1→0) and
then 1 will be added to the Least Significant Bit (LSB) of the register. Operation result will then be
stored in D10.
X0
NEGP D10

Program Example 2:
To obtain the absolute value of a negative value:
1. When MSB (b15) of D0 is “1”, M0 = ON. (D0 is a negative value).
2. When M0 = ON, the absolute value of D0 can be obtained by NEG instruction.
M1000
BON D0 M0 K15
M0
NEGP D0

Program Example 3:
Obtain the absolute value of the remainder of the subtraction. When X0 = ON,
a) If D0 > D2, M0 = ON.
b) If D0 = D2, M1 = ON.
c) If D0 < D2, M2 = ON.
d) D4 is then able to remain positive.

3-89
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

X0
CMP D0 D2 M0
M0
SUB D0 D2 D4
M1

M2
SUB D2 D0 D4

Detailed explanations on negative value and its absolute value

1. MSB = 0 indicates the value is positive while MSB = 1 indicates the value is negative.
2. NEG instruction can be applied to convert a negative value into its absolute value.

(D0=2)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

(D0=1)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

(D0=0)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

(D0=-1) (D0)+1=1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

(D0=-2) (D0)+1=2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

(D0=-3) (D0)+1=3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

(D0=-4) (D0)+1=4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

(D0=-5) (D0)+1=5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

(D0=-32,765) (D0)+1=32,765
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1

(D0=-32,766) (D0)+1=32,766
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

(D0=-32,767) (D0)+1=32,767
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

(D0=-32,768) (D0)+1=-32,768
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Max. absolute value is 32,767

3-90
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
30 D ROR P Rotation Right ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ROR, RORP: 5 steps
D * * * * * * * * DROR, DRORP: 9 steps
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
D: Device to be rotated n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation
Explanations:
1. This instruction rotates bit status of the device D to the right for n bits
2. The status of the last bit rotated (marked with ※) is copied to the carry flag M1022 (Carry flag)
3. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (RORP, DRORP).
4. If operand D uses index F, only a 16-bit instruction is available.
5. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM or KnS, only K4 (16-bit) or K8 (32-bit) is valid.
6. Valid range of operand n: 1≤ n ≤16 (16-bit), 1≤ n ≤32 (32-bit)
Program Example:
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to the right, as
shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry flag M1022..

X0
RORP D10 K4

Rotate to the right

Upper bit Lower bit
D10 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 M1022 Carry
flag
16 bits
After one rotation
to the right
Upper bit lower bit
M1022
D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Carry
* flag

3-91
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
31 D ROL P Rotate Left ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ROL, ROLP: 5 steps
D * * * * * * * * DROL, DROLP: 9 steps
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
D: Device to be rotated n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation
Explanation:
1. This instruction rotates bit status of the device D to the left for n bits
2. The status of the last bit rotated (marked with ※) is copied to the carry flag M1022.
3. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (ROLP, DROLP).
4. If operand D uses index F, only a 16-bit instruction is available.
5. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM or KnS, only K4 (16-bit) or K8 (32-bit) is valid.
6. Valid range of operand n: 1≤ n ≤16 (16-bit), 1≤ n ≤32 (32-bit)
Program Example:
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, all the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to the left, as
shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry flag M1022.
X0
ROLP D10 K4

Rotate to the left

Upper bit Lower bit
M1022 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D10
Carry
flag 16 bits
After one rotation
to the left
Upper bit Lower bit
M1022 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 D10
Carry
flag

3-92
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
32 D RCR P Rotation Right with Carry ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F RCR, RCRP: 5 steps
D * * * * * * * * DRCR, DRCRP: 9 steps
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
D: Device to be rotated n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation
Explanation:
1. This instruction rotates bit status of the device D together with M1022 to the right for n bits.
2. The status of the last bit rotated (marked with ※) is moved to the carry flag M1022.
3. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (RCRP, DRCRP).
4. If operand D uses index F, only a 16-bit instruction is available.
5. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM or KnS, only K4 (16-bit) or K8 (32-bit) is valid.
6. Valid range of operand n: 1≤ n ≤16 (16-bit), 1≤ n ≤32 (32-bit)
Program Example:
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 together with carry flag
M1022 (total 17 bits) will rotate to the right, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※
will be moved to carry flag M1022
X0
RCRP D10 K4

Rotate to the right

Upper bit Lower bit
D10 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 M1022
Carry
flag
16 bits
After one rotation
Upper bit to the right Lower bit
D10 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 M1022
Carry
flag

3-93
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
33 D RCL P Rotation Left with Carry ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F RCL, RCLP: 5 steps
D * * * * * * * * DRCL, DRCLP: 9 steps
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
D: Device to be rotated n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation
Explanations:
1. This instruction rotates bit status of the device D together with M1022 to the left for n bits.
2. The status of the last bit rotated (marked with ※) is moved to the carry flag M1022.
3. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (RCLP, DRCLP).
4. If operand D uses index F, only a 16-bit instruction is available.
5. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM or KnS, only K4 (16-bit) or K8 (32-bit) is valid.
6. Valid range of operand n: 1≤ n ≤16 (16-bit), 1≤ n ≤32 (32-bit)
Program Example:
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 together with carry flag
M1022 (total 17 bits) will rotate to the left, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will
be sent to carry flag M1022.
X0
RCLP D10 K4

Rotate to the left

Upper bit Lower bit
M1022 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D10
Carry
flag
16 bits
After one rotation
to the left
Upper bit Lower bit
M1022 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 D10
Carry
flag

3-94
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
34 SFTR P Bit Shift Right ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SFTR, SFTRP: 9 steps
S * * * *
D * * *
n1 * *
n2 * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Start No. of source device D: Start No. of destination device n1: Length of data to be
shifted n2: Number of bits to be shifted as a group
Explanation:
1. This instruction performs a right shift from source device of n2 bits starting from S to
destination device of n1 bits starting from D.
2. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (SFTRP).
3. Valid range of operand n1, n2 : 1≤ n2 ≤ n1 ≤1024
Program Example:
1. When X0 is rising edge triggered, SFTR instruction shifts X0~X4 into 16 bit data M0~M15 and
M0~M15 also shift to the right with a group of 4 bits.
2. The figure below illustrates the right shift of the bits in one scan.
 M3~M0 → Carry
 M7~M4 → M3~M0
 M11~M8 → M7~M4
 M15~M12 → M11~M8
 X3~X0 → M15~M12 completed
X0
SFTR X0 M0 K16 K4

4 bits in a group shift to the right

X3 X2 X1 X0
5
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 Carry

4 3 2 1

3-95
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
35 SFTL P Bit Shift Left ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SFTL, SFTLP: 9 steps
S * * * *
D * * *
n1 * *
n2 * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Start No. of source device D: Start No. of destination device n1: Length of data to be
shifted n2: Number of bits to be shifted as a group
Explanations:
1. This instruction performs a left shift from source device of n2 bits starting from S to destination
device of n1 bits starting from D
2. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (SFTLP).
3. Valid range of operand n1, n2 : 1≤ n2 ≤ n1 ≤1024
Program Example:
1. When X0 is rising edge triggered, SFTL instruction shifts X0~X4 into 16-bit data M0~M15 and
M0~M15 also shift to the left with a group of 4 bits.
2. The figure below illustrates the left shift of the bits in one scan
 M15~M12 → Carry
 M11~M8 → M15~M12
 M7~M4 → M11~M8
 M3~M0 → M7~M4
 X3~X0 → M3~M0 completed
X0
SFTR X0 M0 K16 K4

4 bits in a group shift to the left

X3 X2 X1 X0
5
Carry M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

1 2 3 4

3-96
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
36 WSFR P Word Shift Right ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F WSFR, WSFRP: 9 steps
S * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n1 * *
n2 * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Start No. of source device D: Start No. of destination device n1: Length of data to be
shifted n2: Number of devices to be shifted as a group
Explanations:
1. This instruction performs a right shift from source device of n2 registers starting from S to
destination device of n1 registers starting from D.
2. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (WSFRP).
3. The type of devices designated by S and D has to be the same, e.g. KnX, KnY, KnM, and KnS
as a category and T, C, and D as another category
4. Provided the devices designated by S and D belong to Kn type, the number of digits of Kn in S
and D has to be the same.
5. Valid range of operand n1, n2 : 1≤ n2 ≤ n1 ≤512
Program Example 1:
1. When X0 is triggered, WSFRP instruction shifts D10~D13 into data stack D20~D35 and
D20~D35 also shift to the right with a group of 4 registers.
2. The figure below illustrates the right shift of the registers in one scan.
 D23~D20 → Carry
 D27~D24 → D23~D20
 D31~D28 → D27~D24
 D35~D32 → D31~D28
 D13 ~D10 → D35~D32 completed
X0
WSFRP D10 D20 K16 K4

D13 D12 D11 D10 4 registers in one group shift to the right

5
D35 D34 D33 D32 D31 D30 D29 D28 D27 D26 D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20 Carry

4 3 2 1

3-97
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Program Example 2:
1. When X0 is triggered, WSFRP instruction shifts X20~X27 into data stack Y20~Y37 and
Y20~Y37 also shift to the right with a group of 4 devices.
2. The figure below illustrates the right shift of the devices in one scan
 Y27~Y20 → carry
 Y37~Y30 → Y27~Y20
 X27~X20 → Y37~Y30 completed
When using Kn device, the specified Kn value
(digit) must be the same.
X0
WSFRP K1X20 K1Y20 K4 K2

2 digits (8 devices)in a group

X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 shift to the right
3
Y37 Y36 Y35 Y34 Y33 Y32 Y31 Y30 Y27 Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 Carry

2 1

3-98
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
37 WSFL P Word Shift Left ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F WSFL, WSFLP: 9 steps
S * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n1 * *
n2 * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Start No. of source device D: Start No. of destination device n1: Length of data to be
shifted n2: Number of devices to be shifted as a group
Explanations:
1. This instruction performs a left shift from source device of n2 registers starting from S to
destination device of n1 registers starting from D.
2. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (WSFLP).
3. The type of devices designated by S and D has to be the same, e.g. KnX, KnY, KnM, and KnS
as a category and T, C, and D as another category
4. Provided the devices designated by S and D belong to Kn type, the number of digits of Kn in S
and D has to be the same.
5. Valid range of operand n1, n2 : 1≤ n2 ≤ n1 ≤512
Program Example:
1. When X0 is triggered, WSFLP instruction shifts D10~D13 into data stack D20~D35 and
D20~D35 also shift to the left with a group of 4 registers.
2. The figure below illustrates the left shift of the words in one scan
 D35~D32 → Carry
 D31~D28 → D35~D32
 D27~D24 → D31~D28
 D23~D20 → D27~D24
 D13~D10 → D23~D20 completed
X0
WSFLP D10 D20 K16 K4

4 registers in one group shift to the left D13 D12 D11 D10
5
Carry D35 D34 D33 D32 D31 D30 D29 D28 D27 D26 D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20

1 2 3 4

3-99
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
38 SFWR P Shift Register Write ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SFWR, SFWRP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Source device D: Head address of data stack n: Length of data stack
Explanations:
1. This instruction defines the data stack of n words starting from D as a “first-in, first out (FIFO)”
data stack and specifies the first device as the pointer (D). When SFWRP is executed, content
in pointer pluses 1, and the content in S will be written into the device designated by the
pointer. When the content in pointer exceeds n-1, the instruction stops and carry flag M1022=
ON.
2. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (SFWRP).
3. Valid range of operand n: 2≤ n ≤512
Program Example:
1. First, reset the content of D0. When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the content of D0 (pointer)
becomes 1, and D20 is written into D1. If the content of D20 is changed and X0 is triggered
again, pointer D0 becomes 2, and the content of D20 is then written into D2.
2. P The figure below illustrates the shift and writing process of the instruction.
 The content of D0 becomes 1.
. The content of D20 is written into D1.
X20
RST D0 Reset the content of D0 to 0 (zero) previously

X0
SFWRP D20 D0 K10

n = 10 points
D20 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Pointer

D0 = 3 2 1

Points to note:
This instruction can be used together with API 39 SFRD for the reading/writing of “first-in, first-out”
stack data.

3-100
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
39 SFRD P Shift Register Read ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SFRD, SFRDP: 7 steps
S * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Head address of data stack D: Destination device n: Length of data stack
Explanation:
1. This instruction defines the data stack of n words starting from S as a FIFO data stack and
specifies the first device as the pointer (S). The content of pointer indicates current length of
the stack. When SFRDP is executed, first data (S+1) will be read out to D, all data in this stack
moves up to fill the read device and content in pointer minuses 1. When the content in pointer
= 0, the instruction stops and carry flag M1022= ON
2. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (SFRDP).
3. Valid range of operand n: 2≤ n ≤512
Program Example:
1. When X0 goes from OFF to ON, D9~D2 are all shifted to the right and the pointer D0 is
decremented by 1 when the content of D1 is read and moved to D21.
2. The figure below illustrates the shift and reading of the instruction.
 The content of D1 is read and moved to D21.
 D9~D2 are all shifted to the right.
 The content of D0 is decremented by 1.
X0
SFRDP D0 D21 K10

n = 10 points
D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D21
Pointer

Data read

3-101
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
40 ZRST P Zone Reset ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ZRST, ZRSTP: 5 steps
D1 * * * * * *
D2 * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
D1: Starting device of the reset range D2: End device of the reset range
Explanations:
1. When the instruction is executed, range D1 to D2 will be reset.
2. Operand D1 and D2 must be the same data type, Valid range: D1 ≦ D2
3. When D1 > D2, only operand designated by D2 will be reset.
4. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (ZRSTP).
Program Example:
1. When X0 = ON, M300 to M399 will be reset.
2. When X1 = ON, C0 to C127 will all be reset, i.e. present value = 0 and associated contact/
output will be reset as well.
3. When X20 = ON, T0 to T127 will all be reset, i.e. present value = 0 and associated contact/
output will be reset as well.
4. When X2 = ON, the steps of S0 to S127 will be reset.
5. When X3 = ON, the data of D0 to D100 will be reset.
6. When X4 = ON, C235 to C254 will all be reset, i.e. present value = 0 and associated contact/
output will be reset as well.
X0
ZRST M300 M399
X1
ZRST C0 C127
X20
ZRST T0 T127
X2
ZRST S0 S127
X3
ZRST D0 D100
X4
ZRST C235 C254

Points to note:
1. Bit devices Y, M, S and word devices T, C, D can be individually reset by RST instruction.

3-102
 3. Instruction Set

2. For clearing multiple devices, API 16 FMOV instruction can be used to send K0 to word
devices T, C, D or bit devices KnY, KnM, KnS.
X0
RST M0

RST T0

RST Y0

FMOV K0 D10 K5

3-103
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
41 DECO P Decode ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DECO, DECOP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Source device to be decoded D: Device for storing the result n: Number of consecutive
bits of S
Explanation:
1. The instruction decodes the lower “n” bits of S and stores the result of “2n” bits in D.
2. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (DECOP).
3. When operand D is a bit device, n = 1~8, when operand D is a word device, n = 1~4
Program Example 1:
1. When D is used as a bit device, n = 1 ~ 8. Errors will occur if n = 0 or n > 8.
2. If n = 8, the decoded data is 28= 256 bits data.
3. When X20 goes from OFF to ON, the data of X0~X2 will be decoded to M100~M107.
4. If the source data is 3, M103 (third bit from M100) = ON.
5. After the execution is completed, X20 is turned OFF. The decoded results or outputs will retain
their operation.
X20
DECOP X0 M100 K3

X2 X1 X0
0 1 1

4 2 1

3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
M107 M106 M105 M104 M103 M102 M101 M100

3-104
 3. Instruction Set

Program Example 2:
1. When D is used as a word device, n = 1 ~ 4. Errors will occur if n = 0 or n > 4.
2. When n = 4, the decoded data is 24 = 16 bits.
3. When X20 goes from OFF to ON, the data in D10 (b2 to b0) will be decoded and stored in D20
(b7 to b0). The unused bits in D20 (b15 to b8) will be set to 0.
4. The lower 3 bits of D10 are decoded and stored in the lower 8 bits of D20. The higher 8 bits of
D20 are all 0.
5. After the execution is completed, X20 is turned OFF. The decoded results or outputs will retain
their operation.
X20
DECOP D10 D20 K3

D10
b15 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
4 2 1
all be 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
b15 b0
D20

3-105
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
42 ENCO P Encode ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DECO, DECOP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Source device to be encoded D: Device for storing the result n: Number of consecutive
bits of S
Explanation:
1. The instruction encodes the lower “2n” bits of source S and stores the result in D.
2. They highest active bit in S has the priority for encoding operation.
3. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (ENCOP).
4. When operand S is a bit device, n=1~8, when operand S is a word device, n=1~4
5. If no bits in S is active (1), M1067, M1068 = ON and D1067 records the error code 0E1A (hex).
Program Example 1:
1. When S is used as a bit device, n = 1 ~ 8. Errors will occur if n = 0 or n > 8.
2. f n = 8, the decoded data is 28= 256 bits data.
3. When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the data in (M0 to M7) will be encoded and stored in lower 3
bits of D0 (b2 to b0). The unused bits in D0 (b15 to b3) will be set to 0.
4. After the execution is completed, X0 is turned OFF and the data in D remains unchanged.
X0
ENCOP M0 D0 K3

M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

all be 0
4 2 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
b15 D0 b0

3-106
 3. Instruction Set

Program Example 2:
1. When S is used as a word device, n = 1 ~ 4. Errors will occur if n = 0 or n > 4.
2. When n = 4, the decoded data is 24 = 16 bits data.
3. When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 23 bits (b0 ~ b7) in D10 will be encoded and the result will
be stored in the lower 3 bits of D20 (b2 to b0). The unused bits in D20 (b15 to b3) will be set to
0.
4. After the execution is completed, X0 is turned OFF and the data in D remains unchanged
X0
ENCOP D10 D20 K3

Invalid data
b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
b15 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D10
7
all be 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
b15 D20 b0

3-107
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
43 D SUM P Sum of Active bits ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SUM, DSUMP: 5 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * * DSUM, DSUMP: 9 steps
D * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Source device D: Destination device for storing counted value
Explanation:
1. This instruction counts the total active bits in S and store the value in D.
2. D will occupy two registers when using in 32-bit instruction.
3. If operand S, D use index F, only a 16-bit instruction is available.
4. If there is no active bits, zero flag M1020 =ON.
Program Example:
When X20 = ON, all active bits in D0 will be counted and the result will be stored in D2.
X20
SUM D0 D2

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 3
D0 D2

3-108
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

Check specified bit SA2
44 D BON P ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
status SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F BON, BONP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * * DBON, DBONP: 13 steps
D * * *
n * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Source device D: Device for storing check result n: Bit number to be checked
Explanation:
1. The instruction checks the status of designated bit (specified by n) in S and stores the result in
D
2. If operand S uses index F, only 16-bit instruction is available.
3. Valid range of operand n : n = 0~15 (16-bit), n = 0~31 (32-bit)
Program Example:
1. When X0 = ON, and bit15 of D0 = “1”, M0 will be ON. If the bit15 is “0”, M0 is OFF.
2. When X0 is OFF, M0 will retain its previous status.

X0
BON D0 M0 K15

b15 b0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 M0=Off
D0
b15 b0
1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 M0=On
D0

3-109
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
45 D MEAN P Mean ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MEAN, MEANP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * DMEAN, DMEANP: 13
D * * * * * * * *
n * * * * * * * * * * * steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Source device D: Destination for storing result n: Number of consecutive device from S
Explanations:
1. The instruction obtains the mean value from n consecutive registers from S and stores the
value in D.
2. Remainders in the operation will be ignored.
3. If S is not within the valid range, only those addresses within the valid range will be processed.
4. If n is out of the valid range (1~64), PLC will determine it as an “instruction operation error”.
5. If operand D uses index F, only a 16-bit instruction is available.
6. Valid range of operand n : n = 1~64
Program Example:
When X10 = ON, the contents in 3 (n = 3) registers starting from D0 will be summed and then
divided by 3 to obtain the mean value. The result will be stored in D10 and the remainder will be
left out

X10
MEAN D0 D10 K3

(D0+D1+D2)/3 D10

D0 K100

D1 K113 D10 K112

Remainder = 3, left out

D2 K125

3 - 11 0
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
46 ANS Timed Annunciator Set ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ANS: 7 steps
S *
m *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Alarm timer m: Time setting D: Alarm
Explanations:
1. ANS instruction is used to drive the output alarm device in designated time.
2. Operand S valid range: T0~T183
Operand m valid range: K1~K32,767 (unit: 100 ms)
Operand D valid range: S912~S1023
3. Flag: M1048 (ON: Alarm is active), M1049 (ON: Alarm monitoring is enabled)
4. See ANR instruction for more information
Program Example:
If X3 = ON for more than 5 sec, alarm step relay S999 will be ON. S999 will remains ON after X3 is
reset. (T10 will be reset, present value = 0)
X3
ANS T10 K50 S999

3 - 111
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Function Controllers

SA2
47 ANR P Annunciator Reset ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

OP Descriptions Program Steps

N/A Instruction driven by contact is necessary. ANR, ANRP: 1 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Explanations:
1. ANR instruction is used to reset an alarm.
2. When several alarm devices are ON, the alarm with smaller number will be reset.
3. This instruction is generally used in pulse execution mode (ANRP).
Program Example:
1. If X20 and X21 are ON at the same time for more than 2 sec, the alarm S912 will be ON. If
X20 or X21 is reset, alarm S912 will remain ON but T10 will be reset and present value is
cleared.
2. If X20 and X21 are ON less than 2 sec, the present value of T10 will be cleared.
3. When X3 goes from OFF → ON, activated alarms S912 will be reset.
4. When X3 goes from OFF → ON again, the alarm device with second lower number will be
reset.
X20 X21
ANS T10 K20 S912

X3
ANRP

Points to note:
Flags:
1. M1048 (indicating alarm status): When M1049 = ON, enabling any of the alarm S912~S1023
turns M1048 ON.
2. M1049 (Enabling alarm monitoring): When M1049 = ON, D1049 will automatically hold the
lowest alarm number in active alarms.
Application example of alarm device (production line):
X0 = Forward switch X1 = Backward switch
X2 = Front position switch X3 = Back position switch
X4 = Alarm reset button
Y0 = Forward Y1 = Backward
Y2 = Alarm indicator
S912 = Forward alarm S920 = Backward alarm

3 - 11 2
 3. Instruction Set

M1000
M1049
Y0 X2
ANS T0 K100 S912
Y1 X3
ANS T1 K200 S920
X0 X2
Y0
Y0

X1 X3
Y1
Y1

M1048
Y2
X4
ANRP

1. M1048 and D1049 are valid only when M1049 = ON.

2. When Y0 = ON for more than 10 sec and the product fails to reach the front position X2, S912
= ON
3. When Y1 = ON for more than 10 sec and the product fails to reach the back position X3,
S920= ON.
4. When backward switch X1 = ON and backward device Y1 = ON, Y1 will go OFF only when the
product reaches the back position switch X3.
5. Y2 is ON when any alarm is enabled.
6. Whenever X4 is ON, 1 active alarm will be reset. If there are several active alarms, the reset
will start from the alarm with the lowest number and then the alarm with second lower number,
etc.

3 - 11 3
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
48 D SQR P Square Root ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SQR, SQRP: 5 steps
S * * * DSQR, DSQRP: 9 steps
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Source device D: Device for storing the result
Explanation:
1. This instruction performs a square root operation on S and stores the result in D.
2. S can only be a positive value. Performing a square root operation on a negative value will
result in an error and the instruction will not be executed. The error flag M1067 and M1068 =
ON and D1067 records error code H0E1B.
3. The operation result D should be integer only, and the decimal will be left out. When decimal is
left out, borrow flag M1021 = ON.
4. When the operation result D = 0, zero flag M1020 = ON.
Program Example:
When X20 = ON, square root of D0 will be stored in D12.
X20
SQR D0 D12

D0 D12

3 - 11 4
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
49 D FLT P Floating Point ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F FLT, FLTP: 5 steps
S * DFLT, DFLTP: 9 steps
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Source device D: Device for storing the conversion result
Explanations:
1. When M1081 = OFF, the source S is converted from BIN integer to binary floating point value.
At this time, 16-bit instruction FLT occupies 1 register for S and 2 registers for D.
a) If the absolute value of the conversion result ＞ max. floating value, carry flag M1022 =
ON.
b) If the absolute value of the conversion result ＜ min. floating value, carry flag M1021 =
ON.
c) If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020 = ON.
2. When M1081 is ON, the source S is converted from binary floating point value to BIN integer.
(Decimal ignored). At this time, 16-bit instruction FLT occupies 2 registers for S and 1 register
for D. The operation is same as instruction INT.
a) If the conversion result exceeds the available range of BIN integer in D (for 16-bit: -32,768
~ 32,767; for 32-bit: -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647), D will obtain the maximum or
minimum value and carry flag M1022 = ON.
b) If the decimal is ignored, borrow flag M1021=ON.
c) If the conversion result = 0, zero flag M1020=ON.
d) After the conversion, D stores the result in 16 bits.
Program Example 1:
1. When M1081 = OFF, the BIN integer is converted into binary floating point value.
2. When X20 = ON, D0 is converted to D13, D12 (floating point).
3. When X21 = ON, D1, D0 are converted to D21, D20 (floating point).
4. Assume D0 is K10. When X10 is ON, the converted 32-bit value will be H41200000 and stored
in 32-bit register D12 (D13)
5. If 32-bit register D0 (D1)=K100,000, X21 = ON. 32-bit of floating point after conversion will be
H47C35000 and it will be saved in 32-bit register D20 (D21)

3 - 11 5
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

M1002
RST M1081
X20
FLT D0 D12

X21
DFLT D0 D20

Program Example 2:
1. When M1081 = ON, the source data is converted from floating point value to BIN integer.
(Decimal ignored)
2. When X20 = ON, D1 and D0 (floating point) are converted to D12 (BIN integer). If D0 (D1) =
H47C35000, the result will be 100,000 which exceeds the available range of BIN integer in
16-bit register D12. In this case the result will be D12 = K32767, and M1022 = ON
3. When X21 = ON, D1 and D0 (floating point) are converted to D21, D20 (BIN integer). If D0 (D1)
= H47C35000, the result is 100,000 and will be saved in 32-bit register D20 (D21).
M1002
SET M1081
X20
FLT D0 D12

X21
DFLT D0 D20

Program Example 3:
Apply FLT instruction to complete the following operation

(D10) (X7~X0) K61.5 (D21,D20)

Binary floating point
16-bit BIN 2-digit BCD 6

7
1 2 5 4 (D31,D30)
Decimal floating point
(for monitoring)
(D101,D100) (D200) BIN (D301,D300) 8
Binary floating point Binary floating point (D41,D40)
3 32-bit integer

(D203,D202)
Binary floating point
(D401,D400)
Binary floating point

3 - 11 6
 3. Instruction Set

M1000 1
FLT D10 D100
2
BIN K2X0 D200

3
FLT D200 D202
4
DEDIV K615 K10 D300
5
DEDIV D100 D202 D400
6
DEMUL D400 D300 D20
7
DEBCD D20 D30
8
DINT D20 D40

1. Covert D10 (BIN integer) to D101, D100 (floating point).

2. Covert the value of X7~X0 (BCD value) to D200 (BIN value).
3. Covert D200 (BIN integer) to D203, D202 (floating point).
4. Save the result of K615 ÷ K10 to D301, D300 (floating point).
5. Divide the floating point:
Save the result of (D101, D100) ÷ (D203, D202) to D401, D400 (floating point).
6. Multiply floating point:
Save the result of (D401, D400) × (D301, D300) to D21, D20 (floating point).
7. Covert floating point (D21, D20) to decimal floating point (D31, D30).
8. Covert floating point (D21, D20) to BIN integer (D41, D40).

3 - 11 7
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
50 REF P Refresh ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F REF, REFP: 5 steps
D * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
D: Start device for I/O refresh n: Number of devices for I/O refresh
Explanations:
1. PLC updates I/O status between END instruction and the start of next program scan. If an
immediate I/O refresh is needed, REF can be applied for performing I/O refresh immediately.
2. D can only be a multiple of 10, i.e. X0 or Y0, and the instruction is NOT applicable for I/O
points on DIO modules.
3. Only the I/O points on MPU can be specified for operand D for I/O refresh.
 When D specifies X0 and n ≦ 8, only X0~X7 will be refreshed. If n > 8, all I/O points on
MPU will be refreshed.
 When D specifies Y0 and n = 8, only Y0~X7 will be refreshed. If n > 8, all I/O points on
MPU will be refreshed.
 When D specifies X10 or Y10, I/O points on MPU except for X0~X7 or Y0~Y3 will all be
refreshed regardless of n value, i.e. only status of X0~X7 or Y0~Y3 remains.
4. For EX2/SX2 MPU only: If M1180 = ON and REF instruction executes, PLC will read the A/D
value and update the read value to D1110~D1113. If M1181 = ON and REF instruction
executes, PLC will output the D/A value in D1116 and D1117 immediately. When A/D or D/A
values are refreshed, PLC will reset M1180 or M1181 automatically.
5. Range for n (ES2/EX2): 4 ~ total I/O points on MPU. n should always be a multiple of 4.
6. Range for n (SS2/SA2/SE/SX2): 8 ~ total I/O points on MPU.
7. The function to update pulse number immediately is only available for the following modules
and firmware, ES2, EX2, ES2-C: V3.60, ES2-E: V1.00, 28SA2, 12SA2, SX2: V3.0, 26SE:
V1.92 and later.

Output Device Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3

Refresh current
M1672 M1673 M1674 M1675
position of output

Pulse output number D1030/D1031 D1032/D1033 D1336/D1337 D1338/D1339

3 - 11 8
 3. Instruction Set

A. Normally, PLC only refreshes pulse output when the pulse instruction is executed.
You can use output pulse to check the pulse number but if the program is big, it
may cause a bigger different result in such a long scan.
B. When executing REF instruction with M1672-M1675, it can refresh the pulse output
immediately. And when REF instruction works with M1672-M1675 flags, it is only
used to refresh the pulse number not to refresh the actual inputs and outputs.
C. Refer to program example 5 for reference.

Program Example 1:
When X0 = ON, PLC will refresh the status of input points X0 ~ X7 immediately without delay.
X0
REF X0 K8

Program Example 2:
When X0 = ON, the 4 output signals on Y0 ~ Y3 will be sent to output terminals immediately before
the program proceeds to END instruction.
X0
REF Y0 K4

Program Example 3:
When X0 = ON, I/O points starting from X10 or Y4 will all be refreshed.
X0
REF X10 K8

X0
REF Y4 K8

Program Example 4:
For DVP-EX2/SX2 only: When X0 = ON and M1180 = ON, A/D signal in D1110~D1113 will be
refreshed immediately regardless of the settings of operands D and n
X0
SET M1180

REF X0 K8

3 - 11 9
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Program Example 5:
When M0 is ON, executing DDRVI instruction to output pulses. When an external interrupt occurs
in X0, the program refreshes the pulse number immediately in D1030, D1031 and D1336, D1337.
No need to wait for the scan.

3-120
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
51 REFF P Refresh and Filter Adjust ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F REFF, REFFP: 3 steps
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
n: Response time (unit: ms)
Explanation:
1. PLC provides digital input filters to avoid interference. The response time (n) of X0 ~ X7 input
filters can be adjusted by REFF instruction. The instruction sets the value specified in n to
D1020 (X0 ~ X7 input filter time) directly. The instruction sets the value specified in n to D1021
(X10 ~ X17response time) for models including 28SS2 V3.42 /28SA2 V3.0 /26SE V2.0 and
later versions.
2. When PLC turns from OFF to ON or the END instruction is reached, the response time is
dictated by the value of D1020.
3. During program execution, the value in D1020 can be changed by using MOV instruction.
4. When using REFF instruction during program execution, the modified response time will be
move to D1020 and refreshed until next program scan..
5. Range of n: = K2 ~ K20.
Program Example:
1. When the power of PLC turns from OFF to ON, the response time of X0~X7 inputs is specified
by the value in D1020.
2. When X20 = ON, REFF K5 instruction is executed, response time changes to 5 ms and takes
affect the next scan.
3. When X20 = OFF, the REFF instruction will not be executed, the response time changes to
20ms and takes affect the next scan.

X20
REFF K5
X0
Y1
X20
REFF K20
X1
Y2

END

3-121
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Points to note:
Response time is ignored (no delay) when input points are occupied by external interrupts,
high-speed counters or SPD instruction.

3-122
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

SA2
52 MTR Input Matrix ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MTR: 9 steps
S *
D1 *
D2 * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Head address of input device D1: Head address of output device D2: Head address of
matrix scan n: Number of arrays in the matrix
Explanations:
1. S is the source device of the matrix input and occupies 8 consecutive points.
D1 is the trigger device (transistor output Y) to read input signals and occupies n consecutive
points
D2 is the head address of the matrix which stores the read status from inputs
2. This instruction allows 8 continuous input devices starting from S to be used n times, which
means the operation result can be displayed with a matrix table starting from D2 . Each set of 8
input signals are grouped into an “array” and there are n number of arrays. Each array is
selected to be read by triggering output devices starting from D1. The result is stored in a
matrix-table which starts at corresponding head address D2.
3. Maximum 8 arrays can be specified (n = 8) to obtain 64 input points (8 × 8 = 64).
4. The processing time of each array is approximately 25ms, i.e. an 8 array matrix would cost
200ms to finish reading. In this case, input signals with ON/OFF speed faster than 200ms are
not applicable in the matrix input.
5. It is recommended to use special auxiliary relay M1000 (normally open contact).
6. Whenever this instruction finishes a matrix scan, M1029 will be ON for one scan period..
7. There is no limitation on the number of times for using the instruction, but only one instruction
can be executed in the same time.
8. Flag: M1029, execution completed flag.
Program Example:
When PLC runs, MTR instruction executes. The status of input points X40~X47 is read 2 times in
the driven order of output points Y40 and Y41, i.e. 16 signals will be generated and stored in
internal relay M10~M17 and M20~M27.
M1000
MTR X40 Y40 M10 K2

3-123
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

The figure below illustrates the external wiring of the 2-array matrix input loop constructed by X40
~ X47 and Y40 ~ Y41. The 16 switches correspond to the internal relays M10 ~ M17, M20 ~ M27.
The wiring should be applied with MTR instruction.

Diode
0.1A/50V
M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27

Internal relays X41 X42 X43 X44 X45 X46 X47

M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17

24G +24V S/S X40 X41 X42 X43 X44 X45 X46 X47

C Y40 Y41 Y42 Y43 Y44 Y45 Y46 Y47

When output Y40 is ON, only inputs in the first array are read. The results are stored in auxiliary
relays M10~M17. After Y40 goes OFF, Y41 turns ON. This time only inputs in the second array are
read. The results are stored in M20~M27.

Read input signal in the 1st array

Y40 1 3
Read input signal in the 2nd array

Y41 2 4
25ms
Processing time of each array: approx. 25ms

3-124
 3. Instruction Set

Points to note:
1. Operand S must be a multiple of 10, e.g. 00, 10, 20, which means X0, X10… etc. and
occupies 8 continuous devices.
2. Operand D1 should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, which means Y0, Y10… etc. and
occupies n continuous devices
3. Operand D2 should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, which means M0, M10, S0, S10… etc.
4. Valid range of n = 2~8

3-125
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

High Speed Counter SA2
53 D HSCS ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
Set SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DHSCS: 13 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * *
S2 *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Comparative value S2: No. of high-speed counter D: Compare result
Explanations:
1. Functions related to high-speed counters adopt an interrupt process; therefore, devices
specified in D which indicates comparison results are updated immediately. This instruction
compares the present value of the designated high-speed counter S2 against a specified
comparative value S1. When the current value in counters equals S1, device in D will be ON
even when values in S1 and S2 are no longer equal.
2. If D is specified as Y0~Y3, when the instruction is executed and the count value equals to S1 ,
the compare result will immediately output to the external outputs Y0~Y3. However, other Y
outputs will still be updated till the end of program. Also, M and S devices, not affected by the
program scan time, will be immediate updated as the Y devices specified by this instruction.
3. Operand D can designate I0□0, □=1~8
4. High speed counters include software high speed counters and hardware high speed counters.
In addtiion, there are also two types of comparators including software comparators and
hardware comparators. For detailed explanations of high speed counters please refer to
section 2.12 in this manual.
5. Explanations on software comparators for DHSCS/DHSCR instruction:
 There are 6 software comparators for the high-speed compare Set/Reset.
 There are 6 software comparators available corresponding to associated high speed
counter interrupts. Numbers of the applied interrupts should also be specified correctly in
front of the associated interrupt subroutines in the program.
 When programming DHSCS and DHSCR instructions, the total of Set/Reset comparisons
for both instructions can not be more than 6, otherwise syntax check error will occur.

3-126
 3. Instruction Set

 Table of settings for the high-speed interrupts of the software counters and software
comparators:
Counter C232 C233 C234 C235 C236 C237
DHSCS High-speed I010 I050 I070 I010 I020 I030
interrupt
High-speed comparator C232~C242 share 6 software comparators
Set

Counter C238 C239 C240 C241 C242

DHSCS High-speed I040 I050 I060 I070 I080
interrupt
High-speed comparator C232~C242 share 6 software comparators
Set
 DVP-SS2/SA2/12SE does not support the software high speed counter C232.
 C253 and C254 is DVP/12SE are software high speed counters. The high-speed interrupt
is I030.
 Block diagram of software counters and comparators:
Softwar e
comparator x 6
Softwar e
Counter 1 Set / reset 1

Set / reset 2
Softwar e
Count value
counter 2

Set / reset 6
Softwar e
counter 8

6. Explanations on hardware comparators DHSCS/DHSCR instruction:

 There are 2 groups of hardware comparators provided respectively for 2 groups of
hardware counters (A group and B group), and each group shares 4 comparators with
individual Compare Set/Reset function.
 When programming DHSCS and DHSCR instructions, the total of Set/Reset comparisons
for both instructions can not be more than 4, otherwise syntax check error will occur.
 Each high-speed counter interrupt occupies an associated hardware comparator,
consequently the interrupt number can not be repeated. Also, I010~I040 can only be
applied for group A comparators and I050~I080 for group B.
 If DCNT instruction enables C243 as high speed counter (group A) and DHSC/DHSC
instruction uses C245 as high speed counter (group A) at the same time, PLC takes C243

3-127
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

as the source counter automatically and no syntax check error will be detected.
 Designers have to specify the comparison value of a hardware comparator before they
enable a comparison instruction. If the comparison value of a hardware comparator has to
be changed after a comparison instruction is enabled, it is suggested that users should
disable the comparison instruction first. After the users specify a new comparison value,
the users can enable the comparison instruction again.
 If users want to change the value of a hardware comparator without disabling the
high-speed comparison instruction which is being used, they have to check whether the
model used support this operation. The models which support this operation are listed
below.
Model name ES2/EX2 SS2 SA2 SX2 SE
V3.20 and V3.00 and V2.60 and V2.40 and V1.00 and
Version
above above above above above
Note: If the comparative value changes, it will not be stored in the hardware comparator
until the instruction is scanned.

 Table of settings for the high-speed interrupts of hardware counters and comparators: (It
is not applicable to DVP-12SE.)
A group B group
Hardware counter
A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4
Counter No. C243, C245~C248, C251,C252 C244, C249, C250, C253, C254
High-speed counter
I010 I020 I030 I040 I050 I060 I070 I080
interrupt
High-speed compare Share 4 hardware Share 4 hardware
Set/Reset comparators for group A comparators for group B

 Table of settings for the high-speed interrupts of hardware counters and comparators: (It
is only applicable to DVP-12SE.)
A group B group
Hardware counter
A1 A2 B1 B2
Counter No. C243, C245~C248, C251,C252 C244
High-speed counter
I010 I020 I050 I060
interrupt
Hi-speed compare Share 2 hardware Share 2 hardware
Set/Reset comparators for group A comparators for group B

3-128
 3. Instruction Set

 Block diagram of hardware counters and comparators:

Hardware
comparator A x 4 Set /res et A1
I010 A1

Hardware Count
counter A value A
Set /res et A4
I040 A4

Hardware
comparator B x 4 Set /res et B1

I050 B1

Hardware Count
counter B value B
Set /res et B4

I080 B4

7. Difference between software and hardware comparators (it is not applicable to DVP-12SE):
 6 comparators are available for software counters while 8 comparators are available for 2
groups of hardware counters ( 4 comparators for each group)
 Output timing of software comparator  count value equals to comparative value in both
counting up/down modes.
 Output timing of the hardware comparator with firmware version 1.xx  count value
equals to comparative value+1 in counting-up mode; count value equals to comparative
value -1 in counting-down mode.
 Output timing of the hardware comparator with firmware version 2.00 and above  count
value equals to comparative value in both counting up/down modes.
8. Difference between software and hardware comparators (it is only applicable to DVP-12SE):
 6 comparators are available for software counters while 4 comparators are available for 2
groups of hardware counters ( 2 comparators for each group)
 Output timing of software comparator  count value equals to comparative value in both
counting up/down modes.
 Output timing of the hardware comparator  count value equals to comparative value+1
in counting-up mode; count value equals to comparative value -1 in counting-down mode.
Program Example 1:
Set/reset M0 by applying software comparator

M1000
DCNT C235 K100

DHSCS K100 C235 M0

3-129
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

 When value in C235 varies from 99 to100, DHSCS instruction sets M0 ON. (M1235 = OFF,
C235 counts up)
 When value in C235 varies from 101 to100, DHSCR instruction resets M0. (M1235 = ON,
C235 counts down)
 Timing diagram for the comparison:
2 1

M0

Counting
No.
101 101
100 100
99 99
98 98
Count up Count down
Time

Program Example 2:
Set/reset M0 by applying hardware comparator

M1000
DCNT C251 K100

DHSCS K100 C251 M0

 When C251 counts up and the value in C251 varies from 100 to101, DHSCS instruction
sets M0 ON.
 When C251 counts down and the value in C251 varies from 100 to 99, DHSCR instruction
resets M0.
 Timing diagram for the comparison:
1 2

M0

Counting
No.
101 101
100 100
99 99
98 98
Count up Count down
Time

3-130
 3. Instruction Set

Program Example 3:
Executes interrupt subroutine by applying software comparator.

EI
M1000
DCNT C235 K100

DHSCS K100 C235 I010

FEND
M1000
I010 OUT Y10

IRET

END

 When value in C235 varies from 99 to100, interrupt subroutine triggered by I010 executes
immediately to set Y0 ON.
Points to note:
 If operand D is specified as S, M or Y0~Y3 for the above high speed comparison, the
compare result will immediately output to the external points Y0~Y3 (Y0~Y5 for SS2/SX2).
However, if D is specified as Y4~Y337, external outputs will be updated till the end of
program (delay for one scan cycle).
9. Count value storage function of high speed interrupt:
 When X1, X3, X4 and X5 is applied for reset function and associated external interrupts are
disabled, users can define the reset function as Rising/Falling-edge triggered by special M
relays specified in the table: Applicable Software High Speed Counters. However, if
external interrupts are applied, the interrupt instructions have the priority in using the input
points. In addition, PLC will move the current data in the counters to the associated data
registers below then reset the counters
 When X0 (counter input) and X1 (external Interrupt I100/I101) work with C243, the count
value will be moved to D1240 and D1241 when interrupt occurs and then the counter will be
reset.
 When X2 (counter input) and X3 (external Interrupt I300/I301) work with C244, the count
value will be moved to D1242 and D1243 when interrupt occurs and then the counter will be
reset.
 When X0 (counter input) and X4 (external Interrupt I400/I401) work with C246, C248, C252,
the count value will be moved to D1240 and D1241 when interrupt occurs and then the
counter will be reset.
 When X2 (counter input) and X5 (external Interrupt I500/I501) work with C244, C250, C254,

3-131
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

the count value will be moved to D1242 and D1243 when interrupt occurs and then the
counter will be reset.
Special D D1241, D1240 D1243, D1242
Counter C243 C246 C248 C252 C244 C250 C254
Interrupt X1(I100/I101) X4(I400/I401) X3(I300/I301) X5(I500/I501)

Program Example 4:

EI
M1000
DCNT C243 K100

FEND
M1000
I101 DMOV D1240 D0

IRET

END

 If interrupt I101 is triggered from input point X1 while C243 is counting, I101 interrupt
subroutine executes immediately and the count value in C243 will be moved to D0. After
this, C243 is reset.

3-132
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

High Speed Counter ES2/EX2 SS2 SA2 SX2
54 D HSCR SE
Reset
Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DHSCR: 13 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * *
S2 *
D * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Comparative value S2: No. of high speed counter D: Comparison result
Explanations:
1. DHSCR compares the current value of the counter S2 against a compare value S1. When the
counters current value changes to a value equal to S1, then device D is reset to OFF. Once
reset, even if the compare result is no longer unequal, D will still be OFF.
2. If D is specified as Y0~Y3 in this instruction, the compare result will immediately output to the
external outputs Y0~Y3 (reset the designated Y). However, other Y outputs will still be updated
till the end of program (delay for one scan cycle). Also, M and S devices, not affected by the
program scan time, will be immediately updated as well.
3. Operand D can be specified with high speed counters C232~C254 (SS2/SA2/SE does not
support C232) the same as S2. .
4. High speed counters include software high speed counters and hardware high speed counters.
In addtiion, there are also two types of comparators including software comparators and
hardware comparators. For detailed explanations of high speed counters please refer to section
2.12 in this manual.
5. For explanations on software counters and hardware counters, please refer to API53 DHSCS.
6. For program examples, please refer to Program Example1 and 2 in API53 DHSCS.

3-133
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

High Speed Zone ES2/EX2 SS2 SA2 SX2
55 D HSZ SE
Compare
Typ Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps
e DHSZ: 17 steps
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
OP
S1 * * * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * * *
S *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Lower bound of the comparison zone S2: Upper bound of the comparison zone S: No. of
high speed counter D: Comparison result (3 consecutive devices)
Explanations:
1. S1 should be equal to or smaller than S2 (S1 ≦ S2).
2. If D is specified as Y0~Y3 in this instruction, the compare result will immediately output to the
external outputs Y0~Y3. However, other Y outputs will still be updated till the end of program.
Also, M and S devices, not affected by the program scan cycle, will be immediately updated as
well.
3. High speed counters include software high speed counters and hardware high speed counters.
In addtiion, there are also two types of comparators including software comparators and
hardware comparators. For detailed explanations of high speed counters please refer to section
2.9 in this manual.
4. Explanations on software comparators for DHSZ instruction
 Corresponding table for software counters and comparators:
Counter C232 C233 C234 C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242
Hi-speed compare
Share 6 software comparators
Set/Reset

 Block diagram of software counters and comparators:

Softwar e
comparator x 6
Softwar e
C ounter 1 Set / reset 1

Set / reset 2
Softwar e
Count value
counter 2

Set / reset 6
Softwar e
counter 8

3-134
 3. Instruction Set

 There are 6 software zone comparators available exclusively for zone compare operation,
hence the limit of 6 comparisons for zone compare does not include the comparisons of
DHSCS and DHSCR.
 SS2/SA2/12SE does not support software counter C232.
5. Explanations on hardware comparators for HSZ instruction:
 Corresponding table for hardware counters and comparators (It is not applicable to
VEP-12SE):
A group B group
Hardware counter
A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4
Counter No. C243, C245~C248, C251,C252 C244, C249, C250, C253, C254
High-speed compare Shares 4 hardware Shares 4 hardware
Set/Reset comparators for group A comparators for group B

 Corresponding table for hardware counters and comparators (It is only applicable to
VEP-12SE):
A group B group
Hardware counter
A1 A2 B1 B2
Counter No. C243, C245~C248, C251,C252 C244
High-speed Shares 2 hardware comparators Shares 2 hardware
compare Set/Reset for group A comparators for group B

 Block diagram of hardware counters and comparators:

Hardware
comparator A x 4 Set /res et A1
I010 A1

Hardware Count
counter A value A
Set /res et A4
I040 A4

Hardware
comparator B x 4 Set /res et B1

I050 B1

Hardware Count
counter B value B
Set /res et B4

I080 B4

 The two groups can only be used once for each group, occupying 2 comparators. For
example, when DHSZ instruction uses A3 and A4 of group A comparators, only the other 2
comparators (A1, A2) are available for DHSCS and DHSCR instructions.
 When DHSCS uses I030 or I040, comparators A3 and A4 are no longer available for DHSZ
instruction. Also, when DHSCS uses I070 or I080, comparators B3 and B4 are no longer

3-135
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

available for DHSZ instruction. If comparators are used repeatedly, the syntax error will be
detected on the instruction behind.
 For DVP-SE, if DHSZ instruction uses hardware comparators, two hardware comparators
are used. DHSCS instruction and DHSCR instruction can not use the same hardware
comparators.
Program Example 1: (Applying Hardware High Speed Counter)
1. When D is specified as Y0, then Y0~Y2 will be occupied automatically.
2. When DHSZ is executed, the instruction compares the current value in C246 with the
upper/lower bound (1500/2000) of the comparison zone, and Y0~Y2 will be ON according to the
comparison result.
M1000
DCNT C246 K20000

DHSZ K1500 K2000 C246 Y0

Y0
When current value of C246 < K1500, Y0=On
Y1
When K1500 < current value of C246 < K2000, Y1=On
Y2
When current value of C246 > K2000, Y2=On

Program Example 2: (Applying DHSZ instruction for performing ramp down operation)
1. C251 is AB-phase high speed counter. When X10 = ON, DHSZ compare the present value with
K2000. Present value≦K2000, Y10 = ON.
2. When X10 = OFF, Y10~Y12 are reset.
X10
RST C251

ZRST Y10 Y12

M1000
DCNT C251 K10000
X10
DHSZ K2000 K2400 C251 Y10

3-136
 3. Instruction Set

Timing diagram

Speed variable
transmission device
0

X10

High speed Y10

Low speed Y11

Stop Y12

Present value
of C251 2400
2000

3-137
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

ES2/EX2 SS2 SA2 SX2
56 SPD Speed Detection SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SPD: 7 steps
S1 *
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: External pulse input S2: Pulse receiving time (ms) D: Detected result (5 consecutive
devices)
Explanations:
1. The instruction counts the number of pulses received at input terminal S1 during the time S2 (ms)
and stores the result in the register D.
2. ES2/EX2 before V0.92. External pulse input terminals designated in S1 :
Available
X0, X2 X1 (X0/X1) X6, X7
input points
1-phase input 1-phase input
AB-phase input
Input mode (Supports single (Supports single
(Supports quadruple frequency)
frequency ) frequency)
Max frequency 100KHz 5KHz 10KHz

3. ES2/EX2 V1.00 or later. External pulse input terminals designated in S1 :

Available X1 (X0/X1), X3 (X2/X3)
X0, X2 X4, X6
input points X5 (X4/X5), X7 (X6/X7)
1-phase input 1-phase input
AB-phase input
Input mode (Supports single (Supports single
(Supports quadruple frequency)
frequency ) frequency)
Max frequency 100KHz 5KHz 10KHz

4. SS2/SA2/SX2/12SE. External pulse input terminals designated in S1 :

Available X1 (X0/X1), X3 (X2/X3)
X0, X2 X4, X6
input points X5 (X4/X5), X7 (X6/X7)
1-phase input 1-phase input
AB-phase input
Input mode (Supports single (Supports single
(Supports quadruple frequency)
frequency ) frequency)
SA2/SE/SX2:
5KHz.
Max frequency 100kHz 10KHz
X1(X0/X1) of SA2/12SE: 30kHz
SS2: 20kHz

5. D occupies 5 consecutive registers, D + 1 and D store the results of previous pulse detection; D
+3 and D + 2 store the current accumulated number of pulses; D + 4 store the current time
remaining (max. 32,767ms).

3-138
 3. Instruction Set

6. If X0, X1, X2, X6 or X7 are used in a SPD instruction, their associated high-speed counters or
external interrupts I000/I001, I100/I101, I200/I201, I600/I601 or I700/I701 can not be used.
7. For ES2/EX2 before V0.92: when X0, X2, X6 and X7 are used, they will be detected as 1-phase
input. When X1 is used, X0(A) and X1(B) will be applied together as AB-phase input.
8. For SS2/SA2/SX2/SE and ES2/EX2 V1.00 or later: when X0, X2, X4 and X6 are used, they will
be detected as 1-phase input. When X1, X3, x5, X7 are used, X0, X2, X4, X6 will be applied
together as AB-phase input.
9. This instruction is mainly used to obtain the value of rotation speed and the results in D are in
proportion to the rotation speed. Rotation speed N can be calculated by the following equation
N: Rotation speed
60D0
N=  10 3 rpm  n: The number of pulses produced per rotation
nt
t: Detecting time specified by S2 (ms)
Program Example:
1. When X7 = ON, D2 stores the high-speed pulses at X0 for 1,000ms and stops automatically.
The results are stored in D0, D1.
2. When the 1000ms of counting is completed, D2 will be reset. When X7 turns ON again, D2
starts counting again.
X7
SPD X0 K1000 D0

X7

X1

D2: Present value D0: Detected value

Content in D2

1,000ms 1,000ms

1,000

Content in D4 D4: Remaining time (ms)

3-139
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

ES2/EX2 SS2 SA2 SX2
57 D PLSY Pulse Output SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F PLSY: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DPLSY: 13 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Pulse output frequency S2: Number of output pulses D: Pulse output device (Y0 ~ Y3
available)
Explanations:
1. When PLSY instruction has been executed, the specified quantity of pulses S2 will be output
through the pulse output device D at the specified pulse output frequency S1
2. S1 specifies the pulse output frequency
Output frequency range of MPU
Output Y0, Y2 Y1, Y3
SS2: 0~10,000Hz
16-bit instruction 0~10,000Hz
range ES2/EX2/SA2/SX2/SE: 0~32,767 Hz
SS2: 0~10,000Hz
32-bit instruction 0~10,000Hz
ES2/EX2/SA2/SX2/SE: 0~100,000 Hz
If frequency equals or smaller than 0Hz is specified, pulse output will be disabled.
If frequency bigger than max frequency is specified, PLC will output with max frequency.

3. S2 specifies the number of output pulses.

16-bit instruction: -32,768~32,767. 32-bit instruction: -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647.
When S2 is specified as K0, the pulse will be output continuously regardless of the limit of pulse
number.
4. When D1220/D1221 = K1 or K2, the positive/negative sign of S2 denotes pulse output direction
(Positive/negative).
5. Four pulse output modes: (They are not applicable to DVP-12SE.)
Mode D1220 D1221
Output K0 K1 K2 K3 K0 K1 K2 K3#
Y0 Pulse Pulse ACW
Y1 Pulse Dir B Pulse
Y2 Pulse Pulse A CCW
Y3 Pulse Dir B Pulse
Pulse: Pulse A: A phase pulse CW: clockwise
Dir: Direction B: B phase pulse CCW: Counter-clockwise
Note : When D1220 is specified as K3, D1221 is invalid.
#

3-140
 3. Instruction Set

6. Four pulse output modes: (They are only applicable to DVP-12SE.)

D1220 D1221
Mode
K0 K1 K3 #
K0 K1 K3#
Output
Y0 Pulse Pulse CW
Y1 Pulse Dir Pulse
Y2 Pulse Pulse CCW
Y3 Pulse Dir Pulse
7. Pulse output flags:
Output device Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3
Completed Flag M1029 M1030 M1102 M1103
Immediately
M1078 M1079 M1104 M1105
pause
0.01~10Hz output M1190 M1191 M1192 M1193

a) M1029 = ON after Y0/Y1 (D1220=K1, pulse/Dir) output is completed.

M1102 = ON after Y2/Y3 (D1221=K1, pulse/Dir) output is completed.
M1029 = ON after the Y0/Y2 (D1220 = K3, CW/CCW) output is completed.
b) The execution completed flag M1029, M1030, M1102, and M1103 should be manually reset
by users after pulse output is completed.
c) When PLSY / DPLSY instruction is OFF, the pulse output completed flags will all be reset.
d) When M1190~M1193 = ON, the available output range for PLSY Y0~Y3 is 0.01~10Hz.
8. While the PLSY instruction is being executed, the output will not be affected if S2 is changed. To
change the pulse output number, stop the PLSY instruction, then change the pulse number.
9. S1 can be changed during program execution and the change will take effects until the modified
PLSY instruction is being executed.
10. The ratio of OFF time and ON time of the pulse output is 1:1.
11. If operand S1, S2 use index F, only 16-bit instruction is available.
12. There is no limitation on the times of using this instruction, however the program allows only 4
instructions (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) to be executed at the same time. If Y1 is used for several high
speed pulse output instructions, PLC will output according to the execution order of these
instructions.
Program Example:
1. When X0 = ON, 200 pulses of 1kHz are generated from output Y0, after the pulse output has
been completed, M1029 = ON to set Y20.
2. When X0 = OFF, pulse output Y0 will immediately stop. When X0 turns ON again, the pulse
output will start from the first pulse.

3-141
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

X0
PLSY K1000 K200 Y0

M1029
Y20

0.5ms

Output Y0 1 2 3 200

1ms

Points to note:
1. Description of associated flags:
M1029: M1029 = ON when Y0 pulse output is completed.
M1030: M1030 = ON when Y1 pulse output is completed.
M1102: M1102 = ON when Y2 pulse output is completed.
M1103: M1103 = ON when Y3 pulse output is completed.
M1078: Y0 pulse output pause (immediately)
M1079: Y1 pulse output pause (immediately)
M1104: Y2 pulse output pause (immediately)
M1105: Y3 pulse output pause (immediately)
M1190: Se t Y0 high speed output as 0.01~10Hz.
(DVP-12SE does not support this function.)
M1191: Se t Y1 high speed output as 0.01~10Hz.
(DVP-12SE does not support this function.)
M1192: Se t Y2 high speed output as 0.01~10Hz.
(DVP-12SE does not support this function.)
M1193: Se t Y3 high speed output as 0.01~10Hz.
(DVP-12SE does not support this function.)
M1347: Auto reset Y0 when high speed pulse output completed
M1348: Auto reset Y1 when high speed pulse output completed
M1524: Auto reset Y2 when high speed pulse output completed
M1525: Auto reset Y3 when high speed pulse output completed
M1538: Indicating pause status of Y0
M1539: Indicating pause status of Y1
M1540: Indicating pause status of Y2
M1541: Indicating pause status of Y3

3-142
 3. Instruction Set

2. Description of associated special D registers:

D1030: Present number of Y0 output pulses (Low word).
D1031: Present number of Y0 output pulses (High word).
D1032: Present number of Y1 output pulses (Low word).
D1033: Present number of Y1 output pulses (High word).
D1336: Present number of Y2 output pulses (Low word).
D1337: Present number of Y2 output pulses (High word).
D1338: Present number of Y3 output pulses (Low word).
D1339: Present number of Y3 output pulses (High word).
D1220: Phase of the 1st group pulse output (Y0,Y1), please refer to explanations of the
instruction.
D1221: Phase of the 2 group pulse output (Y2,Y3), please refer to explanations of the
nd

instruction.
3. More explanations for M1347,M1348, M1524, M1525:
Generally when pulse output is completed, PLSY instruction has to be reset so that the
instruction can start pulse output one more time. When M1347, M1348, M1524 or M1525 is
enabled, the associated output terminals (Y0~Y3) will be reset automatically when pulse output
is completed, i.e. the PLSY instruction is reset. When PLC scans to PLSY instruction again, the
pulse output starts automatically. In addition, PLC scans the 4 flags after END instruction, hence
PLSY instruction in continuous pulse output mode requires a delay time of one scan cycle for
next pulse output operation.
The function is mainly used in subroutines or interrupts which require high speed pulse output.
Here are some examples:
Program Example 1:

EI

FEND

M1000
I 001 SET M1347

DPLSY K1000 K1000 Y0

IRET

M1000
I 101 SET M1524

DPLSY K1000 K1000 Y2

IRET

END

3-143
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Explanations:
a) Whenever I001 is triggered, Y0 will output 1,000 pulses; whenever I101 is triggered, Y2 will
output 1,000 pulses.
b) When pulse output is completed, there should be an interval of at least one scan cycle before
next pulse output operation is triggered. .
Program Example 2:

X1
SET M1347
X2
PLSY K1000 K1000 Y0

END

Explanation:
When both X1 and X2 are ON, Y0 pulse output will operate continuously. However, there will be a
delay of approx. 1 scan cycle every 1000 pulses.

3-144
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

ES2/EX2 SS2 SA2 SX2
58 PWM Pulse Width Modulation SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F PWM: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Pulse output width (ms) S2: Pulse output cycle (ms) D: Pulse output device (Y0, Y1, Y2,Y3)
Explanations:
1. S1 is specified as pulse output width (t). S2 is specified as pulse output cycle (T).
Rule: S1 ≦ S2. (It is not applicable to DVP-12SE.)
Reference Table for Output Cycle and Output Width
Range of Output Y0 Y2 Y1 Y3
pulse output t 0~10000 0~32767
width / cycle T 1~10000 1~32,767
Flag for switching unit M1112 M1113 M1070 M1071
Flag for high-speed output M1116 is ON. (Unit: 1us) M1117 is ON. (Unit: 10us)

2. S1 is specified as pulse output width (t). S2 is specified as pulse output cycle (T).
Rule: S1 ≦ S2. (It is only applicable to DVP-12SE.)
Reference Table for Output Cycle and Output Width
Range of Output Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3
pulse output t 0~10000 0~32767
width / cycle T 1~10000 1~32767
Flag for switching unit M1112 M1070 M1113 M1071

3. Pulse output devices for operand D: Y0, Y1, Y2, Y3,

4. When several pulse output instructions (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) use Y1 or Y3 as the output device
in the same scan cycle, PLC will perform the instruction which is executed first.
5. When S1≦0, S2≦0 or S1＞S2 , errors will occur (M1067 and M1068 will not be ON) and no
output will be generated from pulse output devices. When S1 = S2, the pulse output device will
be ON continuously.
6. S1, S2 can be changed when PWM instruction is being executed.
7. When M1112 = ON, the unit of Y0 output pulse is 10μs, when M1112 = OFF, the unit is 100μs.
8. When M1070 = ON, the unit of Y1 output pulse is 100μs, when M1070 = OFF, the unit is 1ms.
9. When M1113 = ON, the unit of Y2 output pulse is 10μs, when M1113 = OFF, the unit is 100μs.
(It is not applicable to DVP-12SE.)
10. When M1113 = ON, the unit of Y2 output pulse is 100μs, when M1113 = OFF, the unit is 1ms. (It
is only applicable to DVP-12SE.)

3-145
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

11. When M1071 = ON, the unit of Y3 output pulse is 100μs, when M1071 = OFF, the unit is 1ms.
12. When M1116 is ON, M1112 and M1113 do not work. The time unit of the pulse output through
Y0 and Y2 is 1μs. DVP-ES2 version 3.00/SS2 version 2.80/SA2 version 2.60/SE version
2.60/SX2 version 2.40 support this function.
13. When M1117 is ON, M1070 and M1071 do not work. The time unit of the pulse output through
Y1 and Y3 is 10μs. DVP-ES2 version 3.00/SS2 version 2.80/SA2 version 2.60/SE version
2.60/SX2 version 2.40 support this function.
14. If M1116 for DVP-SS2 is enabled, the minimum pulse output width should be larger than 20.
Otherwise, due to the limitations on the hardware bandwidth of Y0 and Y2, the output result is
not the correct time width.
Program Example:
When X0 = ON, Y1 output the pulse as shown X0
PWM K1000 K2000 Y1
opposite. When X0 = OFF, output Y1 turns OFF.

t=1000ms

Output Y1

T=2000ms

Note:
1. Flag description:
M1070: Switching clock pulse of Y1 for PWM instruction (ON:100 us, OFF: 1ms)
M1071: Switching clock pulse of Y3 for PWM instruction (ON:100 us, OFF: 1ms)
M1112: Switching clock pulse of Y0 for PWM instruction (ON:10 us/100µs for SE; OFF:
100 us/1ms for SE)
M1113: Switching clock pulse of Y2 for PWM instruction (ON:10 us, OFF: 100 us)
M1116: If M1116 is ON, the time unit of the pulse output through Y0 and Y2 is 1μs.
M1112 and M1113 do not work.
M1117: If M1117 is ON, the time unit of the pulse output through Y1 and Y3 is 10μs.
M1070 and M1071 do not work.
2. Special D registers description:
D1030 PV of Y0 pulse output (Low word)
D1031 PV of Y0 pulse output (High word)
D1032: Low word of the present value of Y1 pulse output
D1033 High word of the present value of Y1 pulse output
D1336 PV of Y2 pulse output (Low word)
D1337 PV of Y2 pulse output (High word)
D1338: Low word of the present value of Y3 pulse output.
D1339: High word of the present value of Y3 pulse output.

3-146
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

ES2/EX2 SS2 SA2 SX2
59 D PLSR Pulse Ramp SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F PLSR: 9 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DPLSR: 17 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
S3 * * * * * * * * * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S1: Maximum frequency (Hz) S2: Number of pulses S3: Ramp up/down time (ms)
D: Pulse output device (Y0, Y1, Y2 and Y3 are available) (DVP-12SE does not support Y1 and Y3.)
Explanations:
1. PLSR instruction performs a frequency ramp up/down process when positioning. Speed ramp up process
is activated between static status to the target speed. Pulse output persists in target speed before getting
close to target position. When target position is near, speed ramp down process executes, and pulse
output stops when target position is achieved.
2. Set range of S1 pulse output frequency:
Range of S1 pulse output frequency:
Output Y0, Y2 Y1, Y3
SS2: 6~10,000Hz
Output 16-bit 6~10,000Hz
ES2/EX2/SA2/SX2/SE: 6~32,767Hz
frequency:
SS2: 6~10,000Hz
32-bit 6~10,000Hz
ES2/EX2/SA2/SX2/SE: 0~100,000Hz
If frequency smaller than 6Hz is specified, PLC will output 6Hz.
If frequency bigger than max frequency is specified, PLC will output with max frequency.

3. When output device is specified with Y0, Y2, the start/end frequency of Y0 is set by D1340 and start/end
frequency of Y2 is set by D1352.
4. When output device is specified with Y1, Y3, the start/end frequency is 0Hz.
5. When D1220/D1221 = K1 or K2, positive/negative sign of S2 denotes pulse output direction.
6. PLSR instruction supports two modes of pulse output as below list.
Mode D1220 D1221
Output K0 K1 K0 K1
Y0 Pulse Pulse
Y1 Pulse Dir
Y2 Pulse Pulse
Y3 Pulse Dir

7. When assigning Y0 and Y2 output mode as Pulse, i.e. D1220 = K0, D1221 = K0, the available range for S2
is 1~32,767 (16-bit instruction) and 1~2,147,483,647 (32-bit instruction).

3-147
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

8. When assigning Y0 and Y2 output mode as Pulse/Dir, i.e. D1220 = K1, D1221 = K1, the available range
for S2 is 1~32,767 or -1~-32,768 (16-bit instruction) and 1~2,147,483,647 or -1~-2,147,483,648 (32-bit
instruction)
9. When assigning output device as Y1 and Y3, the available range for S2 is 1~32,767 (16-bit instruction)
and 1~2,147,483,647 (32-bit instruction).
10. S3: Ramp up/down time (unit: ms, min. 20ms).
When assigning output device as Y1 and Y3, the set value of ramp up and ramp down time should be the
same.
When assigning output device as Y0 and Y2, and if:
 M1534 = OFF (Y0) and M1535 = OFF (Y2), the ramp up and ramp down time should be the same.
 M1534 = ON and M1535 = ON, then S3 specifies ramp up time only. The ramp down time is
specified by value set in D1348 (Y0) and D1349 (Y2).
11. When M1257 = OFF, ramp up/down curve of Y0 and Y2 is straight line. When M1257 = ON, ramp
up/down curve will be S curve. The ramp up/down curve of Y1 and Y3 is fixed as straight line
12. The output will not be affected if S1, S2 or S3 are changed when PLSR instruction is being executed.
PLSR instruction has to be stopped if changing values in S1, S2 or S3 is required.
13. Flags for indicating pulse output status:
Output Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3
Completion M1029 M1030 M1102 M1103
Immediately Pause M1078 M1079 M1104 M1105

a) When pulse output on Y0/Y1 specified as Pulse/Dir (D1220 = K1) is completed, completion flag
M1029 = ON.
b) When pulse output on Y2/Y3 specified as Pulse/Dir (D1221 = K1) is completed, completion flag
M1102 = On。
c) When PLSR/DPLSR instruction is activated again, the completion flags will automatically be reset.
14. During the ramp up process, the pulse numbers (frequency x time) of each speed shift may not all be
integer values, but PLC will operate integer value only. In this case, the omitted decimals will result in
errors between each speed shift, i.e. pulse number for each shift may differ due to this operation. For
ensuring the required output pulse number, PLC will fill in pulses as need automatically in order to
correct the deviation.
15. There is no limitation on the times of using this instruction in the program. However, only 4
instructions can be executed at the same scan time. When several pulse output instructions (PLSY,
PWM, PLSR) use Y1 as the output device in the same scan cycle, PLC will execute pulse output
according to the driven order of these instructions.
16. Set value falls out of the available range of operands will be automatically corrected with the min. or
max available value.
17. When M1334 or M1335 is enabled, execute API59 PLSR/DPLSR instructions on Y0 or Y2 to
ramp-down when the conditional contacts are closed.

3-148
 3. Instruction Set

ES2/ 12SA2/
Series ES2-C ES2-E SS2 12SE 26SE 28SA2
EX2 SX2
Firmware
V3.42 V3.48 V1.00 V2.86 V3.28 -- V2.0 V3.0
version
Program Example:
1. When X0 = ON, PLSR performs pulse output on Y0 with a target speed of 1000Hz, output pulse number
D10 and ramp up/down time of 3000ms. Ramp up process begins to increase 1000/20 Hz in every shift
and every shift outputs D10/40 pulses for 3000/20 ms.
2. When X0 = OFF, the output stops immediately and starts from the count value in D1030, D1031 when
PLSR is executed again.
3. Ramp up/down shifts for Y0, Y2: 20. Ramp up/down shifts for Y1, Y3: 10
X0
PLSR K1000 D10 K3000 Y0

Pulse speed(Hz)

Target speed:1000 Hz Frequency

20 20 increased/decreased
19 19 in every shift:
1000/20 Hz
... ...
7 Output pulses 7
6 6
20-shifts 20-shifts
5 5
4 4
3 3
16-bit instruction:1~32,767
2 32-bit instruction:1~2,147,483,647
2
1 1
Time(Sec)
Ramp up time Ramp down time
3000ms 3000ms

Explanations on associated flags and registers:

1. Description on associated flags:
For M1029, M1030, M1102, M1103, M1078, M1079, M1104, M1105, M1538, M1539, M1540, M1541,
M1347, M1348, M1524, M1525, please refer to PLSY instruction.
M1108: Y0 pulse output pause (ramp down). ON = pause, OFF = resume
M1109: Y1 pulse output pause (ramp down). ON = pause, OFF = resume
M1110: Y2 pulse output pause (ramp down). ON = pause, OFF = resume
M1111: Y3 pulse output pause (ramp down). ON = pause, OFF = resume
M1156: Enabling the mask and alignment mark function on I400/I401(X4) corresponding to
Y0.
M1257: Set the ramp up/down of Y0, Y2 to be “S curve.” ON = S curve.
M1158: Enabling the mask and alignment mark function on I600/I601(X6) corresponding to

3-149
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Y2.
M1534: Enable ramp-down time setting on Y0. Has to be used with D1348
M1535: Enable ramp-down time setting on Y2. Has to be used with D1349
2. Description on associated special registers:
For D1030~D1033, D1336~D1339, D1220, D1221, please refer to PLSY instruction
D1026: M1156 = ON, D1026 stores pulse number for masking Y0 (Low word).
D1027: M1156 = ON, D1026 stores pulse number for masking Y0 (High word).
D1135: M1158 = ON, D1135 stores pulse number for masking Y2 (Low word).
D1136: M1158 = ON, D1135 stores pulse number for masking Y2 (High word).
D1232: Output pulse number for ramp-down stop when Y0 mark sensor receives signals.
(Low word).
D1233: Output pulse number for ramp-down stop when Y0 mark sensor receives signals.
(High word).
D1234: Output pulse number for ramp-down stop when Y2 mark sensor receives signals
(Low word).
D1235: Output pulse number for ramp-down stop when Y2 mark sensor receives signals
(High word).
D1348: M1534 = ON, D1348 stores the ramp-down time of CH0(Y0, Y1) pulse output.
D1349: M1535 = ON, D1349 stores the ramp-down time of CH1(Y2, Y3) pulse output.
D1340 Start/end frequency of the pulse output CH0 (Y0, Y1)
D1352 Start/end frequency of the pulse output CH1 (Y2, Y3)
3. Operation of Mark function on Y0:
Frequency

Target X4 external interrupt

speed

Pulse number if no
Start/end external interrupt on X4
freuquency
D1340
Time
D1348 Ramp-down time Pulse
Ramp-up number
time
DD1232
Ramp-down stop pulse
number when Mark
is detected

 When M1156/M1158 = ON, enable ramp-down pause (Mark function) on Y0/Y2 when X4/X6 receives
interrupt signals.

3-150
 3. Instruction Set

 When Mark function is enabled, ramp down time is independent of the ramp up time. Users can set
ramp up time in S3 and ramp down time in D1348/D1349. (Range: 20ms~32767ms)
 When Mark function is executed and the ramp-down stop pulses (DD1232/DD1234) are specified,
PLC will execute ramp-down stop with specified pulses after Mark is detected. However, if
DD1232/DD1234 are less than the specified ramp-down time (D1348 / D1349), PLC will fill
DD1232/DD1234 with the value of ramp-down time. In addition, if DD1232/DD1234 is more than the
half of total output pulses, PLC will modify DD1232/DD1234 to be less than half of the total output
pulses.
 Ramp-down stop pulses (DD1232/DD1234) are 32-bit value. Set value K0 will disable the Mark
function.
 Y0,Y2 relative parameters for Mask and Alignment Mark function:
Parameter Pulse number Output
Ramp Pulse number
Input for ramp-down pause Pause
Mark flag down for masking
Output points of Mark (ramp status
time output
function down)
Y0 M1156 X4 D1348 D1026, D1027 D1232, D1233 M1108 M1538
Y2 M1158 X6 D1349 D1135, D1136 D1234, D1235 M1110 M1540
Program example 1:
M0
SET M1156

DMOV K10000 D1232

M0
DPLSR K100000 K1000000 K20 Y0

FEND

M1000
I401 INCP D0

IRET

END

Explanations:
 When M0 is triggered, Y0 executes pulse output. If external interrupt is detected on X4, pulse output
will perform ramp down process for 10,000 pulses and then stop. M1108 will be ON to indicate the
pause status (ramp down). If no interrupt is detected, Y0 pulse output will stop after 1,000,000 pulses
are completed.
 When pulse output ramps down and stops after Mark is detected, M1538 will be ON to indicate the
pause status. If users need to complete the remaining pulses, set OFF the flag M1108 and pulse
output will resume.
4. Operation of Mask function on Y0:

3-151
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Frequency
Y0 is masked from Y0 is ready for
interrupts on X4 interrupts from X4

Target
speed

Pulse number if no
Start/end external interrupt on X 4
frequency
D1340 Time
Pulse
Ramp down time
number
(D1348)
Pulses to be m asked,
Specified by DD1026
Ramp-down stop pulse
number when M ark
is detected (D D1232 )

 Mask function on Y0 will be enabled when D1026 and D1027 are specified with values other than 0.
Mask function is disabled when D1026 and D1027 are specified with 0. If pulse output process can not
reach the target speed, PLC will clear DD1026 to disable the Mask function. If the Mask range is set to
be within the ramp-up section, PLC will automatically modify DD1026 to be longer than the ramp-up
section. On the other hand, if DD1026 is set between ramp- down section, PLC will modify DD1026 to
be the range before the beginning of ramp-down process. Mask function setting method on Y2 is the
same as Y0.
Program example 2:
M0
SET M1156

DMOV K50000 D1026

DMOV K10000 D1232

M0
DPLSR K100000 K1000000 K20 Y0

FEND

M1000
I401 INCP D0

IRET

END

Explanations:
 When M0 is triggered, Y0 executes pulse output. When external interrupt is detected on X4 after
50,000 pulses, pulse output will perform ramp down process for 10,000 pulses and then stop. M1108
will be ON. If no interrupt is detected on X4, Y0 pulse output will stop after 1,000,000 pulses are
completed.
 Interrupt triggered between 0 ~ 50,000 pulses will be invalid, i.e. no ramp-down process will be

3-152
 3. Instruction Set

performed before 50,000 pulses are achieved.

Points to note:
 When Mark function is executed with Mask function, PLC will check the validity of Mask range first,
then ramp-down stop pulses of Mark function. If the above set values exceed the proper range, PLC
will automatically modify the set values after the instruction is executed.
 When PLSR or positioning instructions with ramp-up/down section are enabled, the user can check
the pulses of ramp-up section in DD1127 and pulses of ramp-down section in DD1133.
 Users can perform single speed positioning when ramp-up/down time setting is not specified.

5. Adding mask and alignment mark function for CH0 and CH1
 Available for the followings
ES2/ 12SA2/
Series ES2-C ES2-E SS2 12SE 26SE 28SA2
EX2 SX2
Firmware
V3.28 V3.28 V1.00 V2.82 V3.28 -- V2.0 V3.0
version

 CH0 and CH1 relative parameters for Mask and Alignment Mark function:
Number of

Marking External Starting/ ramp-down

Output Ramp-up Ramp-down Front Back
deceleration input Stopping pulses
number time time masking masking
flag point frequency after

marking

CH0
D1232/D12 D1026 D1100
M1156 X4 D1343 D1348 D1340
(Y0/Y1) 33 D1027 D1101

CH1
D1234/D12 D1135 D1102
M1158 X6 D1353 D1349 D1352
(Y2/Y3) 35 D1136 D1103

3-153
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

 Execution of the mask function (use Y0 as an example)

Frequency

External interrupts X4 External interrupts X4

Invalid Waiting for external Invalid
interrupts X4

Target
frequency

start/end frequency
D1340

Pulse #

D1026, D1027 D1100, D1101

Pulse number to end for masking in the front Pulse number to start for
masking in the back

 Alignment mark function can be done in the sections of ramp-up, rump-down and speed.

6. Adding fixed slope function for CH0 and CH1

 Available for the followings
ES2/EX 12SA2/
Series ES2-C ES2-E SS2 26SE 28SA2
2 SX2
Firmware
V3.28 V3.28 V1.00 V2.82 V3.24 V2.0 V3.0
version

 Y0 and Y2 relative parameters for fixed slope function:

Special device for the
Output Flag for fixed slope
maximum frequency
Y0 M1604 D1410, D1411
Y2 M1605 D1412, D1413

 The frequency for the normal slope is defined by the frequencies of starting, ending and the target
as well as the time of ramp-up and down. See the black line for reference.

3-154
 3. Instruction Set

The frequency for the fixed slope is defined by the frequencies of starting, ending and the maximum
as well as the time of ramp-up and down. See the red line for reference.

7. Add new functions such as adding alignment marks to the ramping down, the frequency of the fixed
slope and selected masking for the output points Y1 and Y3. The actions are the same as
aforementioned 5 and 6. And the relative parameters are listed below.
 Available for the followings
ES2/ 12SA2/
Series ES2-C ES2-E SS2 12SE 26SE 28SA2
EX2 SX2
Firmware
V3.42 V3.48 V1.00 V2.86 -- -- -- V3.0
version

 Special D/M Devices Corresponding to the Marking and Masking Function

Number of
Marking External Starting/
Output Ramp-up Ramp-down ramp-down Front Back
deceleration input Stopping
number time time pulses masking masking
flag point frequency
after marking

D1026/ D1100/
Y0 M1156 X4 D1343 D1348 D1340 D1232/D1233
D1027 D1101

D1154/ D1156/
Y1 M1157 X5 NA NA NA D1236/D1237
D1155 D1157

D1135/ D1102/
Y2 M1158 X6 D1353 D1349 D1352 D1234/D1235
D1136 D1103

D1158/ D1160/
Y3 M1159 X7 NA NA NA D1238/D1239
D1159 D1161

It does not support separating the ramp up and ramp down nor does it support setting up the start/stop
frequency.

3-155
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

 Y1 and Y3 relative parameters for fixed slope function:

Special device for the
Output Flag for fixed slope
maximum frequency
Y1 M1606 D1988，D1989
Y3 M1607 D1990，D1991

Note: If the values in the device where stores pulse number for masking in the front for Y0-Y3 is zero or
less than -4 or equals to -4, it indicates the marking and masking functions in the front are disabled. On
the other hand, if the values is greater than 0 or between -1 to -3, it indicates the marking and masking
functions in the front are enabled. If the values in the device where stores pulse number for masking in
the back for Y0-Y3 is less than 0 or equals to 0, it indicates the marking and masking functions in the
back are disabled. On the other hand, if the values is greater than 0 or if the values in the device where
stores pulse number for masking in the front is less than -3, it indicates the marking and masking
functions in the back are enabled.

8. PLSR/DPLSR Instructions
 Added new marking behaviors A-C for PLSR/DPLSR instructions and behavior B (-3) for DCLLM
instruction.
Applicable Models and Starting Versions
Series ES2/EX2/ES2-C ES2-E 12SA2/SX2 SS2 12SE 26SE 28SA2

Firmware V3.60 V1.20 V3.00 -- V2.02 V2.02 V3.0

Descriptions of behaviors A-C
A. When the number of pulses is not sufficient to complete acceleration/deceleration, marking and masking
are added in the area.
See the Y0 example below. The masking in D1026/1027 of the front masking area and D1100/1101 of the
back masking area are effective.

B. When the masking number is -1 in the front masking area, it indicates masking occurs in the acceleration
area; -2 in the front masking area means masking occurs in the areas of acceleration and full-speed; -3
(only available for DCLLM instruction) in the front masking area means masking occurs in the areas of
acceleration, full-speed and deceleration.

3-156
 3. Instruction Set

See the Y0 example below. The values of D1026/1027 in front masking area are set among -1 to -3. The
masking can be done accordingly, you do not need to calculate the number of pulses in each area.

C. You can set number of deceleration pulses after marking to less than 0 (<0) and when marking is done,
the output stopped immediately.

See the Y0 example below. If you set the number of deceleration pulses after marking to less than 0
in D1232/1233, the output stopped immediately after it received the signal, whether it’s in the area of
acceleration, full-speed or deceleration.

3-157
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

3-158
 3. Instruction Set

API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

ES2/EX2 SS2 SA2 SX2
60 IST Initial State SE

Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F IST: 7 steps
S * * *
D1 *
D2 *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
SA2 SA2 SA2
ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2 ES2/EX2 SS2 SX2
SE SE SE
Operands:
S: Source device for assigning pre-defined operation modes (8 consecutive devices). D1 The
smallest No. of step points in auto mode. D2: The greatest No. of step points in auto mode.
Explanations:
1. The IST is a handy instruction specifically for the initial state of the step ladder operation modes.
2. The range of D1 and D2 : S20~S911, D1 < D2.
3. IST instruction can only be used one time in a program.
Program Example 1:
M1000
IST X20 S20 S60

S: X20: Individual operation (Manual operation) X24: Continuous operation

X21: Zero return X25: Zero return start switch
X22: Step operation X26: Start switch
X23: One cycle operation X27: Stop switch
1. When IST instruction is executed, the following special auxiliary relays will be assigned
automatically.
M1040: Movement inhibited S0: Manual operation/initial state step point
M1041: Movement start S1: Zero point return/initial state step point
M1042: Status pulse S2: Auto operation/initial state step point
M1047: STL monitor enable
2. When IST instruction is used, S10~S19 are occupied for zero point return operation and cannot
be used as a general step point. In addition, when S0~S9 are in use, S0 initiates “manual
operation mode”, S1 initiates “zero return mode” and S2 initiates “auto mode”. Thus, the three
step points of initial state have to be programmed in first priority.
3. When S1 (zero return mode) is initialized, i.e. selected, zero return will NOT be executed if any
of the state S10~S19 is ON.
4. When S2 (auto mode) is initialized, i.e. selected, auto mode will NOT be executed if M1043 =
ON or any of the state between D1 to D2 I is ON.

3-159
D V P - E S 2 / E X 2 / S S 2 / S A2 / S X 2 / S E & T P O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l - P r o g r a m m i n g

Program Example 2:
Robot arm control (by IST instruction):
1. Control purpose:
Select the big balls and small balls and move them to corresponding boxes. Configure the
control panel for each operation.
2. Motion of the Robot arm:
lower robot arm, clip balls, raise robot arm, shift to right, lower robot arm, release balls, raise
robot arm, shift to left to finish the operation cycle.
3. I/O Devices
Right-limit X2 Right-limit X3
Left-limit X1 (big balls) (small balls)
Y0

Upper-limit X4 Y3 Y2
Y1
Upper-limit X5
Ball size Big Small
sensor X0

4. Operation mode: